Home

SPW3 manual rev 5 - Parallel Geoscience Corporation

1. Field File 14 M 1 a a l al A A A A A A A A A A A o o N i Hi sa K x 1000 100 LI 1500 1500 2000 2000 E Ej gi 10 Trace type Variable area wiggle y Horizontalscale 3200 15 4 1
2. E gt fa SEGY Analyzer NPR3 Geometry sgy 23 Endian order Text header Textheader Binary header Traceheader Seismic view Get from data Header size in bytes 3200 Big endian Little gt Text format EBCDIC ASCII Binary header Header size in bytes 400 Start byte Data type Override Value Samples per trace 21 4byteint v 1000 Sample interval 17 4byteint v 2 0 Sample format 25 4byte int v 4 byte IEEE Foi y Number of traces 116887 Trace header Header size in bytes 240 Header name Startbyte Data type Minimum Maximum fa Field File Number 9 4byteint y 14 14 Channel Number 13 byte int y 2 25 CMP 21 4byteint y 2036 2059 Inline 181 4byteint y 790156 792686 Crossline 185 byte int y 972668 972728 Offset 37 4byteint y 8663 7943 CMP Easting 193 4byteint y 2036 2059 CMP Northing 185 4byteint y 972668 972728 CMP Elevation 177 4 byte int y 5004 5034 CMP Datum 229 4byte int v Source Line 197 byte int y 6023 6023 aji Source Location 17 4byteint y 6173 6173 Primary header Field File Y Annotation increment 10 gt Horizontal scale 24 00 Source Easting 73 4byteint y 791919 791919 ap PS a Source Northing 77 4byteint 9766
3. Parameter descriptions Trace header The trace header field containing the attribute to be mapped 251 Editing Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the Editing Steps category Processing steps currently available are Processing Categories Automatic Trace Edit Dataset Math Kill Traces Phase Rotation Remove DC Bias Remove Reverberation Reverse Traces S N Based Record Edits Trace Header Calculation Trace Header Logic Trace Header Math Trace Header Resequencing Trace Sample Math 252 Automatic Trace Edit Usage The Automatic Trace Edit step allows you to automatically remove invalid or noisy traces from your data set based on user defined criteria An option exists to output both the trace header values corresponding to the edited traces to a Trace Kills card data file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart Z Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 Eo J 0 3 FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ a la A a Auxiliary Data A P baal Auxiliary Data R Z mA M gt e le gt le kid i Execute Abort a Open flow Close flow gi Gp New flow Help Current project Slonik I X 767 Y 319 253 Step Parameter Dialog 6 S Automat
4. F X Trace Interpolation 10 SEG Y File Interpolate Traces Progress T2 SEG D Resample Seismic SEGY File SPW File Tee Output Sercel SEG D Files Signature Input 525 3D Radar File Usage The 3D Radar File step is for the direct input of GPR data recorded in the 3D Radar format Input Links 1 None The radar file is selected inside the step dialog mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart _ _ 2 Documentation flo BAX e add 3D Radar File asi Output spw SELECT 526 Step Parameter Dialog 3D Radar Format Input 3D Radar Format Input Select 3DR input file 3DR filename Browse Parameter Description Select 3DR input file Use the Browse button to locate the 3D Radar formatted file to be reformatted on input 527 ARAM SEGY File Usage The ARAM SEGY File step is for the direct input of SEGY data recorded with an ARAM Aries recording instrument Input Links 1 None The ARAM SEGY file is selected inside the step dialog mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart _ _ 2 Documentation flo BAX F Wy ARAM SEG Y File asi Output spw lt gt SELECT 528 Step Parameter Dialog ARAM SEG Y Files ARAM SEG Y File
5. Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of lines Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of source lines in the source statics file Sheet Header field Receiver line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write source line number in the output source statics file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of source positions per source line in the output source statics file Data header field Location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location number in the source statics file 221 Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source static in milliseconds in the source static file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the source statics file 222 Source Statics List Usage The Source Statics card data item is used to store source static information received in a foreign format Step Parameter Dialog Source Statics List Card File Source Statics List Card File Enter the source statics list card data file Custom
6. Horizontal Trace Sum Mi output spw 252 111 389 Step Parameter Dialog Horizontal Trace Sum Horizontal Trace Sum Trace Sum Operation Sum n traces into one Number of traces to sum 3 C Sum common offset traces Moon Cancel Parameter Description Trace Sum Operation Select whether to sum traces sequentially or by common offset bin Sum n traces into one Enter the number of sequential input traces to sum into a single output trace Sum common offset traces Enter the offset bin size over which input traces will be summed into a single output trace All input trace offsets falling between n offset bin size and n 1 offset bin size will be summed into a single output trace 590 Median Stack Usage The Median Stack step performs a sample by sample horizontal stack using a specified percent of the samples centered on the median sample Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo input spw Median Stack A NA aa 391 Step Parameter Dialog Median Stack Median Stack Percent of traces to stack 50 Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces C Use true amplitude traces Output SPW format seismic file name Browse Parameter Description Percent of traces to stack Enter the percentage o
7. Am plitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing Filtering Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 982 Y 550 131 Step Parameter Dialog Operation Add header to Subtract header from Multiply by header Divide by header Power of header Header field User Defined 1 ite nalts Parameter Description Type of operator Select the mathematical operation that will modify the seismic amplitude values Header Field Select the trace header field that will modify the seismic amplitude values Example If the Multiply by header operator is selected and the Header field is set to offset then the sample values in each input trace will be multiplied by the value of offset in the corresponding trace header 132 Windowed Trace Balance Usage Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory Example Flowchart Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 A FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled E Amplitude Adjustment E Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display y o Editing Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 1148 Y 405 133 Step Parameter Dialog Number of win
8. E Seismic input range Allows the wavelet to be extracted from a limited spatial zone of the input data Line If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP lines used to extract the wavelet Min Minimum CMP line number to input Max Maximum CMP line number to input Location If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP locations used to extract the wavelet Min Minimum CMP location number to input Max Maximum CMP location number to input 709 Seismic time window If checked allows the wavelet to be extracted from a limited temporal zone of the input data Start time on trace Enter the start time for analysis End time on trace Enter the end time for analysis Wavelet length ms Enter the length of the output seismic wavelet Pre whitening Enter the percent pre whitening that will be used to stabilize the computation of the phase spectrum 710 Wavelet Estimation Seismic Well Usage The Wavelet Estimation Seismic Well step estimates the seismic source wavelet from the combination of a well log derived reflectivity sequence and the adjacent post stack seismic data The step allows the wavelet to be derived by either the Fourier Division or the Wiener Filtering methods The input data are assumed to be minimum phase You set the wavelet length and choose the data window from which the wavelet is extracted A small amount of white noise can be ad
9. Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute tape length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone 442 Scale input velocities by Enter the amount by which the input velocities are scaled up or down A value of 1 0 does not alter the velocity field Browse Select the velocity card containing P wave stacking velocities previously obtained through analysis of vertical component data Do inverse NMO application If checked the inverse NMO correction will be applied instead of the usual forward NMO 443 Birefringence Analysis 2C Usage The splitting of shear waves into fast and slow components is called Birefringence Analysis of the split shear waves allow the data recorded in the acquisition or inline crossline coordinate system to be rotated into the frame of reference of the principal axes of the azimuthally anisotropic medium The rotated data correspond to the radial and transverse components of motion The 2C Birefringence analysis rotates the receiver components through 180 degrees and a time shift of up to 50 of the analysis window to maximize the radial component energy of an inline source or the transverse component energy of a crossline source The analysis also provides an estimate of the azimuth of anisotropy Input Links 1 Seismic data in commo
10. Calculate the root mean squared value in the analysis window Average magnitude Calculate the average of the absolute values in the analysis window Maximum magnitude Determine the maximum of the absolute values in the analysis window Energy Calculate the sum of the squares of sample values in the analysis window Maximum amplitude Determine the maximum value in the analysis window Median value Determine the median value in the analysis window 484 Number of windows per trace Specify the number of analysis windows per trace for a single channel analysis or the number of analysis windows per record for a multi channel analysis Start time ms Enter the start time of the window to use Length ms Enter the length of the window to use Apply moveout Specify whether a linear moveout will be applied to the start time of the analysis window Velocity If moveout is to be applied specify the moveout velocity Output Header Select the trace header that will be updated with the results of the analysis 485 Amplitude Spectrum Usage The Amplitude Spectrum step inputs seismic data and outputs the amplitude spectrum of each trace into the output seismic file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data amplitude spectrum attribute traces mandatory References See Technical Note TN AmpSpc doc Example Flowchart RE Documentation
11. Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the cmp elevation associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the crooked line bin definition file 152 CMP Statics Usage The CMP Statics card data item is used to store CMP based static shift values in milliseconds Step Parameter Dialog CMP Statics Card File CMP Statics Card File Enter the cmp statics card data file name C Data Example Data cmp statics Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data a fx Add Sheet Del Sheet Cell Math Sheet 2 of 3 153 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize CMP Statics Customize CMP Statics Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number 1 Number of rows 21 Data header field artcolumn Length Location number 1 p Time 11 Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of lines Enter the start column and the number of co
12. Enter the start time in milliseconds for each gate gt 0 0 Length ms Enter the operator length in milliseconds for each gate gt 0 0 Equalize RMS amplitudes If checked the trace RMS amplitude prior to AGC and after AGC will be the same 123 Clip Usage The Clip step is used to remove high amplitude sample values from the input data and replace them with a user supplied threshold sample value The largest positive and largest negative acceptable sample amplitudes are provided by the user Values outside of this range are replaced by the threshold value Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory Example Flowchart Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 ba ba e FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z La Le se a Le Execute Abort Fe Open flow Close flow EN an New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X Ti Y 2113 124 Step Parameter Dialog Clipping Clipping upper value 32767 0 Clipping lower value 32767 0 Parameter Description Clipping upper value Specify the largest acceptable positive value Positive values larger than the clipping upper limit are replaced with the clipping upper limit Clipping lower value Specify the large
13. Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 1040 Y 313 A 129 Step Parameter Dialog Time Multiplier Time Exponent Velocity Multiplier Velocity Exponent Apply inverse function Use normalized gain function CT Parameter Description The Gain equation for the following definitions is Gain T_Multiplier Time T_Exponent V_Multiplier Velocity Time V_Exponent Time Multiplier Enter the time multiplier in the gain equation Time Exponent Enter the time exponent in the gain equation Velocity Multiplier Enter the velocity multiplier in the gain equation Velocity Exponent Enter the velocity exponent in the gain equation Apply inverse function If checked an inverse spherical divergence correction will be applied to your data Use normalize gain function Normalize the gain function to be applied 130 Trace Header Amplitude Math Usage The Trace Header Amplitude Math step use used to modify sample values using mathematical operations on trace header fields Any of the trace header fields can be used Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory Example Flowchart Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 kabak FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ
14. Nominal receiver interval 110 00 Zero degrees azimuth North Define survey orientation for signed offsets Bo Cancel Parameter Description Kill undefined traces and records If checked any traces or records that are not represented in the SPS files will be marked as dead Use unsigned offsets If checked the offset values written to the seismic header will be unsigned Nominal receiver interval Enter the nominal interval between receiver stations in distance units Use unsigned azimuths If checked the azimuth values written to the seismic header will range from 0 to 360 degrees with zero degrees of azimuth equal to the user specified direction By default azimuth values are signed and range from 0 to 180 degrees with zero degrees of azimuth equal to the user specified direction Zero degrees azimuth East If selected then zero degrees of source receiver azimuth will be set equal to due East Zero degrees azimuth North If selected then zero degrees of source receiver azimuth will be set equal to due North Define survey orientation for signed offsets If checked the sign on offset values will be adjusted for the orientation of the dominant receiver line azimuth such that offset up the spread will be positive and offsets down the spread will be negative Enter survey orientation Receiver line azimuth Enter the value of the receiver line azimuth with respect to West that w
15. R9 spw te E Confirm Installation The installer is ready to install SPW3 on your computer Click Next to start the installation SPW 3 Installation Confirmation Click on the Next button then the installation will be performed and you will shown the status of the installation Installing SPW3 SPw3 is being installed Please wait o ee SPW 3 Installation Status 14 Finally the Installation Complete message will be shown Now SPW 3 is ready for use E spw3 fo le Installation Complete SPw3 has been successfully installed Click Close to exit Cancel Back SPW 3 Installation Complete When the installation has finished your SPW3 directory will be populated with the files and dll libraries required for running SPW 3 g EOE gt computer gt Local Disk ic gt Program Files 65 SPW3 gt O S s Organize v Include in library y Share with w New folder Ke Favorites Name Y Date modified Type Size HZ Desktop J Documents 11 16 2011 1 33 AM File folder B Downloads J imageformats 11 16 2011 1 33 AM File folder El Recent Places Je phonon_backend 11 16 2011 1 33 AM File folder D Development EN fc ico 1 11 2011 2 17 PM Icon 2 KB J steplib IES flowchart exe 11 11 2011 5 07 PM Application 10 750 KB 2 phonon4 dil 11 2 20107 28PM Application extens 261 KB Libraries phonond4 dll 11 2 2010 7 27 PM Application extens 498 KB E Documents 2
16. Select Component Component Type Ca a Cancel Parameter Description Component Type Use the drop down menu to select a source or receiver component Available components include Receiver Pressure Receiver Vertical Receiver Inline Receiver Crossline Receiver Rotated Vertical Receiver Rotated Transverse Receiver Rotated Radial Source Vertical Source Inline Source Crossline Source Rotated Vertical Source Rotated Transverse Source Rotated Radial Source Summed Vertical 465 Three Component Rotations Usage The Three Component Rotation step performs Euler rotations of three component data Each rotation requires the specification of a rotation axis and a rotation angle The rotation angles can be read from any of the trace header fields or specified as a constant by the user Input Links 1 Seismic data sorted into three component clusters mandatory Output Links 1 Rotated seismic data mandatory Example Flowchart Fc Documentation flo 05 Input data spw Three Component Rotations da One record spw lt Status Open 197 161 466 Step Parameter Dialog E Three Component Rotation Three Component Rotation Number of rotations A First rotation Rotation axis Header rotation angle Rev Vertical User Def 1 v O Constant rotation angle Angle in radians Second rotation Rotation axis Header rotation angle None None v O Cons
17. Sorting Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the Sorting Steps category Each of the sort steps appears on the flow chart as a seismic icon Therefore compilation and execution of a seismic sort is performed by either of two methods First if the flow segment to be compiled only contains the sort step and the corresponding seismic output the flow must be compiled and executed as a separate job This is because the lack of an intermediate processing step between the sort and the output will result in the compilation of all linked steps on the Flowchart canvas Second if the flow to be compiled contains an intermediate processing step i e Copy Seismic Data between the sort and the seismic output the flow may be compiled and executed as the subset of a larger job flow on the Flowchart canvas Processing steps currently available are General Trace Sort Receiver Sort 567 CMP Sort Usage The CMP Sort step allows you to sort a seismic file into CMP ordered records The CMP Sort step appears on the flow chart as a seismic icon Therefore compilation and execution of the CMP Sort is performed by either of two methods First if the flow segment to be compiled only contains the sort step and the corresponding seismic output the flow must be compiled and executed as a separate job This is because the lack of an intermediate processing step between the sort and the output will result in the compilation of
18. Status Open 619 236 441 Step Parameter Dialog Apply PS Nonhyperbolic Moveout Apply PS Nonhyperbolic Moveout Mute Control Correction velocity 1500 0 M Apply stretch mute Interpolation Type Selection Percentage 30 C Linear Quadratic Taper length samples 15 Scale input velocities by 1 000 Do inverse moveout Input PP velocity file Browse Cancel Parameter Description Correction velocity Enter the P wave NMO velocity This constant velocity will be used if a P wave stacking velocity function is NOT selected using the Browse button Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not usually exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to be evenly sampled at the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Mute Control Set the parameters for the stretch mute definition Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NHMO corrected data Stretch muting removes the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction
19. Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces Use true amplitude traces Output SPW format seismic file name Browse cancel Parameter Description Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Browse Select this button to set the output seismic file name 594 Receiver Order Stack Usage The Receiver Order Stack step allows you to input data sorted in common receiver order and output a common receiver stack seismic file You may apply a scaling exponent for scaling of your traces Traces are scaled by the fold of your data raised to the power of the chosen exponent i e fold EXP You also specify whether you want to sum relative or absolute amplitude traces Input Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw os Receiver Order Stack A Status Open 247 102 595 Step Parameter Dialog
20. Usage The Post Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration implements a diffraction summation migration of the Kirchhoff type that is capable of handing vertically and laterally varying velocity fields The input velocity field is assumed to be the stacking velocity field derived from velocity analysis of the pre stack data Input Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards mandatory Output Links 1 None The migrated section is output to an auxiliary disc file Reference Schneider W A 1976 Integral formulation for migration in two and three dimensions Geophysics 43 p 49 76 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Stacking Velocity Function 4 Post Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration Status Open 334 352 423 Step Parameter Dialog Post Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration Post Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration Time window Limit output time Target Traveltime at target 4000 0 Velocity at target 2450 0 Dip limits lv Limit dip Dip limit at target degrees 45 0 Dip roll off band degrees 5 0 Anti alias filter vV Apply anti alias filter Maximum frequency 60 0 Output Range Limit Min Max v Migrate from surface topography Line Y 105 0 105 0 50 5 990 5 Output SPW file name and working directory for temporary disk file BP 105 45degOp 100 Vel Migration spw Cancel gt M Verbose console mode Location j Browse Parameter Description
21. 3 1000 0 500 0 Y Apply 2000 UserDef3 z OK Cancel Parameter Description Type of Analysis Specify whether the amplitude analysis will be single channel or multi channel Single channel attributes are calculated per trace Multi channel attributes are calculated from the ensemble of traces in an input gather Type of Attribute Specify the type of amplitude attribute Dominant frequency Calculate the the dominant frequency in the analysis window Peak amplitude Determine the amplitude of the dominant frequency in the analysis window Bandwidth Calculate the bandwidth of the frequency spectrum assuming Gaussian statistics The width of the 1 standard deviation is calculated Average frequency Calculate the average frequency in the analysis window 503 Kurtosis A statistical measure of the sharpness vs flatness of the frequency spectrum Power Calculate the sum of the squares of spectral amplitudes in the analysis window Number of windows per trace Specify the number of analysis windows per trace for a single channel analysis or the number of analysis windows per record for a multi channel analysis Start time ms Enter the start time of the window to use Length ms Enter the length of the window to use Apply moveout Specify whether a linear moveout will be applied to the start time of the analysis window Velocity If moveout is to be applied specify
22. 40 00 to 50 00 deg 220 00 to 230 00 deg Cancel 533 Parameter Description Limit traces per record output If checked the output records will be limited by the specified parameters No of first trace Enter the first trace to output per record Traces per record Enter the number of traces per record to be output Traces increment Enter the increment between traces in the record to be output Azimuth Range Dialog Limit by azimuth If checked the azimuth range limiting parameters will be applied to the copy of the data Uni directional If selected the azimuth range will include only angles in one direction Bi directional If selected the azimuth range will include both positive and negative angles Starting azimuth deg Enter the starting angle for your range in degrees Azimuth range deg Enter the number of degrees from the starting angle to include in the range Azimuths to output The dialog will indicate the azimuths that will be output as specified by the above parameters 534 Create Sine Waves Usage The Create Sine Waves step is a utility for testing purposes It creates a series of mono frequency sine waves with each trace being a different frequency from the start frequency to the end Input Links None Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo e Create Sine Wave 535 Step
23. Coordinate orientation Right handed Comer 2 easting 810979 66 Inline offset Inline increment 3 p Le o E o E Survey dimension Three dimensional w Comer 2 northing 978051 00 Crossine azimuth 178 64 Crossine bin size 110 00 POS JN Display sources Yes Display receivers Yes Interactive binning Disabled Comer 3 easting 786936 07 Crossine range First crossine 2000 a 9 v Corner 3 northing 937468 91 Crossiine offset 5 00 Crossine increment 7 alle ello Save Help Close Current project Teapot Dome Current file temp bsf Easting 830044 88_ Northing 934815 63 84 Displaying Survey Fold Map Survey Picking Help SPS Database Image Database Basemaps Binning Parameters Fold Maps gt Select fold image Offset Distribution Maps Azimuth Distribution Maps Elevation Maps Statics Maps Display Preferences Tool Preferences When you select the Fold gt Generate fold from SPS command for a 3D dataset you will see the parameter dialog shown below for creating a fold map Select Fold of Coverage Inputs N B me SPS file selection Source file Map Receiver file Map Relation file Map npr3 sps x npr3 rps x npr3 xps x Exdusion zones Background image Display exclusion zones on basemap Display background image on basemap Map title Unload image Map label Fold of Coverage Map output Basemap name File Browse OK Help Cancel 85 Selectin
24. Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Mute Interpolation If checked the early mutes will be interpolated between the control points where picks were made 477 Apply Surgical Mute Usage The Apply Surgical Mute step allows you to apply a set of picked mute cards to your data You may choose to interpolate mute functions for the records between the picked mute records or to just mute the records associated with the picked mutes You have a choice of applying a Hanning Hamming or Blackman type of mute taper You may also specify the length of the mute taper Surgical mutes may be interactively defined in Seis Viewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Surgical Mutes cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw H Apply Surgical Mute Surgical Mutes input spw SELECT 159 92 478 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Surgical Mute Apply Surgical Mute Mute Taper Type Hanning C Hamming C Blackman No taper Mute taper length samples 10 Y Mute interpolation Cancel Parameter Description Mute Tape Type Select the type of taper to use when applying the mute function Hanning A Hanning taper is specified by the equa
25. Show Map Controls Ctrl V Display Preferences Tool Preferences The Attribute Map Menu 55 The Survey Menu The Survey menu contains commands for displaying maps of the data locations defining the 3D coordinate binning information and quality checking of the geometry information rvey Picking Help SPS Database Image Database Basemaps Binning Parameters b Fold Maps d Offset Distribution Maps gt Azimuth Distribution Maps gt Elevation Maps d Statics Maps Display Preferences Tool Preferences The Survey Menu 56 The Picking Menu The Picking menu contains commands for picking various auxiliary data including first breaks horizons velocities or mutes Window Definition Delete Current Pick Ctrl D Clear Current Pick File Close Current Pick File View Current Pick File The Picking Menu 57 The Help Menu The Help menu contains commands for displaying the current information about the installed version of SPW 3 and the licensing and access to the Flowchart help files he About FlowChart Help The Help Menu 58 Building Processing Flows To build a flow start by selecting the steps you wish to use in the processing step lists and placing them on your flowchart Next using the Link Tool connect each item in the flow as you wish for the data to move through the processing sequence The process for using the Link Tool involves two steps after selecting the Link
26. Specify input directory O Specify starting input file Input Directory Dataset Parameters Override Number of records 0 O Sample interval ms 0 0000 O Samples pertrace 0 O Maximum traces perrecord 2048 O Input files as they are written to disk Strip auxiliary traces Parameter Description Specify input directory With the radio button set to Specify input directory the browse button toggles to Input Directory Use the Input Directory button to specify the folder where the SEGY files are located Specify starting input file With the radio button set to Specify starting input file the browse button toggles to First Input File Use the First Input File button to specify the first SEGY file located inside the Input Directory to be reformatted Number of records By default all records will be reformatted Check the override box to specify the number of records starting with the first input file Sample interval ms By default the sample interval will be extracted from the binary header If that value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify a sample interval in milliseconds Samples per trace By default the number of samples per trace will be extracted from the binary header If that value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify a the number of samples per trace 529 Brick 2D Data Usage The Brick 2D Data step was design to modify the ma
27. The GMG Station Card File is used to store receiver station statics information previously computed with Green Mountain Geophysics refraction statics software These files cannot be created manually in SPW Step Parameter Dialog GMG Station Card File GMG Station Card File Enter the GMG Station card data file name Browse Cancel Easting Northing Elevation Status Refr Static Datum Static Cor Velocity Uphole Time Hole Depth 2742992 00000 550680 000000 4691 000000 60 860001 7500 000000 2742910 00000 550677 000000 4690 000000 58 070000 7500 000000 2742828 00000 550674 000000 4686 000000 58 099998 7500 000000 27427 46 00000 550671 000000 4681 000000 56 240002 17500 000000 2742664 00000 550667 937500 4677 000000 57 040001 7500 000000 2742582 00000 550664 937500 4671 000000 54 889999 7500 000000 27 42500 00000 550661 937500 4666 000000 52 660000 7500 000000 2742418 00000 550658 937500 4660 000000 52 049999 7500 000000 2742336 00000 550655 937500 4657 000000 50 730000 7500 000000 2742254 00000 550652 937500 4656 000000 48 540001 7500 000000 2742171 75000 550649 937500 4657 000000 46 959999 7500 000000 2742089 50000 550646 937500 4655 000000 45 360001 7500 000000 GMG Station Card File Relative Static Layer 1 VelocityLayer 2 VelocityLayer 3 VelocityLayer 4 Velocity Delay Time 1 Delay Time 2 Delay Time 3 Layer 1 Elev Layer 2 Elev
28. There are three basic structures for the processing flow that is used to update the seismic trace header with the acquisition geometry information The structure you use will depend on the nature of the seismic survey The three seismic surveys and their associated processing flows can be classified as follows 1 2D seismic In SPW 2D seismic surveys are those in which the sources and receivers are laid out on the same 2D line and the CMP number can be computed as CMP Source Location Receiver Location 2 This implies that source location 101 and receiver location 101 are co located i e have the same X Y coordinates 2 Crooked line 2D seismic In SPW Crooked line 2D seismic surveys are those that will be processed as a single CMP line though the sources and receivers are not necessarily laid out along the same line This implies that source location 101 and receiver location 101 need not be co located i e are not required to have the same X Y coordinates 3 3D seismic In SPW 3D seismic surveys are those in which the sources and receivers are laid out areally and the data will be organized in terms of inlines and crosslines An example of each of these three types of processing flows can be found in the Templates library under the Geometry category 358 Example Flowchart for a 2D seismic survey RE lt UNTITLED gt o input spw Receiver Locations SPS Format Es Geometry Definition Observer Notes SPS F
29. Time window The output time may be limited to decrease the run time and the amount of memory required for execution Limit output time If checked the output time of the migration will be limited Start time on trace Enter the start time for migration in milliseconds End time on trace Enter the end time for migration in milliseconds Target Traveltime at target Estimated travel time of target event This time is used to set the migration aperture Velocity at target Estimated velocity of target event This velocity is used to set the migration aperture Output range Allows control of the spatial range of migrated output data 424 Line If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP lines output by the algorithm Min Minimum CMP line number to output Max Maximum CMP line number to output Location If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP locations output by the algorithm Min Minimum CMP location number to output Max Maximum CMP location number to output Dip Limits The maximum allowable migration aperture in degrees of dip Limiting the aperture of the migration operator will decrease the run time and the amount of memory required for execution Dip limit at target Enter the number of degrees of aperture in the migration impulse response at the target time Dip rolloff band Taper length in degrees of aperture over which the migration impulse respons
30. p Maintenance 4 Back Search programs and files p The SPW 3installation automatically creates a menu item to run Flowchart exe Dan Documents Pictures Music Games Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support Flowchart Menu Item 17 SPW 3 User Directory The first time the Flowchart application is executed after the installation a number of directories and files are copied to the documents home directory on Windows This location is different for each version of Windows and also is different depending on the operating system language The images shown here are all for Windows 7 US English version EEES Ji SPW3 Documents gt SPW3InstallBackupFiles v 4 Search SPW3installBackupFiles py 2 Organize v Include in library y Share with v New folder v fl 0 x Favontes Name Date modified Type Size HZ Desktop J ColorScaleFormats 11 16 2011 1 33 AM File folder B Downloads Ji Docs 11 16 2011 1 33 AM File folder 2 Recent Places d ProjectFiles 11 16 2011 1 33 AM File folder Ji Development Ji SegyFormats 11 16 2011 1 33 AM File folder ab steplib 4 warning mp3 2 3 2011 9 06 AM MP3 Format Sound 46 KB A Libraries Documents Ss bh 5 items Files Installed into SPW3 Install Directory The files written into the SPW3 Documents SPW3lInstallBackupFiles are original backup copies of all the color scales the online documentation a SPW3 Project dire
31. 110 112 114 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 o j o a a o 116 118 120 119 122 119 124 aa a o a a aaa ojojajojeojojojojojojojo jo o 119 AAA Figure 4 Observer SPS file corresponding to the survey illustrated in figure 1 388 180 0 90 90 180 90 180 180 Case 1 0 East Signed Azimuths Case 2 0 North Signed Azimuths 270 0 180 0 270 90 90 180 Case 3 0 East Unsigned Azimuths Case 4 0 North Unsigned Azimuths Figure 5 Definition of azimuths using the Geometry Definition parameters 389 Geometry Interpolation Usage The Geometry Interpolation step Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file mandatory Output Links 1 Receiver SPS file mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo e Geometry Interpolation receiver SPS file SELECT 177 390 Step Parameter Dialog Geometry Interpolation Geometry Interpolation Locations are specified as distances Start location number 1 0 Location number increment 1 0 Group interval ft or m Location Index in file 1 000 corresponding to first location 1 000 Cancel Parameter Description Locations are specified as distances If checked the group interval is manually defined Start location number Enter the number of the first receiver location Location number increment Enter the r
32. 30 000000 16 0001 1 000000 000000 000000 181 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Phase Matching Statistics Phase Matching Statistics Column Start col Length CMP loc CMP line CMP Easting CMP Northing Phase Rotation Angle Time Shift 1 Correlation Coefficient 61 Record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions CMP loc Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP Location number CMP line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP Line number CMP Easting Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP Easting CMP Northing Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP Northing Phase Rotation Angle Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the Phase Rotation Angle Time Shift Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the Time Shift Correlation Coefficient Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the Correlation Coefficient Record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the Phase Matching Statistics file 182 Polygon Definition File Usage The Polygon Definition File card data item is used to specify the coordinates of a polygon that will be used to select data from a seismic volume The Polygon Definition
33. 480 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Tail Mute Apply Tail Mute Mute Taper Type Hanning C Hamming Blackman C No taper Mute taper length samples 10 v Mute interpolation cancel Parameter Description Mute Tape Type Select the type of taper to use when applying the mute function Hanning A Hanning taper is specified by the equation x n 0 5 0 5 cos 2 pi n N Hamming A Hamming taper is specified by the equation x n 0 54 0 46 cos 2 pi n N Blackman A Blackman taper is specified by the equation x n 0 42 0 5 cos 2 pi n N 0 08 cos 4 pi n N No taper No taper will be applied to the mute This may result in problems in later processing steps due to Gibbs effect Mute taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Mute Interpolation If checked the tail mutes will be interpolated between picked control points 481 Quality Analysis This section documents the processing steps available in the Quality Analysis category The types of quality analysis currently available are 2 Quality Analysis a Amplitude Analysis Autocorrelation Compare Traces Cross Correlation Extract Dead Traces FT Cube o F Frequency Slice FT Time Slice Frequency Analysis Gabor Transform_ Instantaneous Amplitude Instantaneous Frequency Instantaneous Phase
34. Browse Seismic Data Processing Flows Seismic Display Auxiliary Data Project name Teapot Dome Well Logs Images Data dimensions Data units Survey type Reports 2 Crooked line e 3D O Feet Meter O Land Marine Transition Set as current project Select project on application start up se Edit Project Dialog 25 SEG Y Processing Format SPW 3 uses the SEG Y format as the processing file format Of course data may be read in from other formats but the internal files used in the processing are SEG Y SEG Y files may be input directly from recording systems or from other seismic software and SEG Y files written by SPW 3 may be read directly by other software such as interpretation packages which use SEG Y By default the SEGY Standard format file delivered as part of the SPW 3 installation is used for decoding the SEG Y files You can select any SEG Y format file existing in the SegyFormats or you can build a customized format file to read non standard SEG Y files Exa Segy Import SEGY File File Name Input data is composed of multiple disk files SEGY Format Format Name C Users Dan Documents spw SegyFormats SEGY Standard xml SEGY Analyzer Create New SEGY Format SEGY Index Build SEGY Inde File Browse Format Browse View Existing SEGY Format Trace Header Ranges SEGY Index Fields Trace sequential number Field File Number Channel Number Source Line Number Source L
35. Clipping level 32767 0 Method e Trace constant equalization Record constant equalization X Apply moveout to equalization window Linear moveout velocity 7000 0 a E 118 Parameter Description Equalization window start ms Enter the start time in milliseconds of the window to be used in calculating the trace amplitude gt 0 Window length ms Enter the length in milliseconds of the window to be used in calculating the trace amplitude gt 0 0 RMS level Enter the output RMS level of the data window specified gt 0 0 Clipping level Enter the clipping level of the trace data gt 0 0 Method Select whether to apply the equalization on a trace by trace basis or to maintain relative amplitudes and level the RMS value of the entire record Trace constant If selected your data will be equalized on a trace by trace basis Record constant If selected your data will be equalized on a record by record basis which will depend on the sort order of the input data Apply moveout window If checked the equalization will be performed after linear moveout at the specified velocity The window start time will shift by delta time offset velocity Linear moveout velocity Enter the constant moveout velocity gt 0 0 119 Apply Gain Usage The Apply Gain step allows you to apply gain function curves to your seismic data The gain curves are specified as time
36. Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo y di Input spw Stack ds Output spw Mm lt gt Status Open 311 254 587 Step Parameter Dialog Diversity Stack Diversity Stack Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces Use true amplitude traces Percentage traces to use 50 0 Parameter Description Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Percent of traces to use Enter the percentage of traces to sum into each resulting output diversity stacked trace A number such as 50 indicates that 50 of the samples centered on the median sample value will be used in the diversity summed sample 588 Horizontal Trace Sum Usage The Horizontal Trace Sum step is used to perform a horizontal sum of multiple input traces into a single output trace on the basis of either the sequential or the offset order of the input traces Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi input spw
37. Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN DpthConv doc Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Ss H Stack section spw Stack section spw Velocity Function Convert Time To Depth Convert Time To Depth kA Depth converted Stack section spw Depth converted Stack section spw Status Open 677 166 414 Step Parameter Dialog Convert Time to Depth Convert Time to Depth Correction velocity 7000 0 Output depth interval 10 00000 Number of output samples 1000 Interpolation Type Selection C Linear Quadratic Do inverse correction Cancel Parameter Description Correction velocity Enter the correction velocity ft sec or m sec to be used in the conversion This constant velocity will be used unless a velocity function is connected to the step In the case of GPR data convert this value to the appropriate units Output depth interval Enter the depth interval in your spatial units To obtain an estimate of the output depth interval first employ the formula X VT where X estimated depth of section V average velocity of section and T one way time of the section i e record length divided by two Second employ the formula output depth interval AX X number of samples 1 Number of output samples Enter the number of
38. Intermediate files are output only over the analysis window and are used to judge section quality for the output iteration The analysis files are recommended to be a subset of the full volume to reduce disk storage requirements A full volume stack is output for the final iteration Iteration interval Intermediate files are output for every Nth iteration Output Line Range If the limit box is checked analysis files are built for lines between the min max line values at the line interval Min Max line and line interval is restricted to be 1 for 2 D seismic If the limit box is unchecked only the line interval is applied to the output stack starting at the first line Output Stack Type Select the output stack type Stack type may be CMP source receiver or none Verbose console mode If this box is checked static shifts for each unique line and location number are summarized for each iteration in the console window Output SPW format seismic file name The output file name for the final stack The file name is specified using the Browse button 632 Surface Consistent Statics Usage The Surface Consistent Statics step calculates source and receiver residual statics using a Gauss Seidel iterative method to solve for the source static receiver static structure term and residual NMO that provide a best fit to the linear traveltime equations in a least squares sense linear inversion routine to decompose traveltime e
39. Layer 3 Elev _Int Datum 1863 010010 7250 290039 62 650002 4570 209961 9999 1940 640015 7250 290039 59 880001 4569 379883 9999 1886 800049 7251 450195 60 169998 4568 410156 9999 1875 469971 7254 240234 58 540001 4567 339844 9999 1800 180054 7257 859863 59 630001 4566 180176 9999 1779 010010 7261 279785 57 730000 4565 049805 9999 1775 119995 7264 399902 55 709999 4563 990234 9999 1702 209961 7267 220215 55 400002 4562 979980 9999 1700 829956 7269 000000 54 240002 4562 109863 9999 1761 750000 7269 220215 52 090000 4561 410156 9999 1842 619995 7268 779785 50 480000 4560 819824 9999 1867 469971 7267 939941 48 939999 4560 410156 9999 165 GMG Station Card File cont 166 Gain Curves Usage The Gain Curves card data item is used to store time decibel gain pairs A gain of 0 dB is equivalent to scalar multiplication by a factor of 1 a gain of 6 dB by a factor of 2 a gain of 12 dB by a factor of 4 a gain of 18 dB by a factor of 8 and so on Time is in milliseconds Step Parameter Dialog Gain Curve Card File Gain Curve Card File Enter the gain curve file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data HE Gain curves 101 Sheet 1 of 5 Gain 0 000000 6 000000 1000 000000 2 000000 2000 000000 18 000000 167 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Gain Curve File Customize Gain Curve File Num
40. Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of mute locations sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows TL TTT Sort order Data header field Start column Length Time Offset NA Ea Unique trace number Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel i Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of mute locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of mute locations in the output mute file Sheet Header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write CMP line number in the output mute file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write CMP location number in the output mute file 232 Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of CMP positions in the CMP line in the output mute file Sort Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the sort order e g common source CMP etc of the data file on which the early mute was picked Data header field T
41. Phase Matching Resolution Signal to Noise Source Energy Estimation Trace Analysis Repot Trace Header Maps 482 Amplitude Analysis Usage The Amplitude Analysis step performs single or multi channel analysis of sample amplitudes and updates a user specified trace header with the results of the analysis Attribute types include RMS value Average Magnitude Maximum Magnitude Maximum Amplitude Median Value and Energy Input Links 1 Seismic data in any order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data amplitude spectrum attribute traces mandatory Example Flowchart FE Documentation flo input data spw E Amplitude Analysis bps output data spw Status Open 192 301 483 Step Parameter Dialog Amplitude Analysis Amplitude Analyses Type Of Analysis Single channel Multi channel Type Of Attribute RMS amplitude O Energy Median value O Average magnitude Maximum magnitude Maximum amplitude Number of windows per trace 1 Window Start ms Length ms Moveout Velocity Output Header 1 0 0 500 0 MApply 2000 0 User Def1 y Parameter Description Type of Analysis Specify whether the amplitude analysis will be single channel or multi channel Single channel attributes are calculated per trace Multi channel attributes are calculated from the ensemble of traces in an input gather Type of Attribute Specify the type of amplitude attribute RMS
42. Reference Stoffa P L Fokkema J T Freire R M and Kessinger W P 1990 Split step Fourier migration Geophysics 55 410 421 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo HH input spw Velocity Function E Split Step Migration output spw SELECT 288 166 433 Step Parameter Dialog Split Step Migration Split Step Migration Output start depth m or ft 0 000 Output depth increment 10 0 Number of depth samples 1000 1 00 Scale input velocities by l Specify trace spacing Algortihm adapted from Seismic Unix Copyright c Colorado School of Mines Cancel Parameter Description Output start depth m or ft Enter the starting depth for migration Output depth increment tau Depth sampling interval Number of depth samples Total number of output depth samples Scale input velocities by Input velocities will be multiplied by this number This scalar is used for adjusting the input velocities in the case that they were derived using Dix s equation and are not true interval velocities Specify trace spacing If checked allows for manual specification of the trace spacing By default SPW calculates the trace spacing for the stack as the group interval as you defined it in the geometry definition divided by two 2 434 Stolt Migration 2 D only Usage The Stolt Migration step implements a constant velocity or depth variable Stolt migration algorithm for post sta
43. Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory The trace header must be updated with source receiver azimuth and source and receiver component types The common receiver gathers should be sorted by 1 receiver number 2 source receiver offset 3 receiver component 5 Early Mute file containing time picks prior to the first breaks optional Output Links 2 Rotations Card data file containing a list of the rotation estimates for each source receiver pair mandatory Example Flowchart 469 BE Documentation flo First Break Mute Function Es wo Component Horizontal Rotation Horizontal Rotatio B Horizontally Rotated Receivers spw 470 Step Parameter Dialog Two Component Horizontal Rotation Two Component Horizontal Rotation Analysis window Rotation angle M Use analysis window Compute from covariance Window center ms 0 0 C Constant Window length ms 200 0 Offset limits C Scan for maximum power Limit offsets for mean rotation Parameter Description Analysis window Use analysis window If checked the rotation analysis will be based on the specified window of data If a First Break Pick Time card is linked to the Two Component Horizontal Rotation step then the analysis will be based on a window centered about the first break pick time Window center ms The center of the rotation analysis window If the analysis window is referenced to a first break pick file
44. The function of the tools from left to right are Select Link Delete Select All Undo Redo Clicking on a tool will change the interface mode enabling you to use that tool The tab key allows you to quickly switch between Select and Link The selection and linking tools are used in building a processing flow and Delete allows for deleting either flow items or flow links from a processing flow dll e 2 e Tool Bar 31 Selection Tool The Selection Tool i e the diagonal arrow can select either a processing step or the link between the processing steps When selected the Selection Tool button will appear depressed Selection Tool When using the Selection Tool the items selected will be highlighted the links will become bright green and the flow items will be enclosed by a dark black box and shown in light blue the auxiliary data items will also be enclosed by dark black box These are illustrated in the flow shown below where the Apply Normal Moveout Automatic Gain Control and the tpd cvs pic items and their connecting links are selected FlowChart Processin g Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Spectral Decomposition Help W segoo1 Geometry W segoo2 Bin Sort dh segons Brute Stack E tpd cvs pics El mute pics Amplitude Adjustment Card Data A P card Data R Z Display Editing Filtering Geometry Migration o component Quality Analysis Seismic Data Spectr
45. Velocity at target 4400 0 T Limit CMP location in lines A eet ae eee 00 0 Enter the SPW format seismic file name Cancel Browse Parameter Description Limit CMP lines If checked allows selection of input traces that will contribute to the selected CMP lines during migration First line Enter the first output line for PSTM partitioning Last line Enter the last output line for PSTM partitioning Limit CMP location in lines If checked allows selection of input traces that will contribute to the selected CMP locations in the previously selected CMP lines during migration First CMP location Enter the first output location for PSTM partitioning Last CMP location Enter the last output location for PSTM partitioning Traveltime at target Estimated travel time of target event This time is used to estimate candidate CMP bins for Pre Stack Kirchhoff partitioning Velocity at target Velocity of target event This value is used to estimate the aperture of the migration operator and therefore the candidate CMP bins for Pre Stack Kirchhoff partitioning Dip limit at target Estimated dip limit of target event This value is used to estimate the aperture of the migration operator and therefore the candidate CMP bins for Pre Stack Kirchhoff partitioning Enter the SPW format seismic file name Using the Browse button select the input file to be partitioned for Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time Migr
46. Window Control If checked only a window of the scan will be output Start of scan ms Enter the starting time of the semblance scan window Length of scan ms Enter the scan window length 674 Velocity Smoothing Usage The Velocity Smoothing step generates a smoothed version of a velocity field Input Links 2 Velocity Function card file mandatory Output Links 1 Velocity Function card file mandatory Example Flowchart HE Velocity Smoothing flo El Velocity Field Velocity oothing Smooth Velocity Field Status Open 51 115 675 Step Parameter Dialog Velocity Smoothing Velocity Velocity curve fit type Polynomial fit Spline fit Output sample density C Output at input points Resample Output samples Number of samples 30 Sample interval ms 50 0000 Start time ms 0 0000 Caneel Parameter Description Velocity curve fit type Polynomial fit Spline Output sample density Output at input points The time velocity pairs in the smoothed output velocity funcition will be located at the same times present in the input velocity function Resample The time of the time velocity pairs will be specified by the user Output samples If the output samples are being resampled select the sampling interval Number of samples Enter the number of time velocity pairs in each output velocity function Sample interval ms Enter
47. a least squares linear fit will be removed from the final statics solution 610 CMP Statics Separation Usage The CMP Statics Separation step inputs CMP Statics card data and separates the statics into long and short period components The operator is currently a 2 D operator which operates in the in line direction Input Links 1 CMP Statics cards mandatory Output Links 1 CMP Statics cards mandatory 2 CMP Statics cards mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo HA Input CMP Statics El CMP Statics Separation H Long Period CMP Statics Short Period CMP Statics n AE A 611 Step Parameter Dialog Statics Separation CMP Statics Separation Type Of Operator Running average Number of points odd 7 C Median Polynomial fit Cancel Parameter Description Type Of Operator defines the type of function to use for defining the fit to the long period statics solution Running Average This selects an averaging smoothing operator Number of points odd Enter the number of points in the running average smoother Median This selects a median smoothing operator Number of points odd Enter the number of points in the median smoother Polynomial fit This selects a polynomial fitting operator to approximate the long period statics Polynomial order Enter the order of the orthogonal polynomials to fit to the data 612 CMP
48. mandatory Reference Hampson D 1991 Inverse velocity stacking for multiple elimination Journal of the Canadian Society of Exploration Geophysics 22 p 44 55 Example Flowchart FE Documentation flo Me Input spw Radon Demultiple os Output spw Status Open 335 Step Parameter Dialog Radon Demultiple Radon Demultiple Model moveout Minimum differential moveout 32 0 Maximum differential moveout 500 0 Minimum multiple moveout 100 0 Ray parameters l Set number of ray parameters a Percent pre whitening 20 0 Minimum live traces 5 Cancel Parameter Description Model moveout Set the range of parabolas that will generate the primary and multiple models Minimum differential moveout Set the minimum differential moveout expressed in milliseconds on the far offset trace The primary model is generated with parabolas from the lt minimum differential moveout gt to the lt minimum multiple moveout gt Maximum differential moveout Set the maximum differential moveout expressed in milliseconds on the far offset trace The multiple model is generated with parabolas from the lt minimum multiple moveout gt to the lt maximum differential moveout gt Minimum multiple moveout Set the minimum multiple moveout expressed in milliseconds on the far offset trace The multiple model is generated with parabolas from the lt minimum multiple moveout gt to the lt maxi
49. ms Enter the length of the filter to be calculated and applied in milliseconds Design window start ms Enter the start time of the deconvolution design window in milliseconds Design window length ms Enter the length of the deconvolution design window in milliseconds 704 Time Variant Deconvolution Usage The Deconvolution step is a Wiener Levinson algorithm for applying either spiking or predictive multi gate deconvolution to your data You choose the percent pre whitening filter length number of operators the overlap of the operator design windows start time of each operator design window and the design window lengths For the predictive deconvolution method you must specify the predictive length of your wavelet You may also apply a linear moveout to your deconvolution design windows to allow a sliding window whose start time varies with offset Input Links 2 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw e Deconvolution output spw a a Status Open 335 353 705 Step Parameter Dialog Time Variable Deconvolution Time Variable Deconvolution Type Of Operator Spiking Predictive Number of operators per trace 12 Overlap between operators ms 500 0 rator Prewhiten Length ms Moveout Velocity Start ms Length ms 1 0 10 1150 0 V Apply 2000 0
50. of CMP locsfanalysis Use true amplitude traces First CMP loc to analyze 150 00 CMP loc increment 50 00 Exponent for normalization 1 00 Output SPW format seismic file name Browse Parameter Description Number of deltas Enter the number of deltas to use in the analysis A stacked section is calculated for each delta between the starting and ending d eltas Delta increment Enter the delta increment for the analysis This velocity will be used for NMO on the first output stack gt 0 0 Maximum offset Enter the ending velocity for the analysis This velocity will be used for NMO on the last output stack gt 0 0 First CMP line to analyze Enter the first CMP line number to analyze CMP line increment Enter the CMP line increment between lines to analyze No of CMP lines Enter the number of CMP lines to analyze 659 No of CMP locs analysis Enter the number of CMP locations in each analysis panel First CMP loc to analyze Enter the first CMP location to analyze CMP loc increment Enter the CMP location increment between groups of CMP locations to analyze Mute Control Select the stretch mute definition Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting restricts the stretching of the data due to the NMO Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function A value of ze
51. output 501 Frequency Analysis Usage The Frequency Analysis step performs single or multi channel spectral analysis of sample amplitudes and updates a user specified trace header with the results of the analysis Analysis types include Dominant Frequency Peak Amplitude at dominant frequency Bandwidth Average Frequency Spectral Kurtosis and Spectral Power Input Links 1 Seismic data in any order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data amplitude spectrum attribute traces mandatory Example Flowchart KB rreg and Amp Analysis flo j 01 xj ds Sample spw e Frequency Analysis a a Source Order Stack a Pi Status Open 369 247 Note The Stacking steps such as the Source Order Stack shown here will average the User Defined trace header fields where the attribute information is usually stored This is a very useful feature as it very simply enables the calculation and display of the average attribute values for sources and receivers 502 Step Parameter Dialog MM Frequency Analysis x Frequency nalysis Type Of nalysis Single channel Multi channel gt Type Of Attribute C Dominant frequency Bandwidth C Kurtosis C Peak amplitude C Average frequency Power Number of windows per trace fi Window Starn ms Length ms Moveout Velocity Output Header 1 foo 3000S Apply 2000 fuserbefs gt 2 Sooo 500 0 M Apply 2000 UserDef2
52. the flow to complete your processing Naming and Saving a Flow First you must give the flow a name and save it To name a flow document use the Save or the Save As commands in the File menu By default the flow will be saved into the project Flows directory You will want to assign a meaningful name to the flow document Flows are saved in XML format so you can view them with any text editor or web browser as well as opening the graphical view in SPW r Su Save processing flow file A A Se A Gee a Oat Computer Local Disk C Data SamaraTest Flows 4 Search Flows P Organize New folder ss 3 0 A a Ft Favorites Name Date modified Type Size HE Desktop 2 1 Geometry xml lg Downloads 2 SN Test xml E Recent Places 3 Trace Edit Testxml test2 xml XML Document 10 KB XML Document 9 KB XML Document 10 KB XML Document 8 KB BZ Desktop A Libraries Documents A Music Pictures E Videos B Dan j Computer Ga Network jE vmware host j WIN7 EF Control Panel Rerurle Rin File name X Save as type Flow files xml z a Hide Folders Save Cancel Save Flowchart XML File If you try to compile a job that has not been named and saved the Save as Flowchart dialog will automatically appear and you will be prompted to give the flow chart a name If you do not give the flow chart a valid name and save it t
53. the processing steps available The multi component processing steps currently available are 2 Multi Component BAX Apply Horizontal Rotation Apply PS Nonhyperbolic Moveout Birefringence Analysis 2 Birefringence Analysis 4C CCP Binning CCP Fold Geometry Constant Gamma Stack Convert PS Time Picks Dual Summation Horizontal Rotations Select Component Three Component Rotations Two Component Horizontal Rotation Wavefield Separation in the Multi 437 Note on Multi component trace header values Receiver Type Receiver component trace header value Hydrophone or pressure sensor 11 Vertical component receiver 12 Crossline component receiver 13 Inline component receiver 14 Rotated vertical component receiver 15 Rotated transverse component receiver 16 Rotated radial component receiver 17 Summed vertical component receiver 28 Receiver types and Receiver component trace header values Source Type Source component trace header value Vertical component source 22 Crossline component source 23 Inline component source 24 Rotated vertical component source 25 Rotated transverse component source 26 Rotated radial component source 27 Source types and Source component trace header values 438 Apply Horizontal Rotation Usage The Apply Horizontal Rotation step rotates the horizontal components of a multi component data vo
54. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 006 006 006 006 006 006 006 006 006 006 006 ane 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 oss 086 non Save Format 804268 80939377 6005423 5 804489 00939383 0005379 2 804710 70939388 8005348 5 804931 10939393 9005319 6 805148 90939398 1005322 6 805369 90939404 1005357 6 805589 80939408 9005384 1 805809 00939414 1005404 7 806029 30939419 5005474 8 806254 10939209 8005523 2 806474 50939214 8005525 3 806695 10939220 1005550 2 806914 70939225 2005580 5 807133 60939230 0005589 7 807354 30939235 9005578 2 807573 60939240 8005630 3 807793 60939241 0005656 7 808014 70939245 1005628 6 804252 70940028 1005358 8 804474 50940042 3005344 1 804694 80940047 4005312 6 804913 40940052 5005310 5 805133 90940057 3005339 3 805354 10940063 3005350 5 805574 30940068 0005352 6 805794 50940073 3005358 7 806011 40940077 2005345 7 806234 70940082 8005387 1 806453 20940089 7005400 2 encena ennannas annesen Help Close SPS Analyzer q 47 Processing Menu The Processing menu contains the commands for working with the flowcharts Processing Seismic Display S New processing tab Open Flow Close Flow Open Recent Flow Save Save as View Trace Headers Execute Submit to cluster Job Sc
55. 000000 1 850000 4 800000 107 000000 3 080000 9 040000 108 000000 4 310000 13 280000 109 000000 5 540000 17 520000 110 000000 6 770000 21 760000 111 000000 8 000000 26 000000 175 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Mulitcomponent Receiver Statics Customize Mulitcomponent Receiver Statics Number of comment records preceding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets Sheet header field Start column Length Receiver line number Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Location number Time Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver lines in the output multicomponent receiver statics file Sheet Header field Receiver line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line number in the output multicomponent receiver statics file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver stations in the output multicomponent receiver statics file Data
56. 112 000000 111 000000 101 119 000000 101 112 000000 115 500000 101 137 000000 101 112 000000 124 500000 101 164 000000 101 112 000000 138 000000 101 167 000000 101 115 000000 141 000000 101 236 000000 101 115 000000 175 500000 101 362 000000 101 115 000000 238 500000 101 239 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog MM Trace Reverse File Trace Reversal File Column Load Field file Channel Length x Source loc lt I Source line x Receiver loc xI Receiver line CMP loc CMP line Offset User Def 1 User Def 2 User Def 3 Xd Q A lt 4 xalol o al a al w nm m 2 o 3 bl Bal bad el Bad Ba a lle ad xI Record in the file in bytes C cancel i Parameter descriptions Load If checked indicates the existence of the entity in the file Field File Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the field file number associated with the trace kill Channel Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the channel number associated with the trace kill Source loc Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location associated with the trace kill Source line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source line associated with the trace kill Receiver loc Enter the start
57. 7 6008 6138 788721 80968829 7005025 7 6011 6131 789417 60967306 9004993 6 6012 6132 789618 20967516 7004987 3 6012 6142 789581 30969730 6005016 3 6013 6133 789848 30967755 4004992 0 6013 6143 789795 20969955 7005011 3 6014 6134 790061 30967981 0004993 0 6014 6144 790009 80970179 4005010 3 6015 6135 790276 90968207 8005013 7 6015 6145 790225 20970405 5005001 7 6016 6136 790491 40968430 5005000 0 6016 6146 790418 00970697 1005007 3 6017 6127 790757 90966457 4005039 0 6017 6137 790706 20968655 9004982 7 6017 6147 790655 00970855 9005008 6 6017 6157 790603 20973055 2005044 5 6018 6128 790973 10966681 6005042 1 6018 6138 790920 90968880 6004983 5 6018 6148 790869 10971080 4005003 5 6018 6158 790817 50973280 6005048 3 6019 6129 791187 20966906 8005060 7 6019 6139 791134 00969106 4004983 5 6019 6149 791064 40971284 9005006 8 6019 6159 791032 60973506 7005051 6 6020 6130 791402 70967131 6005080 5 6020 6140 791350 30969331 8004976 2 Hep ose SPS Receiver Record Record Analysis Tab 95 The SPS Point Record also has a tab for map display The Map tab allows you to specify the Plot Type The default is Basemap SPS Source Record Source record file name C Teapot Dome Survey npr3 sps File Browse Spreadsheet Map Plot Type Basemap y j O Close Help Save changes Save as SPS Receiver Record Basemap 96 SPS Source Locations The SPS Point Record displays Source Locations in a t
58. Bin Definition Enter the crooked line bin definition file name CASPVACrooked Line Bin Definition Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data HE Crooked Line Bin Definition Field File Channel Shot Line Shot Loc Rec Line Rec Loc CMP Line CMP Loc CMP Easting CMP Northing 150 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog W Crooked Line Bin Definition Customize Crooked Line Bin Defintion File Format Number of comment records preceding data 1 Data header field Start column Length Field file number Channel Shot Line N Shot Location Receiver Line n a Receiver Location CMP Line m CMP Location 6 sl m ANA Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 110 o y 3 o int Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required Data header field Field file number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the Field File number associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file Channel Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the channel number associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file Shot Line Enter the st
59. Build Super Gathers processing step mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic File mandatory Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo Ey 3 Ei vi Build Super Gathers Super Gather Velocity Analysis aii Velocity Analysis spw lt gt Status Open 286 9 667 Step Parameter Dialog Super Gather Velocity Analysis Super Gather Velocity Analysis Number of velocities 31 Mute cone y Starting velocity 1500 0 Y Apply stretch mute Velocity increment 100 0 Percentage 30 Semblance length ms 40 0 Taper length samples 15 Offset bin size 100 0 Semblance interval ms 24 0 Trace Amplitude Definition Interpolation Method O Use true amplitude traces OLinear Quadratic Use relative amplitude traces Output CVS mini stacks C spwiExample CVS Stacks spw CVS Browse Output binned gathers C spw Example Supergathers spw Parameter Description Number of velocities Enter the number of velocities to use in the analysis A stacked section is calculated at each velocity increment from Starting velocity to Starting Velocity Velocity increment Number of velocities 1 Starting velocity First velocity to scan Velocity increment Increment of velocity scans Semblance length ms Length over which semblance is calculated Offset bin size Semblance interval Time increment for calculating semblance 668 Apply stretch mute If chec
60. Card File Receiver Gains Card File Enter the receiver gains card data file name Customize Browse conce Example Card Data HE receiver gain Cell Math Sheet 1 of 1 Location 146 000000 0 417000 147 000000 0 313000 148 000000 0 001000 194 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Receiver Gains Customize Receiver Gains No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets Sheet header field Start column Length Receiver line number Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Location number Gain Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of lines Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver lines in the receiver gain file Sheet Header field Receiver line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line number in the output receiver gain file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver positions per receiver line in the output receiver gain file Data header field Locati
61. Customize Source Gains No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets io Sheet header field Start column Length Source line number Ss Number of rows ES Data header field Start column Length Location number fs Gain fs Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of lines Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of source gain pairs in the source gain file Sheet Header field Source line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write source line number in the output source gain file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of source positions per source line in the output source gain file Data header field Location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location number in the source gain file 215 Gain Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source gain in the source gain file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one l
62. DMO operator dip in degrees Limiting the aperture of the DMO operator will decrease the run time and the amount of memory required for execution Dip limit at target Enter the number of degrees of aperture in the DMO impulse response at the target time Dip rolloff band Taper length in degrees of aperture over which the DMO impulse response is tapered to zero Apply anti alias filter If checked applies a 2D sinc interpolator with an apodizing Hanning filter to reduce spatial aliasing of high frequency components of the DMO operator Output range Allows control of the spatial range of DMO corrected output data Line If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP lines output by the algorithm Min Minimum CMP line number to output Max Maximum CMP line number to output Location If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP locations output by the algorithm Min Minimum CMP location number to output Max Maximum CMP location number to output Output SPW file name and working directory for temporary disk file The Browse button allows selection of the DMO corrected output data volume 420 Phase Shift Migration 2 D only Usage The Phase Shift Migration step implements a constant velocity or a depth variable velocity post stack phase shift time migration in the frequency domain The input velocity field is assumed to be the stacking velocity field derived from velocity analysis of the
63. DO NOT want traces killed in the geometry application step to appear in the trace analysis report Output report file name Use the Browse button to assign a file name to the trace analysis report 522 Trace Header Maps Usage The Trace Header Maps step is used to create image files from the trace header values in 3D seismic data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 CMP Fold Image mandatory Example Flowchart OO oS 2 Documentation flo BAX A asi Input spw Trace Header Maps l CMP Fold Image ran gt SELECT 350 294 523 Step Parameter Dialog Attribute Maps Attribute Maps Select output header location Fold x CI Automatically scale output Attribute Map Sort Order Output Source Map O Output Receiver Map O Output CMP Map Parameter Description Select output header field Use the drop down menu to select the trace header field that will be mapped into the CMP Fold Image Automatically scale output Attribute Map Sort Order Select the output coordinate system source receiver or CMP for the image 524 Seismic Data This section documents the seismic data types in SPW and the processes currently available for creating those data types 2 Seismic Data BAX 3D Radar File Brick 2D Data Copy Seismic File Create Sine Wave Create Spikes
64. Demultiple Adaptive Radon Demultiple Model moveout Minimum differential moveout 32 0 Maximum differential moveout 500 0 Minimum multiple moveout 100 0 Ray parameters O Set number of ray parameters Percent add back 100 0 Percent pre whitening 20 0 Minimum live traces 5 Parameter Description Model moveout Set the range of parabolas that will generate the primary and multiple models Minimum differential moveout Set the minimum differential moveout expressed in milliseconds on the far offset trace The primary model is generated with parabolas from the lt minimum differential moveout gt to the lt minimum multiple moveout gt Maximum differential moveout Set the maximum differential moveout expressed in milliseconds on the far offset trace The multiple model is generated with parabolas from the lt minimum multiple moveout gt to the lt maximum differential moveout gt Minimum multiple moveout Set the minimum multiple moveout expressed in milliseconds on the far offset trace The multiple model is generated with parabolas from the lt minimum multiple moveout gt to the lt maximum differential moveout gt Set number of ray parameters If checked the number of ray parameters is determined manually By default the number of ray parameters is determined internally Number of ray parameters set the number of ray parameter Percent add back Enter the percentage of the multipl
65. Display Real Time Receiver Attribute Map Real Time Seismic Display Real Time Source Attribute Map Real Time Stack Display 247 Real Time Seismic Display Usage The Real Time Seismic Display process is used to display seismic records during the processing flow It also can output image files and automatically ftp these image files to a server on an active internet connection Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links none Example Flowchart Zu Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 oa FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help Wi Geometry EJ 2 Amplitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z El slonik sps El slonik rps Display E Editing Filtering FE slonik xps Geometry Migration Multi component gt Mutes w ase te Execute Abort El Open flow Close flow ccm New flow Help Current project Slonik Current flow 1 Geometry X 746 Y 366 248 Step Parameter Dialog Display increment Record increment between displays 10 XX Also display all records killed during processing _ Only display records killed during processing 1 Mark dead traces Image output Output image files Send via ftp Parameter descriptions Record increment between displays The interval between rec
66. Geometry Definition step assigns survey information to the trace headers based on the source receiver and observer notes SPS files The Geometry Definition step assigns CMP number based on the source and receiver numbers using the following formula CMP Location Source Location Receiver Location 2 Therefore for 2D lines it is imperative that source and receiver locations as defined in the SPS files share the same coordinate system This implies that Source location 1 has the same X Y position as Receiver location 1 and that Source location 2 has the same X Y position as Receiver location 2 etc In the case of 3D data this is not an issue as CMP Line and Location will be labeled by the CMP Binning step Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Observers Notes SPS Format cards mandatory 3 Receiver Locations SPS Format cards mandatory 4 Source Locations SPS Format cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN Geom doc Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo PA Seismic field files spw H source SPS file e Geometry Definition receiver SPS file Observer SPS files Shot gathers with Trace Header Geometry spw 381 Step Parameter Dialog Geometry Definition Geometry Definition V Kill undefined traces and records l Use unsigned azimuths l Use unsigned offsets C Zero degrees aziumuth East
67. Inine 181 4byte int gt 790156 792686 Crossline 185 4byteint y 1972668 972728 Offset 37 4byteint y 8663 7943 48 CMP Easting 193 4byteint y 2036 2059 CMP Northing 185 4byte int gt 972668 972728 CMP Elevation 177 4byteint w 5004 5034 CMP Datum 229 4byteint y 0 Source Line 197 byte int 6023 6023 Source Location 17 byte int w 6173 6173 als Source Easting 73 4byteint y 791919 791919 Lesion B me a Seal Source Northing 77 byte int 976625 976625 cera 0 ft 2000 Export image n Fevers J OK File Browse Create format file Help Spectra Display 43 The Histogram analysis tab allows you to see the amplitude distribution of the selected data traces and verify the data has correct and valid amplitudes a SEGY Analyzer NPR3 Geometry sgy es Endian order Text header Textheader Binary header Traceheader Seismic view Get from data Header size in bytes 3200 Big endian 2byte words 4bytemords Sample format analysis Little endian Text format EBCDIC ASCII Spectral analysis Histogram analysis Binary header Header size in bytes 400 Startbyte Datatype Override Value Samples per trace 21 byte int v 1000 Sample interval 17 4byteint v 2 0 Sample format 25 Abyteint v Number of traces 116887 Trace header Header size in bytes 240 Header name Startbyte Data type Minimum Maximum Field File Number 9 byte int gt 14 14 Channel
68. Line Fit processing step and stored in a Line Definition card data file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Line Definition card data file mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart RE derivative flo Me Crooked Line Seismic Data spw E Crooked Line Binning Crooked Line Definition File Binned Crooked Line Seismic Data spw 275 196 373 Step Parameter Dialog Crooked Line Binning Crooked Line Binning In line size ft or m 200 01 Cross line size ft or m 100 0 Bin source locations Bin receiver locations Cancel Parameter Description In line size ft or m Enter the dimensions of the in line bin dimension Cross line size ft or m Enter the dimensions of the cross line bin dimension Bin source locations Select this option to bin source locations With crooked line seismic data this is required for the calculation of surface consistent gains and residual Statics Bin receiver locations Select this option to bin receiver locations With crooked line seismic data this is required for the calculation of surface consistent gains and residual Statics 374 Crooked Line Fit Usage The Crooked Line Fit process determines a best fit line through a scatter of CMP positions in a crooked line survey Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Line De
69. Offset 37 4byte int gt 8663 7943 co 5 CMP Easting 193 4byteint gt 2036 2059 m ha ve 17 33t034 o CMP Northing 185 byte int 972668 972728 18 35t036 0 CMP Elevation 177 4byteint 5004 5034 aan da 19 37t038 o Source Line 197 4byte int gt 6023 6023 o 39 10 40 la Source Location 17 byte int 6173 6173 ja 41t042 0 Source Easting 73 4byteint v 791919 791919 2 431044 o i a Source Northing 77 4byte int v 976625 976625 z listos m 5 Ti dosita ink me la OK File Browse Create format file Help Binary Header Values Display You also can also create a spectra of a selected range of traces in the Sample format analysis tab of the Binary header display l SEGY Analyzer NPR3 Geometry sgy eis PGES SS Textheader Binary header Traceheader Seismic view Get from data Header size in bytes 3200 Big endian Zbyte words 4byte words Sample format analysis eee Text format EBCDIC ASCII Spectral analysis Histogram analysis Binary header Header sizein bytes 400 Stertbyte Datatype Override Value Samples per trace 21 byteint v 1000 Sample interval 17 4byteint v 20 2 Sample format 25 4byteit v Number of traces 116887 race header pe Header size in bytes 240 Header name Startbyte Data type Minimum Maximum E Field Fle Number 9 Abyteint y 14 14 Channel Number 13 byte int 2 25 36 CMP 21 4byte int gt 2036 2059
70. P Card Data R Z Display Editing s Geometry Definition 9 2 Filtering Geometry 9 Ki undefined traces and records Use unsigned offsets Mm Mutes Define survey orientation for signed offsets i Quality Analysis Enter survey orientation 0 Seismic Data Use unsigned azimuths Spectral Attributes Azimuth definition Spectral Decomposition Zero degrees azimuth East stacking Summing Zero degrees azimuth North stats Trace Attributes Nominal receiver interval 220 0 Velocities E Sn perro E e 2 e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow a DE New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 302 Y 234 A Step Parameter Dialog 60 Displaying Seismic Data To display a seismic file first select a seismic data item in the flowchart by clicking on it You may then issue the Display selected file command in a new page or add the display to a previously selected page Seismic Display Seismic Analysis At New Seismic Display Open Seismic File Display Selected File A Open recent gt Clear Selected View Refresh Selected View Remove Selected View Replace Selected View Add Seismic Layer Delete Seismic Layer Display Next Record Right Display Previous Record Left Display Next Layer Up Display Previous Layer Down Show Display Controls Ctrl V Display Preferences Tool Preferences Display Selected File Command 61 You may also dis
71. Parameter Description Number of traces to mix Enter the number of traces to mix blend into each output trace Apply weighting function If checked the specified weighting function will be used Otherwise each trace contributing to the mix will be equally weighted Value The relative value of the weight for each trace in the mix 600 Variable Trace Mix Usage The Variable Trace Mix step is used to perform an unweighted horizontal trace mix of sequential input traces into a single output trace The number of traces in the mix may vary as a function of trace number in the gather Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi input spw e Variable Trace Mix output spw Status Open 290 187 601 Step Parameter Dialog Variable Trace Mix Variable Trace Mix Number of mix spatial control points fi 0 Control Points Trace Traces Trace Traces number to mix number to mix Parameter Description Number of mix spatial control points Enter the number of variable spatial control points to be specified for the mix Trace number Enter a trace number where the number of traces to mix will change Traces to mix Enter the number of traces to mix for this segment of the data 602 Statics Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the S
72. Parameter Dialog Create Sine Wave Create Sine Wave Number of records 1 0 Number of traces a8 Number of samples f 000 Sample interval ms 2 0000 Start frequency Hz 10 End frequency Hz 70 Cancel Parameter Description Number of records Enter the number of records to create Number of traces Enter the number of traces per record Number of samples Enter the number of samples per trace Sample interval ms Enter the sample interval of the traces in milliseconds Start frequency Hz Enter the frequency of the first trace in Hertz End frequency Hz Enter the frequency of the last trace in Hertz 536 Create Spikes Usage The Create Spikes step builds traces consisting of an impulse response series Input Links None Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo E3 Create Spikes PA spikes spw A e eae eee a 337 Step Parameter Dialog Create Spikes Create Spikes i Number of spikes per trace 1 Trace range Time on trace ms Scaling First Last First Last of scale 100 Roo fao 200 240 soo 340 jaoo 440 soo 40 foo frao Output Data Parameters No of records fi No of traces record 148 Trace length ms 1000 01 Sample interval ms 2 0000 Cancel Parameter Description Number of spikes per trace Enter the number of impulses to create on each trace Trace
73. QtCore4 dil 1 10 2011 7 07 PM Application extens 2 233 KB d Music y 2 QtCored4 dil 3 2011 9 06 AM Application extens 4 025 KB li Pictures 1 QtGui4 dil 1 10 2011 7 07 PM Application extens 7 992 KB E Videos 2 QtGuid4 dll 2 3 2011 9 06 AM Application extens 14 068 KB S QtMultimedia4 dil 11 2 2010 7 29PM_ Application extens 110 KB j Computer QtNetwork4 dll 11 2 2010 7 01 PM Application extens 893 KB mA Local Disk C 2 QtNetworkd4 dil 11 2 2010 7 00 PM Application extens 1 532 KB G2 Shared Folders QtOpenGL4 dil 11 2 2010 7 21 PM Application extens 661 KB QtSvg4 dll 11 2 2010 7 30PM Application extens 270 KB Gu Network 2 QtTestd4 dil 11 2 2010 7 01 PM Application extens 174 KB JE DANMAC 2 QtWebKitd4 dll 11 2 2010 9 07 PM Application extens 21 248 KB E ymware host E Sentinel Protection Installer 7 6 1 exe 10 20 2009 9 09 AM Application 8 180 KB 7 WIN7 h 19 items SPW 3 Install Directory If you do not have the Sentinel software driver installed on your system please install it by running the Sentinel Protection Installer executable exe in the SPW3 directory This driver is required to recognize and access the Sentinel USB security key used for licensing of SPW 3 16 S Adobe InDesign CS BS Adobe Reader 9 Calculator ES Flowchart 2 Internet Explorer 64 bit Internet Explorer 9 Mozilla Firefox Paint E Power Shell ComponentSoftware Development De Firetrust
74. R Card Data Reformat flo OBRA H example residual source statics HH reformatted source statics Status Open 196 4 147 In this case the card data customization dialog for the reformatted source statics file appears as follows where the static value precedes the location number in the data field Customize Source Statics Customize Source Statics Number of comment records preceeding data fi File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets Sheet header field Start column Length Source line number Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Location number Time Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel The resulting source statics card data file with this parameterization will have the source static value in the first column followed by location number in the second column E reformatted source statics WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Dee 64 o B SPW Source Statics File Ww 38 573552 129 207910 131 807233 133 877282 135 933568 137 2494154 139 0 313364 141 1 542512 143 1 266550 145 2 684935 147 1 179489 1 320091 1 376875 2 186443 2 035214 1 223847 2 544334 4 461437 1 400349 2 104850 2 598595 0 642384 0 957096 079879 These are the Data Header fields They represent the source static and the source location respectively NON 148 Creating Card Data in Excel All
75. Range First Enter the first trace in the record that will contain a spike Trace Range Last Enter the last trace in the record that will contain a spike Time on Trace ms First Enter the time of the spike on the first trace Time on Trace ms Last Enter the time of the spike on the last trace Scaling of scale Enter the scale as a percentage of the maximum value of the trace for this spike 538 Output Data Parameters No of records Enter the number of records to create No of traces record Enter the number of traces per record Trace length ms Enter the trace length in milliseconds Sample interval ms Enter the sample interval of the traces in milliseconds 539 F X Trace Interpolation Usage The F X Trace Interpolation step performs a 2 to 1 f x domain interpolation of the input gather Trace headers of the interpolated traces are equal to the average of their two neighbors The Trace Flag header field of the interpolated traces will be equal to 28 on output Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data with interpolated traces Reference Spitz S 1991 Seismic trace interpolation in the f x domain Geophysics 56 p 785 Example Flowchart LE Documentation flo ii Input data spw F X Trace Interpolation i Interpolated output data spw v lt gt Status Open 297 2 540 Step Parameter D
76. Receiver Order Stack Receiver Order Stack Exponent for normalization 1 00 Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces Use true amplitude traces Output SPW format seismic file name Browse cancel Parameter Description Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Browse Select this button to set the output seismic file name 596 Source Order Stack Usage The Source Order Stack step allows you to input data sorted in common source order and output a common source stack seismic file You may apply a scaling exponent for scaling of your traces Traces are scaled by the fold of your data raised to the power of the chosen exponent i e fold EXP You also specify whether you want to sum relative or absolute amplitude traces Input Links 1 Seismic data in common source sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo os Source Order Stack Status Open
77. Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Thorston J R and Claerbout J F 1985 Velocity stack and slant stack stochastic inversion Geophysics 50 p 2727 2741 Hampson D 1991 Inverse velocity stacking for multiple elimination Journal of the Canadian Society of Exploration Geophysics 22 p 44 55 Example Flowchart RE lt UNTITLED gt E transformed gather spw ES Radon Inverse Me output gather spw Status Open 318 146 342 Step Parameter Dialog Radon Inverse Radon Inverse Transform Linear C Hyperbolic Parabolic Offset Control Manually enter offsets First offset F000 Last offset 10000 0 BT Number of offsets T Use auxiliary gather for inverse offsets Brae Cancel Parameter Description Transform Select the type of Radon transform to perform Linear If selected a transform will be performed from the domain of space and time to the domain of ray parameter and intercept Parabolic If selected a transform will be performed from the domain of space and time to the domain of parabolic ray parameter and intercept Hyperbolic If selected a transform will be performed from the domain of space and time to the domain of hyperbolic ray parameter and intercept Offset control Allows manual control of the output offsets Manually enter offsets If checked indicat
78. Statics Summing Usage The CMP Statics Summing step will sum together two input CMP Statics card data files into a single output CMP Statics card data file Input Links 1 CMP Statics cards mandatory 2 CMP Statics cards mandatory Output Links 1 CMP Statics cards mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Long Period CMP Statics Short Period CMP Static Es CMP Statics Summing HA Output CMP Statics A 266 153 613 Step Parameter Dialog Statics Summing CMP Statics Summing Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 614 Flattening Statics Usage The Flattening Statics step inputs a seismic data file and a corresponding Horizon File pick card and outputs a set of CMP Static cards You can then apply these CMP statics using the Apply Statics step to flatten the picked horizon on a stack to the datum you specify You have the option of applying a smoothing operation to the set of CMP static time shifts using a running average median or polynomial smoothing operator Input Links 1 Seismic File mandatory 2 Horizon File cards mandatory Output Links 1 CMP Statics cards mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi Seismic File gt aH Flattening Statics Horizon File FA CMP Statics Status Open 278 9 615 Step Parameter Dialog Flattening Statics Flattening Statics Horizon number 1 Flattening Dat
79. Usage The Interpolate Traces step performs a 2 to 1 time domain interpolation of the input gather Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw interpolated spikes spw 544 Step Parameter Dialog Interpolate Traces Interpolate Traces Output SPW format seismic file name interpolated spikes spw Browse Cancel Parameter Description Output SPW format seismic file name Use the Browse button to specify the output file containing the interpolated seismic file 545 Progress T2 SEGD File Usage The Progress T2 SEGD File step is for the direct input of SEGD Input Links 1 None The SEGD file is selected inside the step dialog mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo y s y T2 SEG D File ds Output spw v lt gt Status Open 78 161 546 Step Parameter Dialog 12 SEG D Input T2 SEG D File Specify input directory O Specify starting input file Input Directory Dataset Parameters Override Number of records 0 O Sample interval ms 0 0000 O Samples pertrace 0 O Maximum traces per record 2048 O Input files as they are written to disk Strip auxiliary traces Parameter Description Specify in
80. Use the File Browse to select your RPS file and the spreadsheet will open displaying the contents If it is not correct or nothing is displayed then you should use the Analyze Format button at the bottom of the display to define how these data are read SPS Source Record Sour recors tie name Spreadsheet Map C ronn ES 0 6006 0 SPS Receiver Record Spreadsheet Tab 94 The SPS Analyzer allows you to specify how the data will be read and decoded from this sps file When the format is correctly defined be sure to Save Source Record identification Start Co End Co Record identification 1 1 Read lines with source record 1D S Start Col End Col Load Minimum Maximum End Col Load Minimum Maximum Source line 2 17 2 amp 6 _ Source static Source location 18 A 6 Source depth Source index 26 i i Source datum Source code 27 x j Source uphole Source easting 47 iS Mi 788339 9 809248 6 Water depth Source northing 56 939328 3 976916 1 Recording date lx Source elevation 66 2 la e 4934 3 5405 7 Recording time X 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 6007 6135 788557 50968125 5005032 8 6006 6136 788339 90968428 3005034 7 6007 6137 788507 30968604 0005030
81. Yes V Apply header scale factors Extract field file no from disk file name MV Input all files of this type in the directory OK Cancel Parameter Description Input Files Select the SEG 2 disk file and set the input parameters Browse Click on the Browse button to select the SEG 2 disk file Once the file has been selected the values in the SEG 2 trace header indicating the number of records the number of traces per record the sample interval and the number of samples per trace will be displayed in the SEG 2 File dialog Be sure to confirm the verity of these values If they are not as expected an option exists to override these values so that the SEG 2 file may be successfully reformatted Number of records Indicates the number of records in the SEG 2 disk file inferred from the SEG 2 file header Traces per record Indicates the number of traces per record stored in bytes 6 and 7 of the SEG 2 file descriptor block Override Click yes if the Traces per record value is not correct Enter the correct value Sample interval ms Indicates the sample interval stored in the appropriate sub string of the SEG 2 file descriptor block 551 Override Click yes if the Sample interval value is not correct Enter the correct value Samples per trace Indicates the number of samples per trace stored in bytes 8 11 of the SEG 2 trace descriptor block Override Click yes if the Samples per tra
82. a standard black and white wiggle display with area fill Variable density is a color display usually shown with a red white blue color scale Trace polarity interactively adjusts the seismic display by polarity using a drop down menu Normal trace polarity interactively retains the polarity of seismic data on a trace to trace basis Reverse trace polarity interactively reverses the polarity of seismic data on a trace to trace basis Orientation interactively adjusts the seismic display by orientation using a drop down menu Left to right displays the traces in ascending order starting from the left Right to left displays the traces in ascending order starting from the right Amplitudes interactively adjusts the seismic display by amplitude using a drop down menu True amplitude displays the data at absolute input amplitude usually millivolts Relative amplitude scales each trace to the same maximum amplitude Trace scaling applies an AGC to the trace using the Window length parameter 64 Reference interactively adjusts the seismic display by reference using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Horizontal scale interactively scales seismic data horizontally on a trace to trace basis using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Vertical scale interactively scales seismic data vertically on a trace to trace basis using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Display gain intera
83. all linked steps on the Flowchart canvas Second if the flow to be compiled contains an intermediate processing step i e Copy Seismic Data between the sort and the seismic output the flow may be compiled and executed as the subset of a larger job flow on the Flowchart canvas Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file in any sort order Output Links 1 Seismic data in CMP sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN Sort doc Example Flowchart RE lt UNTITLED gt CMP Sort CMP Sort Copy Seismic File O CMP Sorted output spw CMP Sorted output spw Status Open 568 Step Parameter Dialog CMP Sort Enter the SPW format seismic file name Browse cancel _ Parameter Description Browse Select this button to set the input seismic file name 569 General Trace Sort Usage General Trace Sort allows you to sort your input seismic traces according to primary secondary and optional tertiary keys The keys are trace header fields Source location receiver location CMP location stack record number i e for data sets containing several stacked sections offset field file number etc You may select sub ranges of any key and choose to bin or group together several traces having adjacent sort keys and omit traces between these bins The Primary Sort Key controls the sort type of the records you output The Secondary Sort Key controls
84. amp Also display all records killed during processing _ Only display records killed during processing X Mark dead traces Output image files _ Send via ftp mage format 6 gt tavencenent i gt agua rc oa ta io Display parameters Trace display type Trace polarity Orientation Horizontal scale 48 0 Vertical scale 4 0 Display gain 0 0 Trace excursion 12 0 ihtidal Horizontal units Traces in v Vertical units Infsec v Amplitude type Gain contr v Window ms 1000 00 Display color scale Real Time Seismic Display Dialog Ol 106 Real Time Map Displays Trace header containing attribute Reference locations Trace header User Defined 1 z Initialize source locations from SPS file s Coordinate reference system ama isition a Multichannel attribute composition RMS Amplitude Average magnitude Median magnitude Maximum magnitude Horizontal axis minimum Horizontal axis maximum 788340 0 809249 0 Map scale Vertical axis minimum Vertical axis maximum A 2 O Scale to fit view Height els 960 echt pixeis 960 1 939328 0 976916 0 Scale to fit dimesions Width pixels Scale to fit vertical Background image Scale to fit horizontal Fixed scale 10 E Display background image on receiver spread T National Petro Reserve Teapot Dome Attribute label Attribute color scale C Loaded C Configured Cu a 8 M
85. any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw eo Coherence Filter Mi output spw SS SELECT 191 21 305 Step Parameter Dialog Coherence Filter Coherence Filter Coherence exponent 1 0000 Specify trace spacing True trace spacing m or ft Cancel Parameter Description Coherence Exponent Enter the coherency filter exponent Values of 1 to 1 5 are usually used A value of 1 does nothing A value of 1 5 significantly increases coherency Specify trace spacing If checked allows manual entry of the trace to trace spacing True trace spacing Entry the trace to trace spacing of the input record 306 Convolution The Convolution step is used to convolve traces in an seismic data file with a filter function specified in an auxiliary data set 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Auxiliary file in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo 05 Input spw Convolution si Output spw ram gt Status Open 379 211 307 Step Parameter Dialog Convolution Convolution Filter Specify start time of filter Automatically set start time of filte Start time of data ms 0 0 Start time of filter ms 0 0000 Seismic file that contains the filter Parameter Description
86. be controlled by the value of a trace header field select the trace header from the drop down menu Notch frequency Hz Specify the value of the notch frequency in Hertz 330 Notch width Hz Specify the width of the notch frequency in Hertz 331 Q Filter Usage The Q Filter step applies an attenuation i e Q compensation filter or an attenuation modeling filter to the input file For both attenuation and modeling options additional options exist to apply phase only or phase and amplitude filters Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Hargreaves N D Calvert A J 1991 Inverse Q filtering by Fourier Transform Geophysics 56 p 519 Hargreaves N 1992 Similarity and the inverse Q filter Some simple algorithms for inverse Q filtering Geophysics 57 p 994 Wang Y 2002 A stable and efficient approach of inverse Q filtering Geophysics 67 p 657 Example Flowchart Documentation flo oe 05 Input spw Q Filter ii Output spw lt Status Open 375 133 332 Step Parameter Dialog oF ilter El Q Filter Operator type O Forward Q modeling Inverse Q compensation Compensation type Phase only Phase and Amplitude Constant Q value 100 00 Reference frequency Hz 10 00 Gain limit dB 60 000 Paramet
87. coordinate of the second corner of your survey Easting x third corner Enter the easting coordinate of the third corner of your survey Northing y third corner Enter the northing coordinate of the third corner of your survey Bin size in line 1 to 2 Enter the size in distance units of the in line side of each bin Bin size cross line 1 to 3 Enter the size in distance units of the cross line side of each bin First CMP line number Enter the first CMP line number This line number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 2 Line increment Enter the increment in line numbers between adjacent CMP lines 371 First CMP location number Enter the first CMP location number This location number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 3 CMP location increment Enter the increment in locations between adjacent CMP locations 372 Crooked Line Binning Usage The Crooked Line Binning step assigns CMP line and location numbers to crooked line seismic data based on CMP easting and northing values The CMP easting and northing values along with easting and northing values for the sources and receivers will have been placed in the trace headers though the use of SPS files with the Geometry Definition step The CMP bins follow a best fit line through the scatter of CMP positions The best fit line is determined by the Crooked
88. expect between the first and second half of the trace 254 Dataset Math Usage The Dataset Math step will add subtract multiply divide or do adaptive subtraction between the samples of one data file from the corresponding samples of a second data file and output the result to a seismic file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory must match the first dataset Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 ce C fe FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ y Processing Categories Automatic Trace Edit Dataset Math Kill Traces Phase Rotation Remove DC Bias aD y e le a le Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Slonik X 758 Y 325 255 Step Parameter Dialog Operation Addition gt Multiplication _ Adaptive Subtraction Parameter Description Operation Select the math operation to perform between the samples of the two datasets 256 Kill Traces Usage The Kill Traces step kills traces according to specified trace header values and ranges Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as th
89. filter taper in samples The longer the filters taper length the smoother the transition between adjacent filters Low frequency Enter the low pass frequency of the Butterworth filter in Hertz Low rolloff rate Enter the low pass rolloff rate in dB Octave Higher numbers give a steeper filter rolloff High frequency Enter the high pass frequency of the Butterworth filter in Hertz High rolloff rate Enter the high pass rolloff rate in dB Octave Higher numbers give a steeper filter rolloff Time ms Start Enter the start time in milliseconds to the start application of each filter 354 Wave Equation Multiple Attenuation Usage The Wave Equation Multiple Attenuation step predicts water bottom and peg leg multiples by extrapolating the observed seismic data through one round trip of the water column The predicted multiples are then subtracted from the observed data to achieve multiple suppression Note the step is currently under construction Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Horizon pick card containing water bottom pick times mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Berryhill J R and Kim Y C 1986 Deep water peg legs and multiples Emulation and suppression Geophysics v 51 no 12 p 2177 2184 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Pre stack Gathers spw Water Bottom Time Picks e Wave Equation Multipl
90. flo Mi input spw e Amplitude Spectrum Mia input spw 486 Step Parameter Dialog Amplitude Spectrum Amplitude Spectrum Trace Window Specify trace window Trace Averaging Average traces Parameter Description Specify Trace Window If checked the specified window will be used for calculating the amplitude spectrum Start time ms Enter the start time of the window to use Length ms Enter the length of the window to use Average Traces If checked the spectrums of the specified traces will be averaged First trace Enter the first trace number in the window to be average Number of traces Enter the number of traces to average 487 Autocorrelation Usage The Autocorrelation computes a single trace autocorrelation for each input data trace The autocorrelation trace will have the same length as the input trace and the zero lag value can be shift in time if you want to view both positive and negative lags Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo o ExampleGm spw Es Autocorrelation o Autocorrelations spw Status Open 488 Step Parameter Dialog Autocorrelation Autocorrelation Zero lag time ms 0 00 Autocorrelation window start ms 0 00 Autocorrelation window length 2000 00 O Apply LMO to autoco
91. for some processing steps based upon specific published techniques or algorithms An image of the processing step s parameter dialog is also displayed for your reference Finally you will find a description of each parameter for each processing step At the end of each parameter description the valid range for each parameter is shown in brackets Abbreviations for the parameters are as follows gt Greater than lt Less than or equal to lt Less than gt Greater than or equal to HA Range of values from first number to last number Parameter range checking is enabled for some of the processing step parameters Additional parameter range checking will be enabled in the future Note For processing parameters with spatial units such as feet meters feet per second meters per second etc SPW assumes that you are consistent in your use of spatial units for the entire data set If your geometry information is in meters then you should consistently use metric units as your unit of measure for the SPW processing parameters applied to that data set If your geometry information is in feet then you should consistently use English units as your unit of measure for the SPW processing parameters applied to that data set Combining English and metric units of measure when processing in SPW will yield erroneous results 114 Amplitude Adjustment Steps This section documents the processing steps available for Amplitude Adjus
92. for the second selected header field Tertiary header Select the third trace header field to use for killing traces This is combined with the other selected header key values to determine the set of traces to kill Tertiary start Enter the start value for the third selected header field Tertiary stop Enter the end value for the third selected header field Import Import a set of picked trace kills from a Trace Kills auxiliary dataset Export Export the entered trace kills into a Trace Kills auxiliary dataset Add Row Add a row to dialog Delete Row Delete a row from the dialog Set dead trace amplitude to zero Fill dead traces with zeros 258 Phase Rotation Usage The Phase Rotation step allows you to rotate your seismic traces by a constant phase angle from 180 to 180 degrees Values outside this range will be wrapped back into this range i e 240 degrees is equivalent to 60 degrees Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 o o FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ Automatic Trace Edit Dataset Math Kill Traces Phase Rotation Remove DC Bias KID a e J a e Execute Abort Save SaveAs Open flow Close flow gi New flow
93. ft Enter the nominal interval between traces in distance units Enter the azimuthal angle Enter the angle from north for this line 398 UKOOA P1 90 Geometry Usage The UKOOA P1 90 Geometry step Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandateory 2 SPS Observer notes mandatory For the UKOOA P1 90 Geometry step on the field file source line and source location fields are required in the Observer notes Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart t Documentation flo anx 05 Input spw UKOOA P1 90 Geometry Definition ds Output spw lt Observer Notes SPS Format SELECT 359 98 399 Step Parameter Dialog UKOOA P190 Marine Geometry Definition UKOOA P190 Marine Geometry Definition Select P190 input file C spwiline 1 p190 Source line number 1 Nominal channel interval 25 00 Number of channels 120 Cable depth 8 00 Source depth 8 00 Source to near channel offset 125 00 Parameter Description Select P190 input file Use the Browse button to select the P1 90 text file that contains the source and potentially the receiver coordinate information Source line number Enter the source sail line number corresponding to the selected P1 90 coordinate file Nominal channel interval Enter the spacing between channels on the cable Number of channels Enter
94. in the first break pick file Pick Sort Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the sort order e g common source CMP etc of the data file on which the first break times were picked Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the layer number associated with a specific pick time in the first break pick file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the output file 160 Frequency Filter Usage The Frequency Filter card data item is used to store the frequency domain transfer function representation of a filter Step Parameter Dialog Frequency 1D Filter Card File Frequency 1D Filter Card File Enter the frequency 1D filter card data file Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data Frequency Magnitude Phase 1 953125 0 000056 o oooooo p sose50 fo ooa5s3 ooooooo 9 765625 oss5230 oooooo0 3 531250 0 999038 ooo0o00 161 162 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Frequency Filter Customize Frequency Filter File Format No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows 1 9 Data header field Start column Length Frequency 1 Magnitude 11 21 Phase Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the
95. inputs Source Statics card data and separates the statics into long and short period components The current separation operator is a 2 D operator that operates in the in line direction The first output link will contain the long period statics and the second output link will contain the short period statics Input Links 1 Source Statics cards mandatory Output Links 1 Source Statics cards mandatory The first link contains the long period statics 2 Source Statics cards mandatory The second link contains the short period statics Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Input Source Statics e Source Statics Separation Long Period Source Statics Short Period Source Statics A 453 282 625 Step Parameter Dialog Statics Separation Source Statics Separation Type Of Operator Running average Number of points odd 7 C Median mn C Polynomial fit BT Cancel Parameter Description Type Of Operator defines the type of function to use for defining the fit to the long period statics solution Running Average This selects an averaging smoothing operator Number of points odd Enter the number of points in the running average smoother Median This selects a median smoothing operator Number of points odd Enter the number of points in the median smoother Polynomial fit This selects a polynomial fitting operator to approximate the long period statics
96. inverse filters to calculate per trace If more than one then the trace is divided into this number of windows and each window has an inverse filter individually calculated and applied Overlap of design window ms Enter the overlap in milliseconds of the trace windows This is the amount of the previous and or next window to include in the calculation of the inverse filter for the current window Design window start ms Enter the start time in milliseconds of the deconvolution design window Design window length ms Enter the length in milliseconds of the deconvolution design window Apply moveout to decon design window If checked a linear moveout will be applied to the deconvolution design window The window start time will shift by delta time offset velocity Linear moveout velocity Enter the linear moveout of the deconvolution design window 683 Minimum Phase Compensation Usage Minimum Phase Compensation allows you to compensate for the non minimum phase nature of some seismic sources such as Vibroseis The step calculates the minimum phase equivalent of a supplied source signature trace and then filters the data with a filter which converts the supplied signature to it s minimum phase equivalent Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Seismic data recorded source signatures optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Fl
97. length in bytes of one line of the PP NMO eta function file 187 PP Nhmo Gamma Function Usage The PP Nhmo Gamma Function card data item is used to store time gamma pairs for the case of PS wave i e converted wave non hyperbolic moveout where Gamma is the effective V V ratio down to the event being analyzed Once the short spread P wave stacking velocity function has been picked corresponding Gamma functions may be picked interactively in SeisViewer on Gamma Semblance gathers The PP Nhmo Gamma Function card has the same structure as a Velocity Function card Step Parameter Dialog Gamma Card File Gamma Card File Enter the gamma card data file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data RE Gamma Semblance pics 32 000000 2 364583 20s6 000000 2450333 188 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Velocity Customize Velocity File Format Number of comment records preceding data 1 File header field Start column Length No of velocity locations sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Time Velocity 1 Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of
98. may be compiled and executed as the subset of a larger job flow on the Flowchart canvas Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file in any sort order Output Links 1 Seismic data in the selected sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN Sort doc 570 Example Flowchart RE lt UNTITLED gt General Trace Son General Trace Sort Copy Seismic File CMP Sorted output spw CMP Sorted output spw Status Open 328 201 Step Parameter Dialog General Trace Sort General Trace Sort Sorting Parameters Output Range Sort Key Limit Min Bin size Bin interval 1 None ul 0 0 2 None 0 0 3 None y 0 0 4 None 0 0 5 None 0 0 L Input SPW format seismic file name Browse Cancel 571 Parameter Description Sort Key Specify the sort key i e Source Receiver CMP Record No Field File No Offset etc Output Range limit If checked this will set a range limit for the sort key Min Enter the minimum value in the range limit of the sort key Max Enter the minimum value in the range limit of the sort key Bin size Specify a grouping of locations with adjacent sort keys Bin interval Specify the increment between adjacent bins Browse Select this button to set the input seismic file name 572 General Sort Examples Example 1 If you want to sort for output of every third shot record in your data
99. of the card data types may be created in Microsoft Excel and transferred to SPW To transfer a few data values simply copy and paste from the Excel spreadsheet to the Card data spreadsheet To transfer an entire file you will need to reformat the Excel file as an SPW card data file As an example we will create a receiver SPS file in Excel and reformat the file in Flowchart Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Open the Excel application Determine or set the width of the required amount of columns Column width is set under the Format menu by selecting Column and then selecting width The default width of an Excel spreadsheet column is 8 43 which means you will get 8 spaces when you save the file as a space delimited text file Left justify each of the columns that will contain numeric values Enter data values In the case of a receiver SPS file there are five columns which from column 1 to column 5 are labeled as Receiver Line Receiver Location Receiver Easting Receiver Northing and Receiver Elevation Save the file as a space delimited text file To save a space delimited text file go to the File menu and select Save As Open the Save as type drop down menu in the Save As dialog and select Formatted Text Space delimited The default extension for Formatted Text files is prn In Flowchart select the appropriate Card Data item in this case Receiver Locations SPS F
100. one line is required File Header field Number of velocity locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of velocity locations in the velocity file Sheet header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line number associated with a velocity function in the velocity file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number associated with a velocity function in the velocity file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP locations per CMP line in the velocity file 189 Data header field Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the two way travel time in milliseconds associated with a given velocity pick in the velocity file Velocity Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the RMS or interval velocity value associated with a given velocity pick in the velocity file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the PP NHMO gamma function file 190 Profile Geometry File Usage The Profile Geometry File card data item is used to store the profile single fold or radar data information used in conjunction with the Single Fold Profile Geometry step to update trace headers with survey ge
101. pre stack data Input Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory and sampled in time Reference Gazdag J 1978 Wave equation migration by phase shift Geophysics v 43 p 1342 1351 Example Flowchart FE lt UNTITLED gt de input spw input spw Velocity Function eo Phase Shift Migration Phase Shift Migration migrated output spw migrated output spw Status Open 421 Step Parameter Dialog Phase Shift Migration Phase Shift Migration Constant migration velocity 5000 00 Scale input velocities by 1 00 Specify trace spacing UN Algortihm adapted from Seismic Unix Copyright c Colorado School of Mines Cancel Parameter Description Constant migration velocity This constant velocity value will be used as the migration velocity if no velocity cards are linked Scale input velocities by The input velocities are multiplied by this number This scalar is used for adjusting the input velocities if they are interval velocities derived using Dix s equation rather than true interval velocities Specify trace spacing If checked allows for manual specification of the trace spacing By default SPW calculates the trace spacing for the stack as the group interval as you defined it in the geometry definition divided by two 2 422 Post Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration
102. samples to output Interpolation Type Selection Select the type of interpolator to use This interpolator is used to resample the data to the specified depth interval Do inverse correction If checked a depth to time conversion will be performed 415 Finite Difference Migration 2 D only Usage The Finite Difference Migration step implements a variable velocity post stack depth migration based on a finite difference approximation of the scalar wave equation The finite difference migration scheme accommodates a vertically and laterally varying velocity field that is supplied with an SPW velocity function card You specify the depth sampling interval the total number of depth samples to output and the migration aperture in degrees of dip from 45 90 degrees The computation time of the algorithm increases as a function of increased aperture The velocity field may be adjusted by a scalar value to compensate for the fact that the supplied interval velocities may have been derived using Dix s equation and are not true interval velocities Finally you can override the SPW calculated trace spacing and specify the true trace spacing of your data in your spatial units of choice SPW calculates the trace spacing for the stack as the group interval as you defined it in the geometry definition divided by two 2 Input Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards mandatory Output Links 1 Sei
103. set you would define the General Trace Sort parameters as follows Primary Sort Type Source Bin Size 1 Bin Interval 3 Secondary Sort Type Offset Bin Size 1 Bin Interval 1 Your output data set would consist of every third shot record with the traces in each record sorted by increasing offset distance Example 2 If you want to sort for output of every tenth CMP record in your data set with three adjacent CMP s in each bin 1 e a CMP super gather for velocity semblance analysis you would define the General Trace Sort parameters as follows Primary Sort Type CMP Bin Size 3 Bin Interval 10 Secondary Sort Type Offset Bin Size 1 Bin Interval 1 Your output data set would consist of every tenth CMP record with the traces in each record sorted by increasing offset distance You could use the Range limits to select a specific range of CMP s and offsets to include in the output data set Example 3 If you want to sort for output of every shot record in your data set with only every third trace output you would define the General Trace Sort parameters as follows Primary Sort Type Source Bin Size 1 Bin Interval 1 Secondary Sort Type Offset Bin Size 1 Bin Interval 3 Your output data set would consist of every shot record with only one third the input traces present in each output record sorted by increasing offset distance 573 574 Offset Sort Usage The Offset Sort step allows you to sort a
104. sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi input spw ES Select Traces output spw 245 231 579 Step Parameter Dialog Select Traces Select Traces Start First Range Key None v 1 00 Second Range Key None v 1 00 V Use range limit Cancel Parameter Description Use range limit If checked allows selection of minimum and maximum values of the range keys First Range Key Specify the sort key i e Source Receiver CMP Record No Field File No Offset etc Start Enter the first value in the range limit of the first sort key End Enter the last value in the range limit of the first sort key Second Range Key Specify the sort key i e Source Receiver CMP Record No Field File No Offset etc Start Enter the first value in the range limit of the second sort key End Enter the last value in the range limit of the second sort key 580 Source Sort Usage The Source Sort step allows you to sort a seismic file into source ordered records The Source Sort step appears on the flow chart as a seismic icon Therefore compilation and execution of the Source Sort is performed by either of two methods First if the flow segment to be compiled only contains the sort step and the corresponding seismic output the flow must be compiled and executed as a separate job This is because the lack of an intermediate processing ste
105. start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver depth associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Datum Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the elevation of the datum at a receiver station associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Uphole Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the interpolated uphole time ms at a receiver station associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Water depth Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the water depth at a receiver station associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Date Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the Julian day on which the receiver station was initially deployed in the Receiver SPS file Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the time of day on which the receiver station was initially deployed in the Receiver SPS file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the SPS receiver file 199 Receiver Statics Usage The Receiver Statics card data item is used to store receiver static information in units of milliseconds Step Parameter Dialog Receiver Statics Card File Receiver Statics Card File Enter the receiver statics card data file name Customize Browse Cance
106. the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of velocity locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of velocity locations in the velocity file Sheet header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line number associated with a velocity function in the velocity file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number associated with a velocity function in the velocity file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP locations per CMP line in the velocity file 245 Data header field Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the two way travel time in milliseconds associated with a given velocity pick in the velocity file Velocity Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the RMS or interval velocity value associated with a given velocity pick in the velocity file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the velocity function file 246 Display Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the Display Steps category Processing steps currently available are Processing Categories Real Time Near Trace
107. the interval in ms between each time velocity pair Start time ms Enter the time of the first time velocity pair 676 677 Wavelet Shaping Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the Wavelet Shaping Steps category Processing steps currently available are RE Wavelet Shaping Apply Deconvolution Operators Minimum Phase Compensation Offset Deconvolution Receiver Deconvolution Shot Deconvolution Signature Deconvolution_ Spectral Whitening Surface Consistent Deconvolution Time Variant Deconvolution 678 Apply Deconvolution Operators The Apply Deconvolution Operators step is used to apply deconvolution operators output by either the Deconvolution step or the Surface Consistent Deconvolution step In each case the file of operators is a SPW formatted seismic data file 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Auxiliary data file containing the operators to be applied mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Pn Input spw Apply Deconvolution Operators Me Deconvolved Output spw Status Open 347 2135C 679 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Deconvolution Operators Apply Deconvolution Operators Input operators file Browse Cancel Parameter Description Input operators file Use the Browse button to locate the SPW formatted file of decon
108. the moveout velocity Output Header Select the trace header that will be updated with the results of the analysis 504 Gabor Transform Usage The Gabor Transform step performs spectral decomposition of the seismic trace data using the Gabor transform like multifilter analysis technique The number frequency traces in each time frequency gather is equal to Number of traces EndFrequency Start Frequency Filter Bandwidth traces Each trace in the time frequency gather represents a different frequency band in the original data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any order mandatory References Dziewonski Bloch and Landisman 1969 A technique for the analysis of transient seismic signals Bull Seism Soc Am 1969 vol 59 no 1 pp 427 444 Taner M T Koehler F and Sheriff R E 1979 Complex seismic trace analysis Geophysics vol 44 pp 1041 1063 Example Flowchart Documentation flo BAX a a Input spw Gabor Transform i Output spw lt gt SELECT 208 75 505 Step Parameter Dialog Gabor Transform Output Gabor Transform Output Start time for analysis 0 00 End time for analysis 3000 00 Start frequency for analysis 10 00 End frequency for analysis 70 00 Bandwidth of gaussian filters 10 00 Parameter Description Start time for analysis Specify the start time for tim
109. the number of channels in the cable Cable depth Enter the depth of the cable below sea level Source depth Enter the depth of the source below sea level Source to near channel offset Enter the distance between the source and the nearest channel in the cable 400 Image data This section documents the processing steps available for the creation of Image Data The types of Image Data currently available are HE Image Data CMP Fold Image F T Frequency Slice Image F T Time Slice Image 401 CMP Fold Image Usage The CMP Fold Image step allows you to select or name an image file on disk It is the output SPW image format file for the fold diagram Input Links 1 This process requires input from the CMP Fold Geometry or the CMP Fold Data steps Output Links None This process requires a SPW image format disk file Example Flowcharts HE Documentation flo Observer SPS file HA receiver SPS S ea SPS file CMP Fold Geometry CMP Fold Image 402 HE Documentation flo ae Seismic with Geometry spw E CMP Fold Data 7 CMP Fold Image Step Parameter Dialog 3D CMP Fold Image 3D CMP Fold Image Image file name Browse Details cancel Parameter Description Enter the name of the Image format disk file that will contain the CMP Fold image 403 F T Frequency Slice Image Usage The F T Frequency Slice Image step allows you t
110. the range of ray parameters for the transformed output 339 Minimum differential moveout minimum far offset moveout value present in the transformed data Maximum differential moveout maximum far offset moveout value present in the transformed data Tapers Set the spatial and temporal taper lengths used in constructing the transform Spatial taper length Number of traces to taper at the near and far offsets of the X T gather prior to computing the transform Ray parameter taper length Ray taper Time taper length Length of taper to apply at the start and end of the X T gather prior to computing the transform Percent pre whitening Enter the amount of pre whitening used to stabilize the least squares inversion in the presence of noise Minimum live traces Enter the minimum number of live traces that must be present in a gather in order to transform that gather 340 Two way time Offset Linear Radon Transform Two way time Transform Types Offset Minimum Minimum moveout moveout a Maximum moveout k E Maximum moveout Parabolic Radon Transform Offset Minimum moveout Maximum moveout Hyperbolic Radon Transform 341 Radon Inverse Usage The Radon Inverse step transforms data from the linear parabolic or hyperbolic Radon transform domain to the space time domain You specify the transform type and the range and number of transformed output traces Input Links 1
111. to analyze CMP loc increment Enter the CMP location increment between groups of CMP locations to analyze Mute Control Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting restricts the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction If not check the stretch mute must be supplied by an Early Mute card linked to the Constant Gamma Stack step Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Trace Amplitude Definition Select the trace amplitude definition Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relativ
112. trace statics file Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the trace static in milliseconds in the trace static file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the trace statics file 243 Velocity Function Usage The Velocity Function card data item is used to store time velocity pairs Stacking velocities may be picked interactively in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog Velocity Card File Velocity Card File Enter the velocity card data file name Customize Browse conce Example Card Data RE super cmp velocity picks Add Sheet Del Sheet 125 500000 Cell Math Sheet 1 of 13 16 000000 7500 000000 149 333313 7750 000000 234 666672 8000 000000 244 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Velocity Customize Velocity File Format Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length No of velocity locations sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Time Velocity 1 Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are
113. value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify a sample interval in milliseconds Samples per trace By default the number of samples per trace will be extracted from the general header If that value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify the number of samples per trace 564 Signature Input Usage The Signature Input step allows for direct input of seismic signatures stored in ASCII format The signature is converted to an SPW formatted seismic file Input Links None The signature file must be in a comma delimited format e g 0 07451 at the rate of one sample per row This file is selected in the Signature Input dialog by means of a Browse button Output Links 1 Seismic data file mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo e signature td signature file spw Status Open 222 53 565 Step Parameter Dialog Signature Input Signature Input Input text format signatures file name Browse C spwisignature txt Output Data Parameters No of traces 148 Trace length ms 1 000 0 Sample interval ms 2 0000 Cancel Parameter Description Browse Use the browse button to select the signature file Output Data Parameters Number of traces The number of times to duplicate the signature file Trace length The trace length of the signature file Sample interval ms The time sample interval of the signature file 566
114. vol 50 no 12 p 2759 2767 629 Example Flowcharts HE Documentation flo aK input spw k l Stack Power Optimization Statics H Output Receiver Statics Output Source Statics AAA 293 122 630 Step Parameter Dialog Stack Power Optimization Statics Stack Power Optimization Statics Control Parameters Median Filter l Median filter static values Number of iterations 10 Maximum allowable static ms 20 00000 Analysis window length ms 1000 Analysis start time ms 1000 Iteration Convergence Value End iteration based on static value Maximum static offset 2000 0 Analysis Profiles Build intermediate file s TE i lt lt lt lt Output stack type None Browse V Verbose console mode Output SPW format seismic file name cancel Parameter Description Control Parameters Number of iterations Maximum number of iterations for the processing step Maximum allowable static Static shifts for each iteration are not allowed to exceed this value in ms The final static is the sum of statics at each iteration The total static may exceed the maximum allowable static per iteration Analysis window length Correlation window size for stack power evaluation in ms The window starts at Analysis start time Analysis start time Start time for correlation window in ms Maximum static offset Offsets greater than this value in feet or meters are not included in
115. x 2 aj Lu Y Zoom Out FA Zoom In Output Image File Color Palette Color Wheel gt Customize Map Annotations Redraw Map C Redo 81 fan A Propagate Display Settings Synchronize Scrolling O Additional Display Settings 82 Attribute Maps Attribute maps map be generated from seismic files to show the variation of certain properties of the data in a map view Amplitude and frequency attributes are commonly used to quality control data The Amplitude Analysis and Frequency Analysis processing steps are commonly used to generate these attribute and save them in the seismic trace headers 83 Interactive CMP Bin Definition Survey Picking Help SPS Database Image Database Basemaps Binning Parameters Select binning diagram Fold Maps a Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 E OR FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W untities FA survey Basemap W untried BA survey Binning EJ 754679 771658 788638 805617 822660 978432 ry 978432 gt 957665 957665 o o 936835 936835 754679 771658 788638 805617 822660 Orientation method Three comers Origin easting 785986 70 Inline azimuth 35 63995 Inline bin sze 110 00 A A Source icon Recewericon Q v Coordinate definition Bin centers Origin northing 977457 64 Inine range 25000 1 First inline 1000 Icon color pg v Icon color gy
116. 0 0 0 500 0 2 0 10 150 0 Y Appl 2000 fisoo 2000 0 1000 0 fisoo m 2000 0 1500 0 fisoo P 2000 0 2000 0 Cancel Parameter Description Type of Operator Select type of deconvolution to perform Spiking or Predictive Spiking Weiner Levinson spiking deconvolution Predictive Weiner Levinson predictive or gapped deconvolution Prediction length ms Enter the prediction length in milliseconds Number of operators per trace Enter the number of separate deconvolution inverse filters to calculate per trace Overlap of design window ms Enter the overlap in milliseconds between operators This is the amount of the previous and or next window to include in the calculation of the inverse filter for the current window For each design gate enter Pre whitening percent Enter the amount of white noise to add The zero lag of the autocorrelation function is increased by this amount to induce stability in the matrix solution 706 Inverse filter length ms Enter the length of the inverse filter to be calculated and applied in milliseconds Apply moveout to decon design window If checked a linear moveout will be applied to the deconvolution design window The window start time will shift by delta time offset velocity Linear moveout velocity Enter the linear moveout of the deconvolution design window Design window start ms Enter the start time in milliseconds of th
117. 00 00 AM 1 28 00 AM Finally download and save the SPW3 msi file and the documentation to your computer 12 Installing SPW 3 on Windows Run the SPW 3 installer package msi that has been downloaded from our ftp site or delivered on CD ROM or DVD ROM Please note that you must uninstall any previous version of SPW 3 before you can install a new version Do so using the Windows control panel for applications PE spw CGEA Welcome to the SPW3 Setup Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install SPW3 on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law SPW 3 Installer First Dialog Click on the Next button then you will be prompted to select the installation directory Select Installation Folder The installer will install SPW3 to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder C Program Files x86 Install SPW3 for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer Everyone D Just me Cancel lt Back SPW 3 Installation Directory 13 Click on the Next button then you will be prompted to confirm the installation
118. 005030 7 6008 6138 788721 80968829 7005025 7 6011 6131 789417 60967306 9004993 6 6012 6132 789618 20967516 7004987 3 6012 6142 789581 30969730 6005016 3 6013 6133 789848 30967755 4004992 0 6013 6143 789795 20969955 7005011 3 6014 6134 790061 30967981 0004993 0 6014 6144 790009 80970179 4005010 3 6015 6135 790276 90968207 8005013 7 6015 6145 790225 20970405 5005001 7 6016 6136 790491 40968430 5005000 0 6016 6146 790418 00970697 1005007 3 6017 6127 790757 90966457 4005039 0 6017 6137 790706 20968655 9004982 7 6017 6147 790655 00970855 9005008 6 6017 6157 790603 20973055 2005044 5 6018 6128 790973 10966681 6005042 1 6018 6138 790920 90968880 6004983 5 6018 6148 790869 10971080 4005003 5 6018 6158 790817 50973280 6005048 3 6019 6129 791187 20966906 8005060 7 6019 6139 791134 00969106 4004983 5 6019 6149 791064 40971284 9005006 8 6019 6159 791032 60973506 7005051 6 6020 6130 791402 70967131 6005080 5 6020 6140 791350 30969331 8004976 2 Hep ose SPS Source Record Record Analysis Tab 98 The SPS Point Record also has a tab for map display The Map tab allows you to specify the Plot Type The default is Basemap SPS Source Record Source record file name C Teapot Dome Survey npr3 sps File Browse Spreadsheet Map Plot Type Basemap y aa O SPS Source Record Basemap 99 Running the Flowchart Once you are satisfied with the flow you have constructed you need to name and execute
119. 1 Channel Number 13 4byteint y 2 25 al a A i CMP 21 4byte int 2036 2059 13 49 to 52 Source Depth pp 0 10 0 0 Inline 181 4 byteint y 790156 792686 14 53 to 56 Receiver Datum 0 0 0 0 0 Crossiine 185 Abyte int y 972668 972728 15 57 to 60 Source Datum 0 0 jo o 0 Offset 37 4byte int y 8663 7943 16 61 to64 0 0 0 0 0 CMP Easting 193 4byte int y 2036 2059 SS i jj j 17 65 to 68 0 0 0 0 0 CMP Northing 185 4byteint 972668 972728 f 18 69 to 72 0 o 0 0 0 CMP Elevation 177 4byteint y 5004 5034 m CMP Datum 229 4byte int y 19 73 to 76 Source Easting 791919 791919 791919 791919 791919 Source Line 197 4byteint y 6023 6023 20 77 to 80 Source Northing 976625 976625 976625 976625 1976625 Source Location 17 4byteint y 6173 6173 21 81 to 84 Receiver Easting 788393 788614 788833 789054 789290 y Source Easting 73 4byte int 791919 791919 E I ap Source Northing 77 4byte int y 976625 976625 sl ae a Ahutaint ana a iDN Trace scan range 1 to 24 oK File Browse Create format file Help SEGY Analyzer Trace Headers tab 41 Using the tabs in the dialog you can display the SEG Y text header also referred to as the EBCDIC header the binary header multiple selected trace header or a display of the seismic traces
120. 19068 3 19115 8 4 4 cw Easting 708366 75 perry 54216 14 8 2042 0000 1044 0000 2042 0000 6023 CMP Northing 939269 06 976889 50 8 62652 1 9 2043 0000 1044 0000 2043 0000 6023 CMP Elevation 4832 75 5531 20 9 71088 14 10 2044 0000 1044 0000 2044 0000 6023 eed 10 79524 1 u 2045 0000 1044 0000 2045 0000 6023 E a sue 11 87960 1 2 2046 0000 1044 0000 2046 0000 6023 Source Easting 788339 88 809248 62 f 12 96396 1 B 2047 0000 1044 0000 2047 0000 6023 Source Northing 939328 31 976916 12 Ly ney EE En 13 104832 14 14 2048 0000 1044 0000 2048 0000 6023 Source Datum 0 00 0 00 14 113268 1 15 2049 0000 1044 0000 2049 0000 6023 Source Depth 0 00 0 00 15 121704 14 16 2050 0000 1044 0000 2050 0000 6023 Se o id 16 130140 1 1 2051 0000 1044 0000 2051 0000 6023 eee 17 138576 u 18 2052 0000 1044 0000 2052 0000 6023 Receiver Line 2002 2174 EN Receiver Location 2007 2100 Primary sort key Field Fie z Record selection Receiver Easting 788393 69 809316 50 Seconday sort key Channel Im Jog Receiver Northing 939209 81 976862 81 Tertiary sort key None SA 231 2 pa Quaternary sort key None Create record at Change inprimery gt Luca i le View Trace Headers 49 The Execute command runs the selected flow Currently only one flow segment is allowed in a flowchart A flow segment is defined as a part of a flow originating with an input seismic disk file and ending in an output seismic disk file The Submit
121. 195 275 397 Step Parameter Dialog Source Order Stack Source Order Stack Exponent for normalization 1 00 Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces Use true amplitude traces Output SPW format seismic file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Browse Select this button to set the output seismic file name 598 Trace Mixing Usage The Trace Mixing step is used to perform a weighted horizontal sum of up to fifteen 15 sequential input traces into a single output trace Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Ma input spw e Trace Mixing Mi output spw Status Open 272 307 599 Step Parameter Dialog Trace Mixing Trace Mixing Number of traces to mix 33 Weighting Function V Apply weighting function No Value No Value No Value Cancel
122. 25 976625 f Secondary header Channel v Annotation increment 21 Vertical scale 5 00 Pamen Cie ar Ahutaint m rans rana J Trace range 1 to 240 S Vertical annotation 500 Gain dB 0 00 Kl J oK File Browse Create format file Help SEG Y Analyzer Seismic View tab 42 The display of the Binary Header allows you to look at the values as either 2 byte or 4 byte words E SEGY Analyzer NPR3 Geometry sgy eats ES ns Textheader Binary header Traceheader Seismic view Get from data Header size in bytes 3200 ay enn Zbyte words 4bytemords Sample format analysis Text format EBCDIC C ASCIT E 3yte positior Description Value a 1 Binary header 1 1to2 0 Header size in bytes 400 2 3to4 o Startbyte Datatype Override Value 3 st06 o Samples per trace 21 Abyteint v 1000 4 7t08 o Sample interval 17 Abyteint v 2 0 s 9to10 o Sample format 25 4byte int v 4byte 6 11to12 o Number of traces 116887 Pad e 8 15to16 o Trace header ees o 9 17to18 Sample Interval 2000 Header name Startbyte Data type Minimum Maximum pare lad 11 21to22 Samples per trace 1000 Field File Number 9 4byteint v 14 14 12 23t024 o Channel Number 13 Sbyteint y 2 25 iets cup faa sons o 2006 oy 13 25t026 Sample Format 5 Inline 181 4byteint y 790156 792686 14 27 to 28 0 Crossiine 185 4byteint 972668 972728 15 291020 o
123. 38 io 17 138576 1 18 2052 0000 1044 0000 2052 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Receiver Line 2002 2174 al gt Receiver Location 2007 2100 Primary sort key Field Fle y ATA Receiver Easting 788393 69 809316 50 Seconday sort key Channel YO ID Receiver Northing 939209 81 976962 81 El Tertiary sort key None y Receiver Elevation 4931 20 5656 70 y Quaternary sort key None y Create record at Changeinprimary y pr gt Spreadsheet Display of Seismic Trace Headers In the seismic trace header display the headers are displayed in gather order and split by gathers The Record selection see directional arrows at the bottom of the display allows you to move through the gathers or jump to a specific gather by number 173 The SPS Database SPS files are tied to the current project using the SPS Database SPS Database Image Database Picking Help Basemaps Binning Parameters Fold Maps Offset Distribution Maps gt Azimuth Distribution Maps gt b d Elevation Maps Statics Maps gt Display Preferences Tool Preferences a fi C Add to source list E G Shared Folders Z pe ps AD as fmt Ha es aki Add to receiver list SourceAmplitude baf srcamp baf temp bsf Add to relation list X Delete from list Help Definitions SPS Database Definition Select SPS files and add them to the correct column based on their data type Individual formats may be define
124. 4 gt Primary sort key Field Fe a Primary anno 1 Trace polarity Normal oa Vertical scale 3 00 Secondary sort key Channel X Secondary anno 20 Orientation Left to right m Display gain 0 00 Tertiary sort key None oa Vertical anno 500 ros tara window tng 500 00 6 am 9 9 E E 2 auaterarysoroy None aor tie es 500 Reference 6 594616 Trace excursion 200 iS i M 9 Create record at Change in primary Minor time ines 100 Current project Teapot Dome 97 Time 808 00 Amplitude 0 000570 H Seismic Processing Woflshop 30 Field File 14 Channel 2 Variable Area Seismic Display FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Spectral Decomposition Help W segoo1 Geometry PA NPR3 Field Fles sgy Trace type Trace polarity Orientation Ampitudes Reference Variable densty y Normal 5 Leto Trace scaling M 6 594616 z Horizontal scale 32 00 Vertical scale 3 00 Display gain 0 00 Window length 500 00 Trace excursion 2 00 a gt ae ab ab Primary sort key Secondary sort key Tertiary sort key Quaternary sort key Create record at Field Fle z Channel None gt None Change in primary Primary anno Secondary anno Vertical anno Major time ines Minor time ines dh dh de a ae Current p
125. 7 8 9 IEEE A TET PE pope o Parameter Description Start pass frequency Hz Enter the low frequency pass band limit in hertz Hz This is the lowest frequency in the pass band End pass frequency Hz Enter the high frequency pass band limit in hertz Hz This is the highest frequency in the pass band It may not exceed one half the Nyquist frequency Number of spectral bands Enter the number of frequency bands Each trace is split into this number of frequency bands which are AGC ed and then summed to create the output trace Length of AGC operator ms Enter the AGC operator length This is the length of the AGC operator which is applied to each frequency band 700 Use filter bands defined below If checked the entered filter bands specified by the low cut low pass high pass high cut and filter weight will be used Lo Cut Enter the filter low frequency cutoff point in hertz Hz Lo Pass Enter the filter low frequency pass point in hertz Hz High Pass Enter the filter high frequency pass point in hertz Hz High Cut Enter the filter high frequency cutoff point in hertz Hz Weight Enter the filter band relative weight 701 Surface Consistent Deconvolution Usage The Surface Consistent Deconvolution step uses a Gauss Seidel iterative method to perform a four component surface consistent decomposition of the amplitude spectra of the input seismic data into sourc
126. 80 Vibroseis Correlation Usage The Vibroseis Correlation step cross correlates uncorrelated seismic data acquired with the Vibroseis method with the corresponding vibroseis sweep The correlated output data should be considered zero phase Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Seismic data Vibroseis pilot sweeps optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Uncorrelated Vibroseis input spw e Vibroseis Correlation Correlated Vibroseis output spw Status Open 182 21 281 Step Parameter Dialog Vibroseis Correlation Vibroseis Correlation Signature Input Options Pilot length ms 10000 One pilot per record from auxiliary file Co ilot t f iliary fil l Minimum phase compensate data dead iLL C One pilot per record from data file Extended correlation Browse Aux SPW seismic file name C Data Example Data Vibroseis pilot spw Parameter Description Pilot length ms Enter the length of the pilot sweep in milliseconds Minimum phase compensate data If checked a minimum phase compensation filter will be calculated and applied so that the correlated data will be minimum phase on output Extended Correlation If checked an extended correlation will be done using the entered trace output length Output trace length ms Enter the output length of the result
127. AA a Sa acetate ad saan tt octet are shyt Avtar 595 SQULCO Order Stack a it A ule Rewind AAA 597 T ac MI A as 599 Wartable Ta awl 601 A saucer cor a e nce aacemasseacs suena meds E 603 Apply GMG SES A A AS 604 Apply Statie Shifts ss nersonna nnan wedats E E E eeeeiads Ste Maa settee ER 607 Automatic Residual Statics a aii 609 CMP Statics Separation ES 611 CMP Statics String 0 esien iaaiiai irii 613 A alain traces ase A A a 615 Floating Datum A a a a a A lt fa tse 617 Receiver Statics O aces 619 Recerver Statics SUMMING serietan tn 621 Retfracti n SAME a 623 Source Statics PA cas 625 E otis nuh oneal ashen ol etl hanes cena ei a 627 Stack Power Optimization Statics cccccccecccceseeseceseceseceeeceeeeceaecneeeeseeeseeesecneeeeaes 629 Surface Consistent States ista 633 TA dos 637 A A E A A E E 639 Apply Linear Mev ec OU Ni 640 Apply NM TON 642 Apply PP Non hyperbolic Moveout c cccssccssscescceeceeseeceseceseeeeseeeseecaeceseeeeeeenaees 645 Azimuth Velocity Analysis cassis casita tah ascot E EEE 648 Calculate 3 D Residual NMO ccivesj cing id cbivanahenttasintiandeanansonraenudes 652 Constant Velocity StACKS ini as 655 DCN Tick a Sal outa otek tsa uns ee ah e cd bei cata a i at 658 We Hal V SIO CIt CS gest hhc e a iden 661 Dis Equation ira 662 PP Constant Eta Stacksiin aii 664 Supergather Velocity Analysis dd A cicis 667 NEC es a a ato e o 670 Velocity Semblante A a aa 672 Velocity Smoothing trcctssteG A es Ri
128. Browse Click on the Browse button to select the SEG Y disk file Once the file has been selected the values in the SEG Y trace header indicating the number of records the number of traces per record the sample interval and the number of samples per trace will be displayed in the SEG Y File dialog Be sure to confirm the verity of these values If they are not as expected an option exists to override each of these values so that the SEG Y file may be successfully reformatted Number of records Indicates the number of records in the SEG Y disk file inferred from the SEG Y file header Override Click yes if the Number of records value is not correct Enter the correct value Traces per record Indicates the number of traces per record stored in bytes 13 14 of the SEG Y binary file header 554 Override Click yes if the Traces per record value is not correct Enter the correct value Sample interval ms Indicates the sample interval stored in bytes 17 18 of the SEG Y binary file header Override Click yes if the Sample interval value is not correct Enter the correct value Samples per trace Indicates the number of samples per trace stored in bytes 21 22 of the SEG Y binary file header Override Click yes if the Samples per trace value is not correct Enter the correct value Format file Select the file that accurately describes the SEG Y file header A default SEG Y format file is provided
129. CVS panels Gather Browse Assign a file name to the output supergathers 669 Velocity Cube Usage The Velocity Cube step inputs a 3D seismic volume the corresponding stacking velocity cards and outputs a velocity cube with a velocity function defined at each bin position Input Links 1 Seismic data in CMP sort order mandatory 2 Velocity Function card mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic File mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo E H input spw Velocity Function e Velocity Cube ut spw outp pl Status Open 228 269 670 Step Parameter Dialog Velocity Cube Velocity Cube Smoothing Control ja fo Cancel Parameter Description Smoothing Control The smoothing options are not active 671 Velocity Semblance Usage The Velocity Semblance step creates velocity semblance displays for the input CMP records Stacking velocities may be picked interactively from this semblance display in SeisViewer For semblance display generation you designate the velocity range for semblance calculation by choosing the number of velocities the starting velocity for this range and the velocity increment You may generate only one CMP semblance display for each input CMP gather You may also control the time gate length around hyperbolic velocity paths for CMP summing in the semblance calculation using the Semblance length input parameter Finally the output semblance d
130. Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the mute time in seconds at a specified offset and trace number in the output mute file Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset corresponding to a specified mute time and trace number in the output mute file Unique trace number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the unique trace number corresponding to a specified mute time and source receiver offset in the output mute file Pick order index Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the pick index corresponding to a specified mute time source receiver offset and unique trace number in the output mute file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the surgical mute file 230 Tail Mutes Usage The Tail Mutes card data item is used to store tail or end mute data Mute times are in units of seconds Tail mutes may be interactively defined in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog Tail Mute Card File Tail Mute Card File Enter the tail mute card data file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data 2079 166748 112 500000 2825 000000 2587 500000 231 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Tail Mute Customize Tail Mute
131. File Analyze Source Record Analyze Position File gt Analyze Receiver Record Analyze Horizon File Analyze Relation Record Copy SEGD Files Merge SEGY Files FTP SPS Analyzer Menu 46 The SPS Analyzer defines the column positions of the sps format and shows you the definitions of the columns as well as the data value ranges for each column as you edit the forma When finished Save the format and it is automatically associated with each this specific sps file Every time this file is read the format file will be used to decode the data in the file Receiver line Receiver location Receiver index Receiver code Receiver easting Receiver northing Receiver elevation g A 2 2 18 26 27 47 IP 4d 4h 4h 4h 4 4 Receiver Record identification Start Co End Co Record identification 1 ENE 25 26 28 55 65 71 ah 4 ah 4 4 4 gt a Read lines with receiver record ID R End Col Load Minimum 2002 2007 0 788393 7 939209 8 4931 2 976862 8 Recording date 72 5656 7 Recording time 75 Maximum Start Col 2174 Receiver static 29 2100 Receiver depth 33 2 0 Receiver datum 37 Receiver uphole 41 2 809316 5 Water depth 43 End Col 32 36 40 42 46 74 80 First line to read 1 4h 4d faj 4h 4h faje 4 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 0 0 0
132. File may be used to selectively input data in conjunction with the SPW Tape Utility or may be linked to the Select Traces processing step for the same purpose Step Parameter Dialog Polygon Definition Card File Polygon Definition Card File Enter the polygon definition card data file Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data FE Polygon file Del Row x Y 1000 000000 1000 000000 1000 000000 2000 000000 183 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Polygon Definition Customize Polygon Definition File Format No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows 1 s Data header field Start column Length x first key value fs 1 Y second key value 11 io Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of coordinate pairs used to define the polygon in the output polygon definition file Data header field X first key value Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the X coordinate associated with a given coordinate pair in the output polygon defini
133. Filter Specify start time of filter Automatically set start time of filter Start time of data Specify the time at which to start convolving the input data with the filter Start time of filter Specify the time zero of the filter if the Specify start time of filter option is being used Seismic file that contains filter Use the Browse button to locate the seismic file that contains the filter 308 Derivative Usage The Derivative step computes the derivative of the data samples in each input seismic trace Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mia input spw E Derivative Mi output spw Status Open 221 23 309 Step Parameter Dialog Derivative Derivative Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 310 Diffusion Filter Usage The Diffusion filter is a noise reduction filter based on the diffusion equation An option exists to calculate a continuity factor that inhibits diffusion across edges Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Fehmers G C and Hocker C F W 2003 Fast structural interpretation with structure oreiented filters Geophysics vol 68 no 4 p 1286 1293 Example Flowchart Documentation
134. Geometry Extract Geometry Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 378 Flex Binning Usage The Flex Binning step is used to regularize fold in a 3D survey by borrowing traces from neighboring bins Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Flex Binning Ma Flex Binned output spw 106 158 379 Step Parameter Dialog Flex Binning Flex Binning Bin Parameters In line oversize Cross line oversize Maximum fold Maximum offset Input SPW format seismic file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description In line oversize Enter the percent of the in line bin dimension used to extend the bin in the in line direction for the purpose of trace borrowing Cross line oversize Enter the percent of the cross line bin dimension used to extend the bin in the cross line direction for the purpose of trace borrowing Maximum fold Enter the maximum allowable fold attainable through flex binning Maximum offset Enter the maximum allowable source receiver offset among traces in neighboring bins used to increase fold In line dimension In line lt Cross line dimension BUII SSOLD gt je Dimensions of Flexed Bin 380 Geometry Definition Usage The
135. Help Current project Slonik X 670 Y 129 259 Step Parameter Dialog Phase Rotation x a Rotate based on header valiue If Component trace he Rotate by angle stored in trace header valiue Rotation angle in trace he Phase rotation angle degrees Help Cancel Parameter Description Rotate based on header value If the phase rotation is only to be applied to some traces in the dataset then a trace header value may be used to control which traces are rotated An example of where this is useful is transition zone seismic where some receivers in a line are geophones and some are hydrophones Rotating the hydrophone by 90 matches the data from the geophone If Component trace header Select the trace header to be used for controlling the operation Select the logic operator lt lt gt gt or to be used in determining the traces to used in the operation Rotate by angle stored in trace header value Alternative to doing a constant phase rotation a header value degrees may be used Rotation angle in trace header Select the trace header word containing the rotation angle degrees Phase rotation angle degrees Enter the constant phase rotation angle to apply to all the seismic data traces unless Rotate by angle stored in trace header value is checked 260 Remove DC Bias Usage The Remove DC Bias step removes the average or m
136. Line 1 X gt View type Current Line y Location Static ms a Location i a Se 40 2 107 0 47 3 4113 1 06 4 119 6 78 20 5 124 6 51 6 130 551 E 7 137 42 v 5 8 143 512 z 9 149 35 20 10 155 3 69 11 161 3 05 12 167 1 07 ee ee ee ee ee EE foe sos os sos os 5 3 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 520 560 600 640 680 720 13 172 1 64 i OK Help Cancel SPW Source Statics 90 Velocity Functions Velocity functions are defined by time offset pairs They are usually picked on selected gathers throughout the dataset and interpolated between these control points gl velocity Functions ax Velocity file Velocity format File name C Data SEG2010 Teapot Dome Auxiliary tpd cvs pics Format type SPW X 4 Line 1050 Location 2075 v View type CurrentLocation y m Time Velocity 166 9200 Velocity i 21468 9200 31924 11200 A 1000 4 1094 12000 AA 1500 511260 12400 _ m T E 2000 6 1744 13600 2 m 5 2500 7 2970 15200 5 8 4006 16000 E A aaaD N 5000 17000 18500 20000 7000 8500 9500 11000 12500 14000 15500 SPW Velocity Function Spreadsheet 91 SPS Observers Notes The SPS Relation Record displays Observers Notes in a tabbed worksheet Use the File Browse to select your XPS file and the spreadsheet will open displaying the contents If it is not correct or nothing is displayed then you shoul
137. Low rolloff rate dB oct 18 0 v High cut High frequency Hz 70 0 High rolloff rate dBfoct 18 0 Phase Selection Zero C Minimum Cancel Parameter Description Low cut Check this box to attenuate low frequencies If unchecked a low cut filter will not be applied to your data Low frequency Enter the low half power frequency in Hertz to be applied to your data The amplitude of this frequency will be reduced by a factor of two relative to the input Low rolloff rate Enter the low rolloff filter slope in decibels per octave dB Octave to be applied to your data Higher numbers give steeper rolloff High cut Check this box to attenuate high frequencies If unchecked a high cut filter will not be applied to your data High frequency Enter the high half power frequency in Hertz to be applied to your data The amplitude of this frequency will be reduced by a factor of two relative to the input High rolloff rate Enter the high rolloff filter slope in decibels per octave dB Octave to be applied to your data Higher numbers give steeper rolloff Phase selection Select the phase type of the filter Zero Zero phase filter selected Minimum Minimum phase filter selected 304 Coherence Filter Usage The Coherence filter is used to accentuate the visual coherence of seismic events Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in
138. Median Pl td o o ol a ales e ts al 327 RO 329 OP as 332 Radon Demdltiple iii 335 Radon Transformi an a E a aa 338 Radon ler e to aha tale ada ch od sale und e a a 342 RICK Gr A setae dita Segal Adee tere ele eA eR 345 Spatial Noise Piller ccc sts eer E e e et 347 Swell Removal A A O ea E 349 Time Vatiant Band A A teens E AA E deuce 351 Time Varant B tterWworth A iaiaeiaeiaa riie da iaie 353 Wave Equation Multiple Attenuation A 355 Geome try Binning Steps 3 asiera aR ER E E R TERE RER ens 357 Note Trace Header Geometry Application ooooooconocinococonoconnnonnnconncconocnnn cono ccon nono nocnnss 358 Brilla MES a a e do 8 362 EMPATA dE A aod sae Oa A 365 COMIP SF Old Dita 368 CMP Fold GEME tyo sieer i R naan eno ab Rae 370 Crooked Line Bt 3 3 Crooked Cine at cial ta ta ek Aaa alas ta ale alae Ate eens aaa hata att oda 375 Extract Geometry it a e a a vhs dv A E E aE AEE 377 Flex Binning os 379 Geometry Defiitioti sn A E Nocatee 381 Geometry Interpolation y adi s 390 PreStack Kirchhoff Paro Aid 392 Simple Marie Geometr ys a A a a a 394 Single Fold Profile eo MSI A id 396 UROOA PODES 399 Image dia ita 401 F E Frequency SES oi 404 F T AA E 406 TVA A A 408 20 DP MONO ni ds 409 Create Simple Geometry from XY Si ts 411 Convert Time t DM dao clsdi s 414 Finite Difference NATA aaa 416 Kirchhoff Dip Moro ta ad br aiii 418 PhaseShilt WHOA ein lid 421 Post Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration 0 catckss soaune aes Wy Aasede aa
139. NS 165 CAM OVS E E EE E TA coeds tts tetaasadesli E 167 Horizon Ple id 170 A A maeonas 173 Multicomponent Receiver Statics Ple ii dai ias 175 Observers Notes SP SEOANE 178 Phase Matching Statistics Pi tarada 181 Polygon Definition Fil cseninec cerien eae itis a A E E aus 183 PP Nimo Eta Funcom A atte a aa 185 PP Nhmo Gamma Function irae deacon taa 188 Profil Geometry A A a a u aai ta 191 AITNE CETT AEE EA E E E AE EEA E E AA EEA 194 Receiver Locations SPS Format aii ri ds 197 RECIO MOS A a as 200 Receiver Statics Ti dai 203 Retractor VES RL 205 Residual NMO Analysis A a a db ida 208 Rotation Card Mill ll iia 211 Source CAMS A IS 214 Source Locations SPS Format ooooonnocccccononononononannnccnonnnnononanonononnnnnnncononnnncononnannnonnnos 217 A O A O 220 DOUICE ate O ias 223 A a sdect sau aaacedyaucci suds soaker s iiaubsadeeece ee eS 225 a O 228 TAM dete Shae body Seated R Son alls ial ahead cute tol le 231 A O 234 Trace KiS ennaa Sa ie chal 0 Jon a al tha a tence al ade tat os 236 TraceReyversal A A 239 ar AA O eauisbe hte EAE 242 Velocity PUNCH ON a 244 IDTE EAAS o RA A E succes E tua arcu ceca EE AT A O 247 BCS CCS tests o a e e a 1 252 Automatic Trace lt o LAR ANA 253 Coordinate Conversion oooccccncncncncncncncncnononcncncnonancnnnnno Error Bookmark not defined Data Dittetetieet sce ceded oleate ais a plasaeaisti nly a a ir 255 Data DIS i acre cass sizes ree ieia ariii a e Error Bookmark not defined Dat
140. None Value 0 0000 Parameter Description Type of operator Select the mathematical operation that will be applied to the seismic trace header Angle Specification If a trigonometric operation is to be performed indicate whether the angles involved are measured in units of degrees or radians Header Field Select the trace header field to be modified Value Enter the value that will be used to modify the selected trace header field 268 Example Add 40 to the existing value of the Uphole time MM Trace Header Math Trace Header Math Type of Operator Add to sin Subtract from cos Multiply by tan Divide by asin Remainder of acos Modulus of atan Equal to Integer part of A a F r r a ds Absolute value Fractional part of Angle Specification Angles in Radians C Angles in Degrees Header Field Uphole Time Value 140 Cancel 269 Trace Header Column Math Usage The Trace Header Column Math step allows you modify the trace header values of a seismic trace using standard mathematical operations on combinations of trace header values Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Me Input spw Trace Header Column Math Me Output spw Status Open 313 595C 270 Step Parameter Dialog W Trace Head
141. Number 13 Abyteint v 2 25 CMP 21 byte int y 2036 2059 Inine 181 byte int y 790156 792686 Crossiine 185 4 byte int 972668 972728 Offset 37 byteint v 3663 7943 CMP Easting 193 4byte int v 2036 2059 CMP Northing 185 byte int y 972668 972728 CMP Elevation 177 4byte int y 5004 5034 CMP Datum 229 4byteint y Source Line 197 4byteint v 6023 6023 Pere m pper Source Location 17 4byteint 6173 6173 Trace range for histogram 1 e tw 1 5 Source Easting 73 4byteint 791919 791919 s x Grate neon Source Northing 77 4byteint y 976625 976625 Trae range for histogram 0 etl 2000 Export image a n nl oK File Browse Create format file Help Histogram Analysis Display 44 SEGD Analysis The SEGD Analyzer is very similar to the SEGY Analyzer and allows you to analyze the various parts of a SEGD file structure T Zi Segd Analyzer Ce iss SEGD Type Sercel 403 428 z Hex Dump External Header Trace header Seismic view Directory Filename 00000058 segd X 58 E n 1 3 5 7 9 1113151719 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 Dataset directory 0 C Biofeld Seismic FieldData2 K General header A E eS Field file number 58 SEGD format code 8058 ds 4 5 Ey Recording da
142. PW format seismic file or enter the name of a new SPW format seismic file to use for output from the process 657 Delta T Stacks Usage The Delta T Stacks step generates a series of constant delta T stack traces The delta T is measured from a user supplied reference velocity field As such the Delta T Stacks step is designed to refine previously picked velocity fields You choose the number first delta T stack the last delta T stack and the number of delta T stacks to generate You have the option to apply a stretch mute to the NMO corrected data if you so desire With the series of constant delta T stack traces you may page through these stacked panels in SeisViewer and interactively pick velocity functions that result in the most coherent stacked sections Input Links 1 Seismic data pre stack in CMP sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Seismic File Ha H DeltaT Stacks reference velocity function 4 Status Open 247 309 658 Step Parameter Dialog DeltaT Stacks DeltaT Stacks Mute Control V Apply stretch mute Delta increment E Percentage 30 Maximum offset Taper length samples 15 Number of deltas First CMP line to analyze Interpolation Type Selection CMP line increment Linear C Quadratic No of CMP lines Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces No
143. Polynomial order Enter the order of the orthagonal polynomials to fit to the data 626 Source Statics Summing Usage The Source Statics Summing step will sum together two input Source Statics card data files into a single output Source Statics card data file Input Links 1 Source Statics cards mandatory 2 Source Statics cards mandatory Output Links 1 Source Statics cards mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo HA Long Period Source Statics Short Period Source Statics Source Statics Summing Output Source Statics A o 362 131 627 Step Parameter Dialog Statics Summing Source Statics Summing Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 628 Stack Power Optimization Statics 2 D 3 D Usage The Stack Power Optimization Statics step calculates surface consistent residual static time corrections by maximizing the power in the stack Source and receiver super traces are cross correlated with corresponding CMP super traces to determine a surface consistent static correction For 3 D the input seismic file is required to be a CMP binned seismic volume For 2 D the input seismic file can be in any sort order as long as Geometry Definition has been applied Binning geometry for 3 D surveys should include all shot and receiver locations Set the bin origin at the minimum source receiver or CMP location Output stacks may be generated to evaluate the quality
144. Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Documentation EJ Dataset Math Kill Traces Phase Rotation Remove DC Bias Remove Reverberation po Reverse Traces S N Based Record Edits gt ph e 2 e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Slonik Current flow Documentation X 673 Y 267 265 Step Parameter Dialog a Reverse Traces Primary header Primary start Primary stop Secondary header Secondary start Secondary stop Tertiary header Tertiary start Tertiary stop Field File y 123 134 Channel vii 2 None Source Location y 501 510 Receiver Location v 432 1432 Import Export Add Row Delete Row OK Help Cancel Parameter Description Primary header Select the first trace header field to use for reversing traces This is combined with the other selected header key values to determine the set of traces to reverse Primary start Enter the start value for the first selected header field Primary stop Enter the end value for the first selected header field Secondary header Select the second trace header field to use for reversing traces This is combined with the other selected header key values to determine the set of traces to reverse Secondary start Enter the start value for the second selected header field Secondary stop Enter the end value for the sec
145. Range Browse Save Headers To File Cancel Processing History Data description If the seismic file is linked to an existing file name the four parameter boxes provide a brief description of the data volume Number of records The number of sort ordered records in the seismic file Traces per record The number of traces per sort ordered record in the seismic file Sample interval The time sample interval of the seismic file in seconds Samples per trace The number of data samples per trace in the seismic file 557 Input Range Select this button to set an input range of records to process Input Range Limit Input Range Limit Y Limit input records First record to input Record increment 1 No of records to input 1 1 Cancel Limit input records If checked the input records will be limited to the specified records First record to input Enter the first record to input into the processing flow No of records to input Enter the number of records to input into the processing flow Record increment Enter the increment between records to input Browse Select this button to set the seismic file name Save Headers to File Select this button to export the seismic trace headers to an output text file The output text file is a tab delimited file that may be directly read into various text and spreadsheet applications Processing History Select this butto
146. Red A e t aa aaa a hese a a aioe Seda 34 Proc ssi ng Categories A e a a A 35 Processing Steps DistSincsencio i ien i en E E EE A ARAA ERRES 36 Console Display ieres a a aa a a 37 Menu A I N 38 The FlowChart Menue ieena Pete Oe SSeS te etc Eo Er CU RnR Ue Pre en OE ern RS 39 SEGY ANAVE AY 40 The Processing Meninas dr Error Bookmark not defined The Seismic Display Mens tad 52 The Attribute Map Menu ocd ce doi 53 The Survey ICI caret nene a a co leu a cask a a A e s 56 Th Picking Men e reio divs iaria a EEE Asoo bora Aaa E aes 57 The Spectral Decomposition Mene rinitis 58 Building Processing A iii a 59 Setting Processing Step and Data Step ParameterS oooooooccinccnoncoconononncnnncconncconocancconnno 60 Displaying Seismie Ata ra A A aetna neers 61 TESIS Display eire a cage con Ata A had Mest heed aes a 63 Seismic Display Control Paita da dd as 64 Left Side of the Seismic Display Control Panel cocino ica acaricia 64 Center of the Seismic Display Control Panel oooononccninccioccnicocinoccnnncconacono cono nonnnocnocnnos 65 Select sont Key NUMBER E E E 66 Center of the Seismic Display Control Panel Tools Error Bookmark not defined Capture an Image Tool ote o acide andar ce a Meet a a iain 67 Selset Color Scale TOO 68 Create Color Scale Tool acthsdeeseviassqcauss feasts sudan aeenee uke pets 69 Zooni n TOO re agate E amp braleceuate ged pitts altace aE aa E 70 Zoom Out Tool Sacto tees atest ale seek ak oh eas od Sa a
147. SPW 3 Project Flowchart Startup After the first time you run Flowchart there is usually a default project defined which is automatically set at startup and this dialog will not appear Whenever you select a project or create a new project you will be prompted if you wish to set this project as your default flowchart a Do you want the application to open with the selected project Set As Default 20 To change the current project or to create a new project choose either the Select Project or the Create Project command from the FlowChart menu a Processing Select Project Create Project Edit Current Project Set Startup Project Set Working Directory Close Currrent Tab Analyze SEGY File Analyze SEGD File Analyze SPS File Analyze Position File gt Analyze Horizon File Copy SEGD Files Merge SEGY Files FTP Preferences Exit Select and Create Project Menu Commands When you perform the Select Project command a list of the project xml files available in your ProjectFiles directory will be shown Select the project you wish to work on and Open the project 21 x E x Project File E ect ject Fil pes I jald gt Computer gt Local Disk C Development pgc64 flowchart ProjectFiles y 49 Search ProjectFiles Ss Date modified Type 11 17 2010 6 42 AM XML Document 11 9 2010 11 33 AM XML Document 115 2010 2 50AM XML Docume BZ Videos B Dan jE Co
148. Seismic Processing Workshop SPW V 3 0 February 26 2012 Parallel Geoscience Corporation About This Manual This manual is organized into two sections The first section is a user s manual for the SPW Flowchart application The second section is a reference manual that describes each of the processing steps and associated parameters in the SPW Processing library Parallel Geoscience Corporation PO Box 5989 Incline Village NV 89450 Tel 1 541 421 3127 E mail support parallelgeo com Web http www parallelgeo com SPW Seismic Processing Workshop SPW Flowchart SPW Executor are trademarks of Parallel Geoscience Corporation All other products are trademarks of their respective companies This manual is proprietary information of Parallel Geoscience Corporation and is for the internal use only by licensed purchasers of SPW products 2012 Parallel Geoscience Corporation Seismic Processing Workshop Ud 1 A aera ranted vlna ete Bette aid cadet A E tage tats 1 About This Mandala A A nn di anes 2 A dde 9 PEU o e tsa 10 SPW Flowchart VEIA use Abana E a a bus 11 SPW 3 Installer Available Online Rdos 11 Installing Es 13 SES USE EDIRC LOE lores E ve deb ayes E E aac ete ee 18 Creating Or Selecting a Prius 20 SEG Y Proc ssing Ford A 26 Main Flowchart Wind 30 PUES Res hah cn a e Ae as e e a a S 31 Selection Dro A Heaton A ta 32 Linking Dori As 33 DA a a a a a e re a 33 Select AN A 33 Undo Togli Aikee A aa 34
149. Ss Data header field Start column Length Trace index 1 Source line 11 Source location 21 Offset 31 Time 141 Pick sort 51 Layer 61 jg Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the first break time picks in the output first break pick file Data header field Trace index Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the trace index value associated with the pick time in the first break pick file Source line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source line number associated with a specific pick time in the first break pick file Source location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location number associated with a specific pick time in the first break pick file 159 Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset associated with a specific pick time in the first break pick file Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the pick time in milliseconds
150. Start time on trace Enter the start time for analysis End time on trace Enter the end time for analysis 712 Wavelet length ms Enter the length of the output seismic wavelet Pre whitening Enter the percent pre whitening that will be used to stabilize the computation of the phase spectrum Extraction Method Select the method used to extract the source wavelet from the seismic and well log Fourier The amplitude spectrum of the source wavelet is computed as the quotient of the Fourier transform of the seismic trace s at the well location and the Fourier transform of the reflectivity series derived from appropriate well log data The phase spectrm Wiener A least square Wiener filter is computed that transforms the reflectivity series derived from appropriate well log data into the seismic trace s at the well location 713
151. Statics List Refractor Velocities Residual NMO Analysis Rotations File SPS Observer Notes SPS Receiver Locations SPS Source Locations Source Gains Source Statics Source Statics List Streamer Definition Surgical Mutes TailMutes Time Filter Trace Kills Trace Reversals Trace Statics UKOOA P1 90 Velocity Function Window Definition A 136 Creating and Editing Auxiliary Data Files Each of the auxiliary data types can be created and edited manually within Flowchart To create a card data file select the appropriate icon from the card data list and place that icon on the Flowchart canvas To add information to the card data file you must first assign ita name To assign a name to the card data file double right click on the icon and use the Browse button Once the card data file has a name you may double left click on the icon to open the spreadsheet and insert card data values In the following example we will create and edit a source SPS file RE lt UNTITLED gt Source Locations SPS Format Status Open 204 7 FE lt UNTITLED gt Source SPS Format File Source SPS Format File Enter the source SPS file name Customize Browse Source Locations SPS Format Status Open 197 298 137 Step 2 Double right click on the icon and use the Browse button to assign a name to the file 138 EZ Flowchart File Edit Display Flowchart Flowltems Help Window EE CESSING LIST aaa de Adju
152. Step Parameter Dialog Trace Kill Card File Trace Kill Card File Enter the trace kill card data file name Customize Browse Example Card Data RE Killed Traces Channel Shot Location Shot Line Rx Location CMP Location CMP Line Offset User Def 1 User Def 2 User Def 3 388 000000 1225 339 000000 363 500000 1225 1715 000000 0 848300 0 000000 0 000000 380 000000 1225 332 000000 356 000000 1225 1680 000000 0 853600 0 000000 0 000000 380 000000 1225 334 000000 357 000000 1225 1610 000000 0 855500 0 000000 0 000000 376 000000 1225 330 000000 353 000000 1225 1610 000000 0 855100 0 000000 0 000000 372 000000 1225 323 000000 347 500000 1225 1715 000000 0 852800 0 000000 0 000000 324 000000 1225 373 000000 348 500000 1225 1715 000000 0 847400 0 000000 0 000000 292 000000 1225 245 000000 268 500000 1225 1645 000000 0 859600 0 000000 0 000000 280 000000 1225 326 000000 303 000000 1225 1610 000000 0 839900 0 000000 0 000000 276 000000 1225 234 000000 255 000000 1225 1470 000000 0 852200 0 000000 0 000000 112 000000 1225 157 000000 134 500000 1225 1575 000000 0 859700 0 000000 0 000000 cjol alojafalu m 236 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Trace Kills File Trace Kills File Column Load Field file Channel Length x Source loc x Source line x Receiver loc Receiver line CMP loc CMP line Offset User Def 1 Use
153. T Of Output es i Linear moveout velocity 7000 0 Deconvolved traces C Deconvolution operators cancel Parameter Description Type of Operator Select type of deconvolution to perform Spiking or Predictive Spiking Weiner Levinson spiking deconvolution Predictive Weiner Levinson predictive or gapped deconvolution Prediction length ms Enter the prediction length in milliseconds Use horizon input for prediction If checked allows the input of times e g water bottom from a Horizon card data file to establish the prediction distance on a record by record basis Horizon number to track Enter the horizon number in the Horizon card data file that will by used to establish the prediction distance Type of Output By default the Devonvolution step outputs deconvolved traces However the option exists to output the computed deconvolution operators for subsequent use with the Apply Deconvolution Operators step Deconvolved traces Output deconvolved traces Deconvolution operators Output deconvolution operators Pre whitening percent Enter the amount of white noise to add The zero lag of the autocorrelation function is increased by this amount to induce stability in the matrix solution 682 Inverse filter length ms Enter the length of the inverse filter to be calculated and applied in milliseconds Number of operators per trace Enter the number of separate deconvolution
154. Tool by clicking on it click once on the point of origin then click once on the destination and the arrow will appear Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Spectral Decomposition Help y seg001 Geometry 4 seg002 Bin Sort g seg004 Brute Stack Am plitude Adjustment Card Data A P Card Data R Z Display Editing Filtering Geomet tpd cvs pics aid Migration Multi component Mutes Quality Analysis Seismic Data i Spectral Attributes mute pics ise eo Spectral Decomposition Stacking Summing CD Statics E le lJla le Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 634 Y 645 Example Processing Flow in the Main FlowChart Window 59 Setting Processing Step and Data Step Parameters To set the parameters for a processing step double left click on the step itself This will display the dialog for setting the processing step parameters Each dialog contains the parameters specific to that step These parameters are set using numeric data entry fields radio button controls check boxes and drop down list boxes Z Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 FlowChart Processing g Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Spectral Decomposition Help W 529001 Geometry fa a Amplitude Adjustment cara Data A
155. a MOP at tai Error Bookmark not defined DA A he E A EE a E Error Bookmark not defined DEVIN a 309 Design Vibroseis Sweep idad Error Bookmark not defined Despike ssia nerne tata le a a Sos ce haem aca a Error Bookmark not defined Duplicate Trace e Nalda Error Bookmark not defined EA Li is 324 Kill Tras a 257 E A A ar uaceetaens 239 A Satta tay Sashes a a a ates Sel Sd E et atl stata ae 261 Reverse TAGES A aa lu dade seats nd i 265 Trace Header Cll Mathis ressis i lcanenstaceadae oataananeg abe adelante 266 Trace Header Column Mathias as 270 Trace Header Lon adios 273 Trace Header Res EQUINA ii A Ss 277 Trace Math rem aneen tae aed cage Batis rare A a nagc 279 Vibros is Correlation A 281 Filtern UCP Seach cise ann a a a oh E a E a a eo 284 Adaptive Pllter os idas 285 Adaptive Radon Demultiple da di 288 Apply Coed O eRe ee OR Te Re eee Ee PTE ER Unc Peer ne Pe PEE Pen oO ee 292 Apply F K A bigs aieia a oa rraian awe iea 295 Apply Frequency Fiter ai 299 Apply Time Filtet viii di 301 Butterworth Filtering AAA A 303 Coherence Filtro les ia ao N ca 305 CONO A AAA A Gan ea AA 307 Design Frequency Filter aldo Error Bookmark not defined D sign Notch Pl css n a ae Error Bookmark not defined Design Time Filter eee oon aR ear Ree Ronee ae a ee err Error Bookmark not defined Diffusion PM ni 309 Dip Pl A ao 313 F K Spectrum eere A a e teat ogee Neen 316 F X DECI e 318 E XY D conyolution ai 320 Horizontal Median Ple ia 322
156. a least squares linear fit will be removed from the final statics solution 636 Trim Statics Usage Trim Statics calculates small CMP statics shifts for the data based on alignment of events within the specified window You specify the start time and the length of the analysis window for calculation and the maximum allowed static shift The step finds the static shift within these limits using automatic picking of the peak of the cross correlation amplitude between the trace and the stacked trace for the gather Input Links 1 Seismic data in CMP sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in CMP sort order mandatory 2 Trace Statics optional Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo PRA input spw gt gt Trim Statics Trace Statics output spw 179 181 637 Step Parameter Dialog Trim Statics Trim Statics Window start time ms 500 Window length ms f 00 14 Max static shift ms V Use auxiliary stack trace as pilot Aux SPW seismic file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description Window start time ms Enter the window start time in milliseconds for trim statics analysis Window length ms Enter the length of the window in milliseconds for trim statics analysis Max static shift ms Enter the largest allowable static shift in milliseconds for trim statics analysis Use auxiliary stack trace as pilot If checked an auxiliary sta
157. a time of 0 ms corresponds to the first break pick time Window length ms The length of the analysis window The analysis window will extend from window _center window length 2 to window _center window _length 2 If a First Break Pick Time card is linked to the step these values will be with respect to the first break time Offset limits Limit offsets for mean rotation If checked the rotation angle used to rotate receiver will be the mean value for that receiver determined from the analysis of all data within a specified offset range Source receiver azimuth for each of the traces used in the analysis is taken into account Minimum offset The minimum absolute offset used to determine the rotation angle Maximum offset The maximum absolute offset used to determine the rotation angle 471 Rotation angle Compute from covariance If checked a covariance analysis will be performed to determine the principal axes defined by the horizontal components The azimuth of the principal axis will be output to the rotation card file Constant If checked the constant user specified rotation angle will be applied Scan for maximum power If checked the two horizontal components will be rotated through the user specified range of angles The angle that results in maximum power will be output to the Rotation card file Alignment angle from N S If the Compute rotation angle option is not checked and the o
158. abbed worksheet Use the File Browse to select your SPS file and the spreadsheet will open displaying the contents If it is not correct or nothing is displayed then you should use the Analyze Format button at the bottom of the display to define how these data are read SPS Source Record Sour te name Spreadsheet Map Static correction SPS Source Record Spreadsheet Tab 97 The SPS Analyzer allows you to specify how the data will be read and decoded from this sps file When the format is correctly defined be sure to Save Source Record identification Start Co End Co Record identification 1 1 Read lines with source record 1D S Start Col End Col Load Minimum Maximum End Col Load Minimum Maximum Source line 2 17 2 amp 6 _ Source static Source location 18 A 6 Source depth Source index 26 i i Source datum Source code 27 x j Source uphole Source easting 47 iS Mi 788339 9 809248 6 Water depth Source northing 56 939328 3 976916 1 Recording date lx Source elevation 66 2 la e 4934 3 5405 7 Recording time X 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 6007 6135 788557 50968125 5005032 8 6006 6136 788339 90968428 3005034 7 6007 6137 788507 30968604 0
159. ace header positions and these are saved in XML file format There are several prebuilt SEG Y format definition files which are delivered with SPW 3 You can create new format definitions by modifying these using the Create format file command in the SEG Y Analyzer or using the Create New SEG Y Format command in the SEG Y Import dialog r del ION gt Computer Local Disk C Development gt pgc 4 SegyFormats d t Search SegyFormats p File Edit View Tools Help Organize v Include in library y Share with v New folder qm A Name i Date modified Type Size HE Desktop 2 SEGY Standard xml 1 24 2010 12 38 PM XML Document 3 KB Downloads E SEGY Variantxml 9 13 2009 3 37 PM XML Document 3 KB E Recent Places BZ Desktop Libraries B Dan a Computer 3 Floppy Disk Dri fie Local Disk C 8 CD Drive D GP Shared Folders Su Network E vmware host jm WIN7 g Control Panel amp Recycle Bin J Biz Le cellphotos J DvD J Hiking Trip P Misc Farm Stuff bh 2 items SegyFormats Directory 21 Format name SEGY Standard Format description the standard Add to format list _ Set as default format Endian order Get from data D Big endian Little endian Text header Header size in bytes 3200 Text format e EBCDIC Binary header Header size in bytes 400 Startbyte Datatype Override Value Samples inter
160. adaptive filter bottom to top filters often give better results Top to bottom This selection applies the filter from the top of the trace to the bottom If selected the filter will be applied starting from the top left corner of your data and continuing downward When the end of this column of your data is reached the filter shifts to the right by the specified number of traces i e filter width and starts down the next column of your data from the top Bottom to top This selection applies the filter from the bottom of the trace to the top If selected the filter will be applied starting from the bottom left corner of your data and continue upward When the end of this column of your data is reached the filter shifts to the right by the specified number of traces i e filter width and starts up the next column of your data from the bottom 348 Swell Removal Usage The Swell Removal step allows you to remove short period static shifts caused by the ocean swell The statics are picked using correlation over the trace and then smoothed using a multi trace smoother Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi input spw E Swell Removal Mia output spw jp SELECT 207 24 349 Step Parameter Dialog Swell Removal Swell Removal Traces in window 111 Cancel Paramete
161. al Attributes Spectral Decomposition Stacking Sum ming U Statics Trace Attributes v Velocities y e 2 e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 886 Y 440 Once selected you can remove an item or a link by either clicking on the Delete Tool on Selecting Items and Links the tool bar or by pressing the delete key on the keyboard On many Windows keyboards 32 the backspace key is defined as the Delete If your Delete key does not work then try the Backspace key instead Note all selected items will be deleted Linking Tool The Linking Tool which is the second item in the Tool Bar allows you to define the data flow between items on the flowchart When selected the Linking Tool button will appear depressed Gey Link Tool You may switch between the Selection and Linking tools by either clicking on the icons on the Tool Bar or by pressing the Tab key on the keyboard Delete Tool The Delete Tool removes selected items from the flowchart Once selected you can remove an item or a link by either clicking on the Delete Tool on the tool bar or by pressing the delete key on the keyboard Delete Tool On many Windows keyboards the backspace key is defined as the delete key If your delete key does not work then try the backspace key instead Note all selected items will be deleted Select All Tool The Sele
162. ameter Dialog E Cross Correlation Cross Correlation Second seismic file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description Second seismic file name Use the Browse button to select the seismic file that will be cross correlated with the input reference seismic file 493 Extract Dead Traces Usage The Extract Dead Traces step removes traces with a dead trace flag from the data stream prior to output Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo BAX asi Input spw bl Extract Dead Traces ds Output spw ran gt SELECT 287 25 494 Step Parameter Dialog Extract Dead Traces Extract Dead Traces Parameter Description There are no parameters for the Extract Dead Traces step 495 F T Cube Usage The Frequency Time Cube step converts a 2D seismic line into 3D F T volume whose axis are CMP Location Frequency and Time Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 F T Cube mandatory Reference Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Input Seismic File spw E PRA Output F T Cube spw Status Open 351 159 496 Step Parameter Dialog E F T Cube Output F T Cube Output Start time for analysis ms 0 00 End time for analysis ms 3000 00 Start frequency for analysi
163. ameter Dialog Apply PP Nonhyperbolic Moveout Apply PP Nonhyperbolic Moveout Mute Control Correction velocity 1500 0 Apply stretch mute Interpolation Type Selection Percentage 30 Linear Quadratic Taper length samples 15 Scale input velocities by 1 000 Do inverse moveout Input PP velocity file Browse Cancel Parameter Description Correction velocity Enter the short spread P wave NMO velocity This constant velocity will be used if a P wave stacking velocity function is NOT selected with the Browse button Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not usually exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to be evenly sampled at the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Mute Control Set the parameters for the stretch mute definition Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting removes the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction Percentage Enter the p
164. andpass filter in Hertz High pass Enter the high pass frequency of the bandpass filter in Hertz High cut Enter the high cut frequency of the bandpass filter in Hertz Start time ms Enter the start time in milliseconds to start the application of each filter 352 Time Variant Butterworth Usage The Time Variant Butterworth step allows you to apply up to five 5 different time variant Butterworth filters to your trace data You specify the low pass high pass and low and high rolloff rates in decibels dB for each filter as well as the starting time for application of the filter You also specify the filter taper length which controls the smoothness of the transition between adjacent filters Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw E Time Variant Butterworth Mi output spw SELECT 197 21 353 Step Parameter Dialog Time Variant Butterworth Time Yariant Butterworth Number of filters to use 4 Filter taper length samples 50 Lo pass Hi pass Lo rolloff Hi rolloff Start time Hz Hz dB oct dB oct ms 10 0 100 0 18 0 18 0 0 000 10 0 70 0 18 0 18 0 1000 000 E 18 0 2000 000 18 0 3000 000 000 000 Parameter Description Number of filters to use Enter the number of filters to apply Filter taper length Enter the length of the
165. ap output Output file name C Teapot Dome Survey SourceAmplitude baf OK Help Cancel Real Time Attribute Map Display Dialog 107 FTP Connection Select Project Create Project Edit Current Project Set Startup Project Set Working Directory Close Currrent Tab Analyze SEGY File Analyze SEGD File Analyze SPS File Analyze Position File gt Analyze Horizon File Copy SEGD Files Merge SEGY Files FTP Preferences Exit Open the FTP Client 108 User login Password E Oe Connect to an FIP server Upload File Queue Ftp Server a lt no items gt Local Source Target Specify directory for upload download 0 Specify input file for upload Browse C Users Dan Documents spw warning mp3 FTP Client Window Using the SPW ftp client either complete directories or single files may be sent to a ftp server Simply open a connection to the ftp server and then select the directory or the files to transfer 109 Sending Reports via FTP in Real Time Several reports on record and trace kills may be sent automatically to a ftp server during the execution of a flow This feature allows experienced personnel in the office to assist in evaluating noisy or problem data by being able to review the same information available to the field personnel To enable this option the ftp connection must be initiated using the ftp client from the Flowchart menu After th
166. aptive filter removes the non predictable part of the data using the assumption that the signal portion of the data is predictable and the noise portion of the data is inherently random and therefore non predictable You specify the length of the filter window in samples the width of the filter window in traces and the filter adaptation percent You may choose to apply the filter a bottom up i e bottom to top direction or a top down i e top to bottom direction Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Hornbostel S 1991 Spatial prediction filtering in the t x and f x domain Geophysics v 56 no 12 p 2019 2026 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo We input spw Spatial Noise Filter output spw SELECT 347 Step Parameter Dialog Spatial Noise Filter Spatial Noise Filter Filter length samples ar Filter width traces 5 Filter adaptation 30 Filter Direction Top to bottom Bottom to top Cancel Parameter Description Filter length in samples Enter the length of the filter in number of time samples Filter width in traces Enter the width of the filter in number of traces Filter adaptation percent Enter the percent adaptation of the filter Use a smaller percent if filter blows up data Filter Direction Select the direction to apply the filter Since this is an
167. aptive filtering technique Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart Z Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 gt o e Ja FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Documentation EJ Dataset Math Kill Traces Phase Rotation Remove DC Bias Remove Reverberation wa Reverse Traces 4 gt S N Based Record Edits wa 08 e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Slonik Current flow Documentation X 736 Y 252 263 Step Parameter Dialog Minimum delay time 100 0 Minimum offset 0 00 Maximum offset 1000 00 niii amet Parameter Description Minimum delay time Enter the minimum delay time to use in searching for the reverberation Minimum offset Enter the minimum offset to use in searching for the reverberation Maximum offset Enter the maximum offset to use in searching for the reverberation 264 Reverse Traces Usage The Reverse Traces step allows you to invert the polarity of traces according specified trace header values and ranges Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart S Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 tojta FlowChart
168. ar or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to even sampling at the correct interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data 673 Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Selects the use of relative amplitude scaled traces in the analysis Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Mute Control Set the stretch mute control parameters Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting restricts the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction prior to one second Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute tape length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone
169. ar value decomposition Geophysics 56 528 533 Example Flowchart RE documentation flo E EA 3C Receiver Gathers spw Od E E 3C Receiver Gathers spw Wavefield Separation Wavefield Separation we 3C P wave Data spw 3C S wave Data spw Status Open 473 Step Parameter Dialog Wavefield Separation Wavefield Separation Reference window length ms 50 00 Analysis window length ms 100 00 Directional operator power 1 00 Output wavefield P wave C S wave vV Include linearity Parameter Description Reference window length ms Length of reference time window Analysis window length ms Length of the covariance analysis window Directional operator power Weighting coefficients are raised to the directional operator power Output Wavefield Select whether the P wave or the S wave wavefield will be output P wave Outputs the P wave wavefield S wave Outputs the S wave wavefield Include linearity If checked the linearity attribute is used to weight the input wavefield to generate the output wavefield 474 Mutes This section documents the processing steps available in the Mutes category The types of mutes currently available are Apply Early Mute Apply Surgical Mute Apply Tail Mute 475 Apply Early Mute Usage The Apply Early Mute step allows you to apply mute definitions in the Early Mute card to your data You may choose to int
170. art column and the number of columns allocated to write the shot line associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file Shot Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the shot location associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file 151 Receiver Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file Receiver Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file CMP Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the cmp line associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file CMP Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the cmp location associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file CMP Easting Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the cmp easting associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file CMP Northing Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the cmp northing associated with a given coordinate pair in the crooked line bin definition file CMP Elevation
171. art column and the number of columns allocated to write the uphole time ms at a source station associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Water depth Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the water depth at a source station associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Date Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the Julian day on which the source station was occupied in the Source SPS file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the SPS source file 219 Source Statics Usage The Source Statics card data item is used to store source statics information in units of milliseconds Step Parameter Dialog Source Statics Card File Source Statics Card File Enter the source statics card data file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data Sheet 1 of 1 Location 129 000000 4 573552 131 000000 2 207910 iav o00000fosiza64 CTI 220 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Source Statics Customize Source Statics Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets io Sheet header field Start column Length Source line number Ss Number of rows ES Data header field Start column Length Location number fs Time fs Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80
172. at contains list bad records and optionally a list of traces that were killed in the geometry application step Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links None A text file for the trace report is specified inside the step dialog Example Flowchart EY Documentation flo BAX ii Input spw Trace Analysis Report lt gt SELECT 100 7 521 Step Parameter Dialog Trace Analysis Trace Analysis Report bad records based on adjacent dead traces Dead traces limit 2 Report bad records based on max dead traces per record Maximum percent 2 00 Do not report Geometry kills Output report file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description Report bad records based on adjacent dead traces Check this option if bad records are to be identified according to the number of adjacent dead traces Dead traces limit Enter the number of adjacent dead traces that will cause the record the be considered bad and therefore listed in the trace analysis report Report bad records based on max dead traces per record Check this option if bad records are to be identified according to the number of adjacent dead traces Maximum percent Enter the maximum percentage of dead traces that will cause the record the be considered bad and therefore listed in the trace analysis report Do not report Geometry Kills Check this option if you
173. ated with the trace kill User Def 1 Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the value stored in the User Def 1 trace header field of the trace kill In the case of a trace kill output by the Automatic Trace Edits step this value will correspond to the calculated trace semblance User Def 2 Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the value stored in the User Def 2 trace header field of the trace kill In the case of a trace kill output by the Automatic Trace Edits step this value will correspond to the calculated power ratio decay User Def 3 Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the value stored in the User Def 3 trace header field of the trace kill This value is currently undefined and may contain optional information defined by the user Record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the trace kills file 238 Trace Reversals Usage The Trace Reversals card data item is used to store the trace header values of traces whose polarity will be reversed with the Reverse Traces step Step Parameter Dialog Trace Reverse Card File Trace Reverse Card File Enter the trace reverse card data file name Customize Browse Cancel Cell Math Channel Shot Location Shot Line Rx Location CMP Location CMP Line User Def 1 User Def 2 User Def 3 104 000000 101 112 000000 108 000000 101 S 110 000000 101
174. ation 393 Simple Marine Geometry Usage The Simple Marine Geometry step assigns geometry information to the seismic trace headers based on a survey information contained in the Streamer Definition card data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Streamer Definition card data mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE derivative flo Mi Seismic Field Files spw gt aa Simple Marine Geometry Streamer Definition Seismic File 394 Step Parameter Dialog Simple Marine Geometry Simple Marine Geometry Offset from source to near phone ft or m Increment between phones ft or m Channel number of near hydrophone Channel number increment Number of live channels Receiver location increment Cancel Parameter Description Offset from source to near phone ft or m Enter the nominal interval between source and the first receiver in distance units Increment between phones ft or m Enter the nominal interval between phones in distance units Channel number of near hydrophone Enter the channel number assigned in the trace headers to the closest hydrophone on the cable Channel number increment Enter the increment between channels Number of live channels Enter the number of live channels recorded per shot point Receiver location increment Enter the increment between receiver locations 395 Si
175. ation flo Log a si vi Build Super Gathers Super Gather Velocity Analysis ci Velocity Analysis spw lt gt Status Open 261 55 362 Step Parameter Dialog Parameter Description First CMP Line center of bin First line to output binned gathers Build Super Gathers Build Super Gathers First CMP Line center of bin 100 Last CMP Line 450 CMP Line Increment 50 CMP Lines to combine First CMP Location center of bin 1 Last CMP Location CMP Location Increment CMP Locations to combine Maximum output traces gather C Range limit output C spw CMP Gathers spw Browse Last CMP Line Last line to output binned gathers CMP Line Increment Line increment for outputting binned gathers CMP Lines to combine Number of lines to combine in a bin First CMP Location center of bin First location to output binned gathers Last CMP Location Last location to output binned gathers CMP Location Increment Location increment for outputting binned gathers CMP Location to combine Number of locatios to combine in a bin Maximum output traces per gather Maximum fold of the binned gathers Range limit output Check this box if you wish to limit the offset range of the output binned gathers Minimum offset enter minimum offset of the range limited supergathers Maximum offset enter maximum offset of the range
176. ation Parameter Dialog Cross Reference SPS File Cross Reference SPS Format File Column Load Length Tape Field file Field file incr lt lt xI TTT 155555 id i dd ad Source line xI Source loc First channel xI Last channel xI Channel incr xI Receiver line lt First receiver xI Last receiver xl Receiver incr r Record in the file in bytes i gt Parameter descriptions Load If checked indicates the existence of the entity in the file Tape Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the tape number disk or physical associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Field file Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the field file number associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Field file incr Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the increment between field files in the Cross Reference SPS file Source line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source line number associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Source location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location number associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file 179 First channel Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write t
177. attenuate random noise This time variant adaptive filter removes the non predictable part of the data using the assumption that the signal portion of the data is predictable and the noise portion of the data is inherently random and therefore non predictable You specify the length of the filter window in samples the width of the filter window in traces and the filter adaptation percent Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Hornbostel S 1991 Spatial prediction filtering in the t x and f x domain Geophysics v 56 no 12 p 2019 2026 Example Flowchart RE FXDocumentation flo Mi Input spw E3 F X Deconvolution Mi Output spw Status Open 349 279 318 Step Parameter Dialog FX Deconvolution F X Deconvolution Filter length samples Filter width traces Filter adaptation 2 Parameter Description Filter length in samples Enter the length of the filter in number of time samples Filter width in traces Enter the width of the filter in number of traces Filter adaptation percent Enter the percent adaptation of the filter Use a smaller percent if filter destroys signal 319 F XY Deconvolution Usage The FXY Deconvolution step is a 3D multi channel noise filter designed to attenuate random noise This time variant adaptive filter removes the non predictable part of the data u
178. atting of the value indicating the source line number in the output source statics file Start column Enter the column number to start writing the source line number in the output source statics file Length Enter the number of columns reserved for writing the source line number in the output source statics file Number of rows Allows you to describe the formatting of the value indicating the number of source locations in the output source statics file Start column Enter the column number to start writing the number of source locations in the output source statics file Length Enter the number of columns reserved for writing the number of source locations in the output source statics file Data header field In the case of source statics these header fields represents the source location number and the corresponding source static Location number Allows you to describe the formatting of the value corresponding to the source location number in the output source statics file Start column Enter the column number to start writing the source location number in the output data file Length Enter the number of columns reserved for writing the source location number in the output source statics file Time Allows you to describe the formatting of the value corresponding to the source location static in the output source statics file Start column Enter the column number to start writing the sourc
179. ature trace for all traces in the record in the signature deconvolution calculation One signature per trace from an auxiliary data file This option inputs one signature trace from an auxiliary input data set per data trace and uses that trace as the signature trace for the corresponding data trace in the signature deconvolution calculation One signature per record in the data file This option uses one trace from each data record and uses that trace as the signature trace for all seismic traces in the record in the signature deconvolution calculation Signature trace number Enter the trace number to use as the signature trace First trace to kill If you demultiplexed the data set with the auxiliary traces to recover the signature trace you may wish to kill the these auxiliary traces Enter the first trace number to kill Last trace to kill If you demultiplexed the data set with the auxiliary traces to recover the signature trace you may wish to kill the these auxiliary traces Enter the last trace number to kill Browse Select this button to set the input auxiliary file containing the signatures 698 Spectral Whitening Usage The Spectral Whitening step is a multi banded spectral whitening method for balancing the energy of the selected frequency bands of your data You specify the beginning and ending frequencies in the pass zone the number of bands within this zone and the length of the AGC operator The indi
180. ber of columns allocated to write the gain in dB associated with a given two way travel time in the output gain file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the output frequency filter file 169 Horizon File Usage The Horizon File card data item is used to store horizon time picks Horizon event picking may be performed interactively in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog Horizon Picks File Horizon Picks File Enter the horizon picks card data file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data R horizon picks Horizonno3 Name Trace Index 275 000000 609 983521 Amplitude 278 211365 Other Info 0 000000 330 000000 573 084229 141 057816 0 000000 542 683105 507 907684 1429 831665 91 551613 0 000000 0 000000 120 000000 440 000000 120 500000 495 000000 460 252747 445 327362 1057 070068 657 158875 0 000000 0 000000 605 000000 406 290192 351 195801 0 000000 660 000000 715 000000 367 395081 365 712189 8047 866211 3185 088135 0 000000 0 000000 770 000000 363 710236 14670 916016 0 000000 825 000000 363 216705 2205 542969 0 000000 scales 170 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Horizon Time Picks Customize Horizon Pick File Format No of com
181. ber of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length No of gain locations sheets Sheet header field Start column Length Line number Location number Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Time Gain in dB 1 Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field No of gain locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of gain locations in the output gain file Sheet Header field Line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the line number associated with a gain location in the output gain file Location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the location number associated with a gain location in the output gain file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of gain locations per line in the output gain file 168 Data header field Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the two way time in milliseconds associated with a given gain value in the output gain file Gain in dB Enter the start column and the num
182. c shift required to match one data set to another the Phase Matching Statistics card stores the CMP Line number CMP Location number CMP Easting and CMP Northing for each pair of traces for which a phase matching analysis was performed The phase rotation is stored in User Def 1 and the static shift is stored in User Def 2 The Phase Matching step contains an option to output the correlation coefficient between the two data sets after the auxiliary data has been rotated and shifted The correlation coefficient is stored in User Def 3 Step Parameter Dialog Phase Matching Statistics Card File ES Phase Matching Statistics Card File Enter the phase matching statistics file name C Program Files pgc 211 Phase Matching Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data R Phase Matching Statistics Cell Math CMP Easting CMP Northing User Def 1 User Def 2 User Def 3 100400 000000 100100 000000 30 000000 16 000000 1 000000 100375 000000 100125 000000 30 000000 0 1 000000 100350 000000 100150 000000 30 000000 1 000000 100325 000000 100175 000000 30 000000 0 1 000000 100300 000000 100200 000000 30 000000 100275 000000 100225 000000 30 000000 16 000000 1 000000 100225 000000 100275 000000 30 000000 P16 1 000000 100200 000000 100300 000000 30 000000 4 ji 100175 000000 100325 000000 30 000000 16 001 100150 000000 100350 000000 30 000000 1 000000 100250 000000 100250 000000
183. cation Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number associated with a given record in the profile geometry file CMP Location increment Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the increment between CMP location numbers associated with a given record in the profile geometry file 192 Origin Easting Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the easting of the coordinate pair associated with the survey origin for the given record in the profile geometry file Origin Northing Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the northing of the coordinate pair associated with the survey origin for the given record in the profile geometry file Azimuth in degrees Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source origin azimuth associated with a given record in the profile geometry file Offset increment Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset increment associated with a given record in the profile geometry file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the profile geometry file 193 Receiver Gains Usage The Receiver Gains card data item is used to store surface consistent gains associated with receiver locations Step Parameter Dialog Receiver Gains
184. ce value is not correct Enter the correct value Apply header scale factors If checked the scale factors written to the trace header will be applied to the output data file Extract field file number from disk file name If checked the field file number in the output data file will be extracted from the field file name File extensions will be dropped Input all file of this type in the directory If checked all additional files of the type selected will be reformatted Otherwise only the file selected will be reformatted 332 SEG Y File Usage The SEGY File step allows for direct input of SEG Y formatted data from a disk file Input Links None The SEG Y disk file is selected in the SEGY File dialog by means of a Browse button Output Links 1 Seismic data file mandatory Example Flowchart RE SEG Y Diskfile Input flo SEGY File Mi SPW formatted output spw Status Open 109 3 553 Step Parameter Dialog SEG Y File SEGY File Seismic File Browse C Data Example Data Example sgy Override Number of records 38 T Yes Traces per record 48 l Yes Sample interval ms 4 0000 T Yes Samples pertrace 300 T Yes Note input SEG Y data must have a fixed number of traces per record If not the output will need to be sorted Format File Browse CASPVAdil tusegy tfm Parameter Description Seismic File Select the SEG Y disk file and set the input parameters
185. ceiver k Field File Number 14 363 El fa 3600 na 2 2035 0000 1044 0000 2036 0000 6023 6173 0000 238 Channel Number 1 998 2 12036 14 3 2037 0000 1044 0000 2037 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 2019 2205 3 20872 14 4 2038 0000 1044 0000 2038 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 co Ez 4 28908 14 5 2039 0000 1044 0000 2039 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Grossine 2019 2205 a f f f 5 37348 14 6 2040 0000 1044 0000 2040 0000 6023 6173 0000 238 Azimuth 6 45780 14 7 2041 0000 1044 0000 2041 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Offset 19068 3 19115 8 wp Easting 760306 75 EA 7 sazi6 1 8 2042 0000 1044 0000 2042 0000 6023 6173 0000 jas CMP Northing 939269 06 976889 50 8 62652 14 9 2043 0000 1044 0000 2043 0000 6023 6173 0000 238 CMP Elevation 4932 75 5531 20 9 71088 1 10 2044 0000 1044 0000 2044 0000 6023 6173 0000 238 LEDS Ea 10 79524 14 u 2045 0000 1044 0000 2045 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Source Location 6002 6174 11 87960 14 2 2046 0000 1044 0000 2046 0000 6023 6173 0000 238 Source Easting 788339 88 809248 62 t 12 96396 14 B 2047 0000 1044 0000 2047 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Source Northing 939328 31 976916 12 Em Copie PEE 13 104832 ju 1 2048 0000 1044 0000 2048 0000 6023 6173 0000 238 Sasa pianlo 0 00 14 113268 u 15 2049 0000 1044 0000 2049 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Source Depth 0 00 0 00 15 121704 na 16 2050 0000 1044 0000 2050 0000 6023 6173 0000 238 Source UHT 0 gt 16 130140 14 17 2051 0000 1044 0000 2051 0000 6023 6173 0000 21
186. ck file may be selected and the stack traces in that file will serve as the trim static pilot traces Aux SPW seismic file name Use the Browse button to select the auxiliary stack file 638 Velocities This section documents the processing steps available in the Velocity Steps category Processing steps currently available are 2 Velocities ex Apply Linear Moveout Apply PP Nonhyperbolic Moveout Calculate 3D Residual NMO Constant Velocity Stacks Create SEP Velocity File Deltat Stacks Dix s Equation PP Constant Eta Stacks Super Gather Velocity Analysis Velocity Cube Velocity Semblance Velocity Smoothing 639 Apply Linear Moveout Usage The Apply Linear Moveout step allows you to apply a linear moveout function in either the forward or inverse direction You specify the moveout velocity You may also apply a constant static shift to your data The moveout correction may be applied in a coarse or fine grained application mode A coarse grained static shift is applied to the nearest sample Fine grained static shifts are applied in the frequency domain by phase shifting your data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Apply Linear Moveout PRA output spw 254 401 640 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Linear Moveout Apply Linear Moveout Co
187. ck time migration This migration scheme can accommodate a vertically varying velocity field in the form of one SPW velocity function card This velocity field is assumed to be the stacking velocity field derived from velocity analysis of the pre stack data The user designates a Stolt stretch factor a maximum frequency to migrate and temporal and spatial tapers An option allows the input velocity function to be scaled Finally you can override the SPW calculated trace spacing and specify the true trace spacing of your data in your spatial units of choice By default SPW calculates the trace spacing for the stack as the group interval as you defined it in the geometry definition divided by two 2 Input Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory and sampled in time Reference Stolt R H 1978 Migration by Fourier transform Geophysics v 43 no 1 p 23 48 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Unmigrated Stack spw Unmigrated Stack spw SS TT Stolt Migration Stolt Migration PA PA Migrated Stack spw Migrated Stack spw Status Open 769 253 435 Step Parameter Dialog W Stolt Migration Stolt Migration Constant velocity 2500 00 Stretch factor 0 000 Scale input velocities by 1 000 Maximum Frequency to migrate Hz 90 Trace taper length traces 0 0 Time taper length sampl
188. column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location associated with the trace kill 240 Receiver line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line associated with the trace kill CMP loc Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location associated with the trace kill CMP line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line associated with the trace kill Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset associated with the trace kill User Def 1 Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the value stored in the User Def 1 trace header field of the trace kill In the case of a trace kill output by the Automatic Trace Edits step this value will correspond to the calculated trace semblance User Def 2 Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the value stored in the User Def 2 trace header field of the trace kill In the case of a trace kill output by the Automatic Trace Edits step this value will correspond to the calculated power ratio decay User Def 3 Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the value stored in the User Def 3 trace header field of the trace kill This value is currently undefined and may contain optional information defined by the
189. corders has been incorporated and simplified Real time displays of seismic data attribute maps and survey information are some of the new capabilities 103 Real Time Processing Real time processing starts with the input from the seismic recorder SPW currently supports ARAM SEGY format Sercel SEGD format Hydroscience SEGD format Standard SEGD format and SEG2 format Other formats and recording instrument specifications will be added as needed in the future The implementations of these formats read in all of the extended headers and if the geometry information is present in the headers it is always input i zl Real Time Seismic Input Input Source Specify input directory Specify starting input file Input directory Data format Sercel SEGD x Remove auxiliary traces loe conca Real Time Seismic Input Dialog 104 zj Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Spectral Decomposition Help RealTimeQC a Processing Categories Frequency Cubes Frequency Gathers Frequency Maps Real Time Input Resample Seismic SEGD Import SEGY Export ESE Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Biofeld X 691 Y 327 A Simple Real Time Processing Flowchart 105 Real Time Seismic Displays Display increment Record increment between displays 1
190. cs cards mandatory 3 CMP Statics cards optional in the case of correction to a Floating Datum Example Flowcharts RE Documentation flo Input Seismic Data spw Input Seismic Data spw Floating Datum Statics Floating El Statics TE A 0 H H A H Receiver Statics Source Statics Receiver Statics Source Statics lt Status Open 617 Step Parameter Dialog Floating Datum Statics Floating Datum Statics Floating Datum Definition Use average CMP elevation C Use median CMP elevation C Use offset weighted CMP elevation a a Consolidated velocity 2000 0 Flat datum elevation 0 00 l Output only flat datum statics Include uphole statics Parameter Description Floating Datum Definition defines the type of function to use for defining the floating datum Average This selects an average operator Median This selects a median smoothing operator Offset weighted CMP Elevation If selected a weighted CMP elevation function of the form weight multiplier offset exponent will be used to define the datum Multiplier Enter the multiplier of the weighting function Exponent Enter the exponent of the weighting function Consolidated velocity Enter the consolidated or replacement velocity Flat datum elevation Enter the elevation of the flat datum to use Output only flat datum statics If checked only the flat datum statics will be output Source an
191. ct All Tool selects all items on the flowchart Select All When using the Select All Tool all items will be selected and highlighted the links will become bright green and the flow items will be enclosed by a dark black box and shown in light blue the auxiliary data items will also be enclosed by dark black box 33 Undo Tool The Undo Tool will undo the previous command issued Not yet implemented pa Undo Use this tool when you have previously performed some function with another tool you wish to reverse Redo Tool The Redo Tool will redo a command previously undone Not yet implemented E Redo Use this tool when you have previously undone a function performed by another tool you wish to retain 34 Processing Categories The Processing Categories on the right side of the flowchart window highlighted by the red rectangle contains the categories of processing steps available in SPW a Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 N oJ O 233 FlowChart Processing Seismic Analysis Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Help Wi Geometry EJ Amplitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P npr3 sps Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing seometry Definition npr3 rps Filtering Geometry Migration npr3 xps Multi component Mutes Amplitude Analysis Quality Analysis Seismic Data SpectralAttributes Spectral Decomposition Stacking Summing Statics Trace Attr
192. ction Hanning A Hanning taper is specified by the equation x n 0 5 0 5 cos 2 pi n N Hamming A Hamming taper is specified by the equation x n 0 54 0 46 cos 2 pi n N Blackman A Blackman taper is specified by the equation x n 0 42 0 5 cos 2 pi n N 0 08 cos 4 pi n N No taper No taper will be applied to the mute This may result in problems in later processing steps due to Gibbs effect Mute taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Trace Amplitude Definition Select the trace amplitude type to use True or Relative Use relative amplitude traces Selects the use of relative amplitude scaled traces in the analysis Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record 293 Mute Interpolation Control Set the interpolation mode for each of the F K mutes Note Turning off the interpolation will filter only the records associated with the picked F K mutes Only one filter is currently available in the current release of SPW Filter 1 If checked the first filter will be interpolated between picked control points Filter 2 If checked the first filter will be interpolated between picked contr
193. ctively gains seismic data on a trace to trace basis using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Window length interactively adjusts the length of the seismic display window using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Trace excursion interactively adjusts how far the seismic data extends on a trace to trace basis using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Primary Anno interactively changes the horizontal annotation of the seismic data according to the primary sort key display using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Secondary Anno interactively changes the horizontal annotation of the seismic data according to the secondary sort key display using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Vertical Anno interactively changes the vertical annotation of the seismic data display using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Major Time Lines interactively adjusts how frequently the major bold timing lines annotate the seismic data display using up and down arrows or numerical data entry Minor Time Lines interactively adjusts how frequently the minor fine timing lines annotate the seismic data display using up and down arrows or numerical data entry 65 Center of the Seismic Display Control Panel 4 150 lb Center of the Seismic Display Control Panel Select Sort Key Number 4 14 gt Select Sort Key Number The feature at the top of the center o
194. ctory more about projects later default SEGY format definition files and a mp3 file that is played as a warning in several processing steps inside SPW3 When Flowchart exe is executed any of these files and directories that do not already exist in the users home documents directory will be automatically copied to the users home documents directory 18 O a Local Disk C Users Dan Documents spw gt v Organize v Include in library y Share with v New folder C Documents 5 Name v Date modified Type Size ad Music i e ColorScaleFormats 11 4 2011 9 19PM File folder Pictures d Docs 11 4 2011 9 19 PM File folder E Videos 3 nee a ProjectFiles 11 14 2011 5 09 AM File folder J SegyFormats 11 4 2011 9 19PM File folder jE Computer i warning mp3 2 3 2011 9 06 AM MP3 Format Sound 46 KB Rly Local Disk C G2 Shared Folders 1 J 5 items Files in the Users home Documents spw Directory If you have previously modified or edited any of the files or projects in a prior SPW 3 installation these modified files are retained and will not be overwritten during this process 19 Creating or Selecting a Project The Flowchart application requires you to either select an existing project or to create a new project when it is first started before you can start building processing flows and analyzing data be Select or Create SPW 3 Project Select existing SPW 3 Project Create new
195. d receiver statics will be from the surface to the flat datum The CMP statics will be output as 0 Include uphole static If checked the uphole static will be included 618 Receiver Statics Separation Usage The Receiver Statics Separation step inputs Receiver Statics card data and separates the statics into long and short period components The current separation operator is a 2 D operator that operates in the in line direction The first output link will contain the long period statics and the second output link will contain the short period statics Input Links 1 Receiver Statics cards mandatory Output Links 1 Receiver Statics cards mandatory The first link contains the long period statics 2 Receiver Statics cards mandatory The second link contains the short period statics Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Input Receiver Statics E Receiver Statics Separation Long Period Receiver Statics Short Period Receiver Statics A 356 122 619 Step Parameter Dialog Statics Separation Receiver Statics Separation Type Of Operator Running average Number of points odd 7 C Median mn C Polynomial fit BT Cancel Parameter Description Type Of Operator defines the type of function to use for defining the fit to the long period statics solution Running Average This selects an averaging smoothing operator Number of points odd Enter the number of po
196. d to correctly read each sps file 74 The Image Database Image files are tied to the current project using the Image Database Picking Help SPS Database Image Database Basemaps Binning Parameters Fold Maps Offset Distribution Maps gt Azimuth Distribution Maps gt hd Elevation Maps Statics Maps Display Preferences Tool Preferences Directory Directory contents cultural jpeg EN E hared Folders Z 7 le POLO a 0 0 0 0 G0 2 Image Database Definition Select your background image files and add them to the project Then you can select each image and configure the coordinates for the image to be drawn on maps 75 A 3 eo o ynamoecku yyacm Image Database Configuration 76 Map Displays Map displays are new in SPW 3 There are a number of different types including base maps fold maps and attribute maps The Basemap Basemaps are generated from SPS geometry files The geometry files must be in the Survey directory of a project TT Displaying a Survey Basemap Survey Picking Help SPS Database Image Database Binning Parameters Fold Maps d Offset Distribution Maps Azimuth Distribution Maps Elevation Maps Statics Maps Display Preferences Tool Preferences Select basemap image Gen
197. d use the Analyze Format button at the bottom of the display to define how these data are read SPS Relation Record Relation record file name C Teapot Dome Survey npr3 xps Tapenumber Record number Recordindex Instrument code ource line numbe gt urce point numb 0 14 0 6023 6173 0 14 0 6023 6173 0 14 0 6023 6173 14 6023 6173 14 6023 6173 14 6023 6173 14 6023 6173 14 6023 6173 14 6023 6173 14 6023 6173 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 15 6024 6174 17 6018 6158 17 6018 6158 17 6018 6158 dp SPS Relation Record Spreadsheet Tab 92 The SPS Analyzer allows you to specify how the data will be read and decoded from this sps file When the format is correctly defined be sure to Save Relation Record identification Start Co End Co Record identification 1 1 C Read lines with relation record 1D x Start Col End Col Load Minimum Maximum End Col Load Minimum Maximum snes z Tape number ls oO o plo From channel la S O X Record number 8 u B To channel Record increment j Channel increment Instrument code Ol Receiver line 4 Source line 2 AL 6006 l 6099 i From receiver Source
198. dB pairs and are linearly interpolated to each location along the line A constant gain multiplier may also be applied to the data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Gain Curves cards optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory Example Flow chart Zi Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 3 Foe Ex FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ Amplitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing Gain Curves Filtering Geometry Migration Multi component Mutes G gt Quality Analysis a e se 3 Le Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X T4 Y 387 120 Step Parameter Dialog Use gain curves from data file Constant gain multiplier 1 00 Parameter Description Use gain curves from data file An input auxiliary gain spreadsheet will be used and the gain curves in this data file will be applied to the seismic data Constant gain multiplier Each trace data sample is multiplied by this constant value 121 Automatic Gain Control Usage The Automatic Gain Control step allows you to apply up to five sliding window gain functions to each data trace You specify the number of gated windows the overlap between the gated windows and the start time and le
199. dataset Remove dead traces Keep dead traces OK Cancel View Processing History Help Seismic File Dialog 29 Main Flowchart Window The SPW FlowChart application allows you to build processing sequences commonly referred to as flows set the parameters for processing steps run the flows you have created and create displays of maps and seismic data The FlowChart application is a tabbed interface where multiple processing flows seismic displays and map displays may be open at the same time The FlowChart graphical user interface simplifies the process of building a processing flow to a few mouse clicks Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 kako FlowChart Processing Seismic Analysis Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W 1 Geometry EJ Amplitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z npr3 sps peeey Editing Filtering npr3 rps Geometry Migration Multi component Mutes npr3 xps Quality Analysis Seismic Data SpectralAttributes Spectral Decomposition Stacking Summing Statics Trace Attributes Velocities Wavelet Shaping le e a Le Execute Abort Save SaveAs Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome Current flow 1 Geometry X 744 Y 496 FlowChart User Interface 30 Tool Bar The Tool Bar contains a number of tools for controlling the flowchart interface
200. ded to the computed amplitude spectrum to stabilize the results Input Links 2 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 2 Seismic data mandatory Reference Danielsen V and Karlsson T V 1984 Extraction of signatures from seismic and well data First Break 2 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Ma Input spw co Wavlet Estimation Seismic Well Wavelet Estimates spw Status Open 269 206 711 Step Parameter Dialog WE Wavelet Estimation Seismic and Well Log Wavelet Estimation Seismic and Well Seismic input range Wavelet Limit i Wavelet length ms Line f Pre whitening 2 Location p Extraction Method Seismic time window C Fourier Division Wiener Filterinc M Limit analysis time Reflection series file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description Seismic input range Allows the wavelet to be extracted from a limited spatial zone of the input data Line If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP lines used to extract the wavelet Min Minimum CMP line number to input Max Maximum CMP line number to input Location If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP locations used to extract the wavelet Min Minimum CMP location number to input Max Maximum CMP location number to input Seismic time window If checked allows the wavelet to be extracted from a limited temporal zone of the input data
201. der field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows Sort order Data header field Start column Length Time Offset Unique trace number Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of mute locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of mute locations in the output mute file Sheet Header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line number in the output mute file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number in the output mute file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of CMP positions in the CMP line in the output mute file 156 Sort order Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the sort order e g common source CMP etc of the data file on which the early mute was picked Data header field Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the mute time in milliseconds at a specified offset and trace number in the output mu
202. dows per trace Reference Type RMS Amplitude Mean Amplitude Window Window start ms Window length ms Reference level 1 0 00 5000 00 m 5000 00 5000 00 Parameter Description Reference type Select whether the traces will be leveled according to RMS or mean amplitude Number of windows per trace Enter the number of balancing windows per data trace Start ms Enter the start time in milliseconds for the balancing window Length ms Enter the length in milliseconds for the balancing window The window will extend from the start time to start time length Reference level Enter the reference level for the balancing window On output the RMS or mean amplitude of the data trace will be equal to the specified value 134 Auxiliary Data Steps This section documents the support information available as Auxiliary Data Auxiliary data may be imported from foreign data formats or output as foreign data formats Auxiliary Data items currently available are Processing Categories CMP Statics Crooked Line Bin Definition Early Mutes Exclusion Zones FK Mutes First Break Time Picks Frequency Filter Gain Curves Horizon File Multicom ponent Receiver Statics PP NHMO Eta Function PP NHMO Gamma Function Phase Matching Statistics Polygon Definition Profile Geometry File 135 Receiver Gains Receiver Statics Receiver
203. ds Design window length ms Enter the length of the decon design window in milliseconds 691 Apply moveout to decon design window If checked a linear moveout will be applied to the deconvolution design window The window start time will shift by delta time offset velocity Linear moveout velocity Enter the linear moveout of the deconvolution design window Range limit trace in design window If checked the range of traces used to design the deconvolution operator may be limited by offset Minimum absolute offset Enter the minimum absolute offset trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator Maximum absolute offset Enter the maximum absolute offset trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator 692 Source Deconvolution Usage The Source Deconvolution step is a Wiener Levinson based algorithm that allows you to decompose the source response to account for changes in wavelet shape due to near source conditions Both spiking and predictive deconvolution operators are available You choose the amount of pre whitening the inverse filter length the start time of you operator design window and the design window length You may also apply a linear moveout to your deconvolution design windows to allow a sliding window whose start time varies with offset For the predictive deconvolution method you must choose a predictive length for your wavelet You also have the option of range limi
204. e noise model to be subtracted from the input gather Percent pre whitening Enter the amount of pre whitening used to stabilize the least squares inversion in the presence of noise 289 Minimum live traces Enter the minimum number of live traces that must be present in a gather in order to transform that gather 290 Mini mum Differential Moveout 291 Apply F K Filter Usage The Apply F K Filter step transforms T X domain data to the F K domain applies a specified F K reject filter and returns the data to the T X domain F K Filters are picked interactively as Surgical Mutes in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Surgical Mutes cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo da HH i An Mutes e Apply F K Filter output spw SELECT 191 37 292 Step Parameter Dialog Apply F K Filter Apply F K Filter Mute Taper Type Mute Interpolation Control Hanning Hamming Iv Filter 1 Blackman C No taper ls Mute taper length samples 10 ul Trace Amplitude Definition Extend the trace k dimension C Use relative amplitude traces roza AS Use true amplitude traces Y AGC before filter Parameter Description Mute Taper Type Select the type of taper to use when applying the F K mute fun
205. e CMP line number associated with a given horizon time pick in the output horizon file CMP Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number associated with a given horizon time pick in the output horizon file Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the offset in meters from the first CMP on the line for a stacked section associated with a given horizon time pick in the output horizon file Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the two way time in milliseconds associated with a given horizon pick in the output horizon file Amplitude Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the amplitude of the event associated with a given horizon pick in the output horizon file Other info Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the additional information in the output horizon file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the output frequency filter file 172 Line Definition File Usage The Line Definition File card data is used to 1 store the best fit line to the scatter of CMP resulting from a crooked line seismic survey and 2 to specify and ultimately extract a random 2 D line from a 3 D data volume Step Parameter Dialog Line Definition Card File Line Definition Card File En
206. e receiver offset and CMP components Deconvolution operators are constructed from the source and receiver components of this decomposition These operators are applied with the Apply Deconvolution Operators step The user specifies whether the deconvolution will be of the spiking or predictive type the design window operator length and percent white noise Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 None The surface consistent deconvolution operators are output to an auxiliary disc file Reference Cary P M and Lorentz G A 1993 Four component surface consistent deconvolution Geophysics 58 383 392 Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Ei oleo Input spw Apply Deconvolution Operators ES Surface Consistent Deconvolution Deconvolved Output spw Status Open 702 Step Parameter Dialog Surface Consistent Deconvolution Surface Consistent Deconvolution Gauss Seidel Iteration Parameters Type Of Operator Number of iterations 3 Spiking C Predictive End iteration based on amplitude difference Deconvolution Parameters Range Limit 2 Pre whitening 0 100 V Range limit trace in design window Inverse filter length ms 150 0 Minimum offset 0 0 gth ms Design window start ms 0 0 Maximum offset 3000 0 9 ms Design window length ms 500 0 Linear Moveout V Apply moveout to decon design window V Yerbose console mode Linear m
207. e 11 s Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the time domain filter coefficients in the time filter file Data header field Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the time series values in milliseconds associated with a given filter coefficient in the output time filter file Amplitude Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the amplitude value associated with a given time series coefficient in the output time filter file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the time filter file 235 Trace Kills Usage The Trace Kills card data item is used to store the trace header values of traces that have been killed by the Automatic Trace Edits step or that will be killed with the Kill Traces step In the case of traces that were killed by the Automatic Trace Edits step the Trace Kills card file will contain the calculated value of trace semblance in the User Defined 1 field and the calculated value of the power ratio decay in the User Defined 2 field
208. e Attenuation Mi Pre stack Gathers with Multiple Attenuation spw gt Status Open 455 345 355 Step Parameter Dialog WE Wave Equation Multiple Attenuation Xx Wave Equation Multiple Attenuation Water column velocity 1 500 00 Group interval 25 00 Source receiver near offset 1 00 00 Cancel Parameter Description Water column velocity Enter the velocity of propagation in the water column Group interval Enter the acquisition group interval Source receiver near offset Enter the offset from the source to the nearest receiver in the spread 356 Geometry Binning Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the Geometry Binning category Processing steps currently available are 2 Geometry Binning BAX Build Super Gathers CMP Fold Data o CMP Fold Geometry Crooked Line Binning Crooked Line Fit Extract Geometry Flex Binning Geometry Definition Geometry Interpolation PreStack Kirchhoff Partitioning Real Time Geometry Definition Simple Marine Geometry Single Fold Profile Geometry Super Binning UKOOA P1 90 Geometry Definition 357 Note Trace Header Geometry Application The first step in the majority of processing sequences is to update the seismic field headers with the acquisition geometry information This information is required to perform basic data analysis and to execute almost all multi channel processing steps
209. e Seismic output spw 548 Step Parameter Dialog Resample Seismic Resample Seismic Sample Interval v Resample 2 00000 2 00000 ms Anti alias Filter Cutoff Nyquist 50 Rolloff dBjoctave 36 Trace Length Change length Parameter Description Resample If checked the traces will be resampled to the specified sample interval Anti alias Filter Cutoff YoNyquist Enter the percentage of the Nyquist frequency at which an anti alias filter is applied Rolloff db Octave Enter the rolloff of the filter in dB Octave Change Length If checked the traces will be truncated or extended to the specified length Start time ms Enter the start time of the trace to output in milliseconds Length ms Enter the length of the trace to output in milliseconds 549 SEG 2 File Usage The SEG2 File step allows for direct input of SEG 2 formatted data from a disk file Input Links None The SEG 2 disk file is selected in the SEG2 File dialog by means of a Browse button Output Links 1 Seismic data file mandatory Example Flowchart RE SEG 2 Diskfile Input flo Mi SPW formatted output spw Status Open 146 1 550 Step Parameter Dialog SEG 2 File SEG 2 File Input Files Browse File name C Data Great Bend SEG 2 2502101 dat Number of records 132 Guenide Traces perrecord 72 l Yes Sample interval ms 90 1250 l Yes Samples pertrace 2048
210. e amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Browse Select an existing SPW format seismic file or enter the name of a new SPW format seismic file to use for output from the process 457 Convert PS Time Picks Usage The Convert PS Time Picks step maps P wave event times to PS wave event times using a user supplied gamma Vp Vs function Alternatively the step can map PS wave event times to P wave event times Input Links 1 Horizon Picks file containing either P wave event times or PS wave event times mandatory 2 PS Nhmo Gamma Function card mandatory Output Links 1 Horizon Picks file containing PS wave event times or P wave event times mandatory Reference Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo PS Nhmo E Function es TH Do WA Convert Hl Time Picks PS wave Event pics Status Open 246 24 458 Step Parameter Dialog Convert PS Time Picks Convert PS Time Picks Conversion direction Convert PP to PS Convert PS to PP Samples per trace 1500 Sample interval msec 4 0 Cancel Parameter Description Conversion direction Select the type of time pick conversion If the input times were picked on P wa
211. e connection is established then selecting the Sent file via ftp option will automatically send the report file after each record is processed Z Signal to Noise for Editing Records A Report file Spatial application File Browse C Teapot Dome Report SignalToNoiseReport tt Apply to all data Reference Exclusion Zone file my Send Be wa tp MS C Apply inside exclusion zones X Apply outside exclusion zones Amplitude definition Signal definition method Noise definition method PEY Bite en e Average power Average absolute value e Enter signal window e Enter noise window Record edit criteria Average RMS Import signal window Import noise window Fails all windows Fails any window Signal Signal Signal Signal Noise Noise Noise Noise S N S N Ratio Start time ms End time ms Start Offset End Offset Start time ms End time ms Start Offset End Offset Minimum Output header i 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 0 00 None Add Window Delete Window View Window Export Window Minimum live traces per analysis window 5 OK Help Cancel Signal to Noise for Killing Records 110 x Report traces killed by Geometry Definition step x Report traces killed by Processing steps Report bad records based on number of adjacent dead traces Adjacent dead trace limit 2 Report bad records based on number of dead traces per record Dead trace limit per record 5 0 x Report records killed by prior processe
212. e deconvolution design window Design window length ms Enter the length in milliseconds of the deconvolution design window 707 Wavelet Estimation Seismic Only Usage The Wavelet Estimation Seismic Only step estimates the seismic source wavelet from the input seismic data The amplitude spectrum of the source wavelet is derived from the averaged autocorrelations of the input data while the minimum phase spectrum of the source wavelet is derived from the Hilbert transform of the logarithmic amplitude spectrum The input data are assumed to be minimum phase You set the wavelet length and choose the data window from which the wavelet is extracted A small amount of white noise can be added to the computed amplitude spectrum to stabilize the results Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data mandatory Reference White R E and O Brien P N S 1993 Estimation of the primary seismic pulse Geophysical Prospecting 22 627 651 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi Input spw E Wavlet Estimation Seismic Only Wavelet Estimates spw Status Open 708 Step Parameter Dialog WE Wavelet Estimation Seismic Only Wavelet Estimation Seismic Only Seismic input range Limit Line Location p Seismic time window Limit analysis time Wavelet Wavelet length ms 500 00 Pre whitening 0 10 Parameter Description
213. e filter as a function of header word flags 2 parameterize the notch as a function of header word flags Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo SAX 05 Input spw Notch Filter i Output spw lt E Status Open 142 292 329 Step Parameter Dialog Notch E Notch Filter Application Window O Apply filter based on a trace header flag CI Notch frequency is in a trace header field Notch frequency Hz 50 Notch width Hz 4 Parameter Description Application window Apply filter based on a trace header flag check this option if the application of the filter is to be controlled by the value of a trace header flag Trace header field If the filter is to be controlled by the value of a trace header flag select the trace header from the drop down menu Trace header value If the filter is to be controlled by the value of a trace header flag set the value of the trace header When the value of the trace header equals the specified value the filter will be applied Otherwise the filter will not be applied Notch frequency is in a trace header field check this option if the value of the notch frequency is to be controlled by the value of a trace header field Trace header field If the notch of the filter is to
214. e frequency analysis End time for analysis Specify the end time for time frequency analysis Start frequency for analysis Specify the start frequency for time frequency analysis End frequency for analysis Specify the end frequency for time frequency analysis Bandwidth of Gaussian Specify the bandwidth of each frequency analysis 506 Instantaneous Amplitude Usage The Instantaneous Amplitude step calculates instantaneous amplitude attributes for each trace and outputs each as a seismic trace in the output seismic file Instantaneous amplitude is a measure of the reflectivity strength of events on a seismic section Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic attribute data in any sort order mandatory Reference Taner M T Koehler F Sheriff R E 1979 Complex Seismic Trace Analysis Geophysics v 44 no 6 p 1041 1063 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Instantaneous Amplitude input spw 190 129 507 Step Parameter Dialog Instantaneous Amplitude E Instantaneous Amplitude Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 508 Instantaneous Frequency Usage The Instantaneous Frequency step calculates instantaneous frequency attribute for each trace and outputs each as a seismic trace in the output seismic file This attribute is a measure of the frequency of events on a seismic section Inpu
215. e input mandatory Example Flowchart Za Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 ce C fe FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ Co Am plitude Adjustment J Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing u Filtering gt K T NE e Current project Slonik X 676 Y 269 257 Step Parameter Dialog Ze Kill Traces mE Primary header Primary start Primary stop Secondary header Secondary start Secondary stop Tertiary header Tertiary start Tertiary stop Field File v 150 152 Channel zji None vio 0 None y 1173 173 Receiver Location v 101 i None y 0 0 Import Export Add Row Delete Row Set dead trace amplitudes to zero OK Help Parameter Description Primary header Select the first trace header field to use for killing traces This is combined with the other selected header key values to determine the set of traces to kill Primary start Enter the start value for the first selected header field Primary stop Enter the end value for the first selected header field Secondary header Select the second trace header field to use for killing traces This is combined with the other selected header key values to determine the set of traces to kill Secondary start Enter the start value for the second selected header field Secondary stop Enter the end value
216. e is tapered to zero Apply anti alias filter If checked applies a filter to reduce spatial aliasing of high frequency components of the migration operator Migrate from surface topography If checked the migration will be performed from the surface elevations stored in the trace header If not check the migration step will assume that the stack has been previously static corrected to a flat reference datum Output SPW file name and working directory for temporary disk file The Browse button allows selection of the migrated output data volume 425 Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration Usage The Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration implements a diffraction summation migration of the Kirchhoff type on a pre stack data volume that is capable of handing vertically and laterally varying velocity fields Introduction Pre stack Time Migration is a compute intensive process The length of the processing run is proportional to the migration aperture size and the size of the input seismic volume By partitioning the output data volume to fit within system memory limits the migration run time can be optimized The Kirchhoff Pre stack Time Migration follows the traditional SPW processing flow and migrates a single CMP gather at a time Large migration apertures can result in a single CMP gather trace being migrated to a large number of output migration bins As a result in addition to the disk space required to hold the input dataset t
217. e line of the refractor velocities file 207 Residual NMO Analysis Usage The Residual NMO card data item is used to store residual NMO velocity information These velocities may be picked interactively in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog RNMO Analysis File RNMO Analysis File Enter the RNMO analysis card data file name Customize Browse cancel _ Example Card Data R Residual NMO Analysis Pick Time NMO Time RNMO Time Total Time Normalize Amp Trim Amp Azimuth Velocity Trace ID CMP Line CMP Loc 208 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Residual NMO Analysis Customize Residual NMO Analysis Card File Format No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Horizon pick time NMO Correction RNMO Correction Total time correction Normalized trim amplitude Trim amplitude Offset Azimuth Src to Reyr NMO Velocity Unique trace id CMP Line number AAA 3332932323232 Ud ed 77 CMP Location number Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 120 C cancel i Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A mini
218. e location static in the output source static file Length Enter the number of columns reserved for writing the source location static in the output source static file 146 The source statics card data file output with the above parameterization will have the following form the comments with arrows have been added for explanation Ei example residual source statics WordPad File Edit View Insert Format Help Os SA Bo R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 3 SPW Source Statics File lt This is the comment card The 3 indicates that it is a source statics card 1 This is the File Header Field It indicates that there is only one source line 101 8 This is the Sheet Header Field It indicates that the source static file is for 129 573552 source line 101 and that there are 38 source location on the line 131 207910 These are the Data Header fields They represent the source location and the 133 807233 source static respectively 135 877282 137 933568 139 494154 141 0 313364 143 1 542512 145 1 266550 147 2 684935 149 1 179489 151 1 320091 155 1 376875 157 2 186443 159 2 035214 161 1 223847 163 2 544334 165 4 461437 167 1 400349 169 2 104850 171 598595 642384 To output this file to in a known foreign format create a simple job that inputs the SPW static file and outputs the reformatted foreign format file
219. e of the decon design window in milliseconds Design window length ms Enter the length of the decon design window in milliseconds 694 Apply moveout to decon design window If checked a linear moveout will be applied to the deconvolution design window The window start time will shift by delta time offset velocity Linear moveout velocity Enter the linear moveout of the deconvolution design window Range limit trace in design window If checked the range of traces used to design the deconvolution operator may be limited by offset Minimum absolute offset Enter the minimum absolute offset trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator Maximum absolute offset Enter the maximum absolute offset trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator 695 Signature Deconvolution Usage Signature Deconvolution allows you to remove a seismic signature from your data traces by calculating the inverse of a supplied signature trace and then filtering your data by this signature inverse This is a common technique for use in processing marine data to remove the signature of the airguns Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi input spw EJ Signature Deconvolution Mi output spw aa Status Open 333 282 696 Step Parameter Dialog Signature D
220. e output receiver statics list file Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location number in the output receiver statics list file Static shift time ms Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver static shift in the output receiver statics list file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the receiver statics list file 204 Refractor Velocities Usage The Refractor Velocity card data item is used to store laterally varying refractor velocities These velocities may be picked interactively in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog Refractor Velocity Card File Refractor Velocity Card File Enter the refractor velocity card data file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data HE Refractor Velocities 1 Location 201 205 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Refractor Velocity Customize Refractor Velocity File Format Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length No of velocity locations sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows Data header field Start column Length Layer Velocity 1 Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Parameter descripti
221. e traces used in the design of the deconvolution operator Input Links 1 Seismic data in receiver sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in receiver sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw e Receiver Deconvolution output spw Ss Status Open 340 290 690 Step Parameter Dialog Deconvolution Receiver Deconvolution Type Of Operator Pre whitening 2 0 100 Spiking Inverse filter length ms 150 0 Predictive Number of operators per trace 1 Overlap of design window ms 500 0 Range limit trace in design window Design window start ms 0 0 oo Design window length ms 500 0 3000 0 M Apply moveout to decon design window Linear moveout velocity 7000 0 Cancel Parameter Description Type of Operator Select type of deconvolution to perform Spiking or Predictive Spiking Weiner Levinson spiking deconvolution Predictive Weiner Levinson predictive or gapped deconvolution Prediction length ms Enter the prediction length in milliseconds Pre whitening percent Enter the pre whitening multiplier The zero lag of the autocorrelation function is increased by this amount to induce stability in the matrix solution Inverse filter length ms Enter the length of the filter to be calculated and applied in milliseconds Design window start ms Enter the start time of the decon design window in millisecon
222. eader Logic step allows you modify the trace header values of a seismic trace using the relational operators and logic conditions characteristic of an If Then Else statement Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo a Input spw Es Trace Header Logic Ouput spw Status Open 260 57 273 Step Parameter Dialog E Trace Header Logic Trace Header Logic if Header Field Source Location hg Header Field Offset Me then Header Field User Def 1 else Header Field User Def 1 Relation gt Y l Logic AND Relation gt Header Field Rev Location bd C Header Field C Header Field None I C Header Field C Constant a Constant 0 0000 Constant 1 0000 Constant 1 0000 OK Cancel Parameter Description if Select the relational and logic conditions for which the then statement will be executed Header Field Select the primary trace header field to be tested Relation Select the primary relational operator Header Field If selected the primary trace header field will be evaluated against the chosen header field using the primary relational operator Constant If selected the primary trace header field will be evaluated against the user supplied constan
223. ecasebae 423 Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time MigratiOM ooooocnnoccnonoconccnonoconnnonn nono nonono cono connn con nc conc cnn conan 426 Split Step MIO o A 433 Stolt Migrations eren A A en ERE 435 M t OTP OSIM rase e E A yas E A Mere ean E eee 437 Apply Horizontal ROOM 439 Apply PS Non hyperbolic Moveout cccsccsseccsercssscsseccssecensccssccesecsensscssecsencessess 441 Birefringence Analysis lt 2C len aii iE EEE R I E E E 444 Bir fri gence A alata a als ues oe ini alata s 447 CCP Bimini a di A aa 449 CCP Fold Geometry rias 452 Constant Gamma Stacks iia 455 Convert PS Time PICKS 2 5 cca wats davacas al 458 DO AT i a Stag ite Na ate tn Sh a ed Ba hha a tl 460 Horizontal Rotations asesan dc 462 A usc aaa meat iota Aaa athe 464 Three Component R Otatians x A A id Wi a a 466 Two Component Horizontal Rotati0M ooooonnncononcnnocnnoonconccconoconn nono nonnnoconocnnn cono cconncns 469 Wavefield Separation A a a aa a a aaa 473 Mts ech oa ct to red E R 475 Apply Surcical Mutis oh an E E EE K EREE EERE 478 Apply Tail Mutes A A E ANA 480 O aaa 482 Amplit de O E IN 483 Amplit de Spec tn ta 486 AUTOCAR eos 488 Compare bares Oca diles 490 Cross Correlation riensi ata E A A rulers cide 492 Extract Dead Traces A a A a ARES 494 ET Di S OEA ss 496 F T PREQUGNCY ICG aa is 498 A A e a aA 500 Freg ency Analysis anenai ari ET A a 502 Gabor TEA STO EIN ech sce a as cage ionann nan a iv a A a a anes 505 Instantaneous Amplitude E O ae
224. eceiver increment Group interval Distance between receiver groups in feet or meters Location index in file corresponding to first location 391 PreStack Kirchhoff Partitioning Usage Pre Stack Time Migration PTM is a very compute intensive process and large migration apertures can result in the traces of a single CMP gather being migrated to a large number of output migration bins As a result in addition to the disk space required to hold the input data set the migration also requires a working data store Proper sizing of the working data set size can greatly improve the processing speed of the migration The Pre Stack Kirchhoff Partitioning step identifies the input traces that will contribute to a specified output set of migration bins and creates an input data volume from the candidate CMP gathers By partitioning the output data volume to fit within system memory limits the migration run time can be optimized The resultant migrations are conveniently merged with the Tape Utility Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data partitioned for Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo PreStack Kirchhoff Partitioning a Partitioned Seismic Data spw 392 Step Parameter Dialog Pre Stack Kirchoff Partitioning Pre Stack Kirchhoff Partitioning Limit CMP lines Traveltime at target 2500 0
225. econvolution Signature Deconvolution Pre whitening 0 100 Inverse filter length ms 100 0 Input signatures length ms 200 0 Time shift for output ms 5090 0 Signature Input Options C One signature from auxiliary file C One signature per record from auxiliary file C One signature per trace from auxiliary file One signature per record from data file Signature trace number 1 First trace to kill 0 Last trace to kill 0 Browse Aux SPW seismic file name Cancel Parameter Description Pre whitening percent Enter the prewhitening multiplier The zero lag of the autocorrelation function is increased by this amount to induce stability in the matrix solution Inverse filter length ms Enter the length of the filter to be calculated and applied in milliseconds Input signature length ms Enter the length of the input signatures in milliseconds Time shift for output ms Enter the time shift for the output trace following signature deconvolution Signature Input Options Select the data input source of the signature trace or traces One signature from an auxiliary file This option inputs one signature trace from an auxiliary input data and uses that trace as the signature trace for the entire data set 697 One signature per record from an auxiliary data file This option inputs one signature trace per record from an auxiliary input data set and uses that trace as the sign
226. ection step allows you to apply a gain to the data traces based on the equation Gain T_ Multiplier Time T Exponent V_ Multiplier Velocity Time V_Exponent The T Multiplier and the V_ Multiplier are constant gain factors and the T_Exponent and the V_Exponent vary the gain with time Multipliers of one 1 and an exponents of two 2 are commonly used for the spherical divergence correction since energy from a point source dissipates in proportion to the square of distance traveled To apply the spherical divergence correction as a function of both time and velocity you must supply the optional velocity function Otherwise the velocity terms in the above equation will be ignored and the spherical divergence correction will only be applied as a function of time You also have the option to apply the inverse spherical divergence correction function to your data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory Reference Claerbout Jon F 1985 Fundamentals of Geophysical Data Processing Blackwell Scientific Publications 128 Example Flowcharts Zu Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 Sm FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W untied EJ a Am plitude Adjustment E Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing E D e 3 le
227. edian DC bias on a trace by trace basis Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 Loja FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Documentation EJ Processing Categories Automatic Trace Edit Dataset Math Kill Traces Phase Rotation Remove DC Bias y M 9 se a e ite Abort Execu Save SaveAs Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Slonik Current flow Documentation X 650 Y 216 261 Step Parameter Dialog DC calculation method e Median DC calculation window Calculate DC in a window Start time ms End time ms 100 0 Parameter Description Average Value Select the method for calculating the DC bias to be removed You may use either a median or a mean Calculate DC in a window If checked only the entered window of each trace will be used to calculate the DC Minimum time ms Enter the start time of the window to be used for calculating the DC value Maximum time ms Enter the ending time of the window to be used for calculating the DC value 262 Remove Reverberation Usage The Remove Reverberation step searches for reverberations in the signal and attempts to remove these using an ad
228. ees Third rotation Number of rotations 3 Rotation axis Select the component axis about which to perform this rotation Header rotation angle If the Header rotation angle radio button is selected then the rotation angle will be read from the trace header field selected in the adjacent drop down menu Constant rotation angle If the Constant rotation angle radio button is selected then the rotation angle will be read from the user supplied value in the adjacent text entry box Angle in radians If checked the rotation angle will be read in units of radians Otherwise the rotation angle will be read in units of degrees 468 Two Component Horizontal Rotation Usage The Two Component Horizontal Rotation step computes the rotation required to transform the horizontal components of a multi component data volume recorded in the acquisition or inline crossline coordinate system into the vertical radial transverse frame of reference defined by the source receiver azimuth These rotations are then applied by the Apply Horizontal Rotation step The rotation angles can be determined from 1 a covariance analysis of a user defined portion of the seismic record 2 a constant user specified angle or 3 by scanning for the rotation angle that maximizes energy among the horizontal components The analysis start time may be referenced to the first break wavelet using pick times stored in an Early Mute card file Input Links 4
229. eismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Hale D and Claerbout J 1983 Butterworth dip filters Geophysics vol 48 no 8 p 1033 1038 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Ma input spw EJ Dip Filter output spw SELECT 244 29 313 Step Parameter Dialog Dip Filter Dip Filter Low velfhigh dip High vel low dip No of poles Max frequency Hz Filter Type Dip Specification Pass msftrace Reject Yelocity Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces C Use true amplitude traces Cancel Parameter Description Low vel hi dip Enter the steeper dip ms trace or the lower apparent velocity distance units sec The filter is identical for negative dips Be sure to select the appropriate dip specification button below Hi vel low dip Enter the shallower dip ms trace or the higher apparent velocity distance units sec The filter is identical for negative dips Be sure to select the appropriate dip specification button below No of poles Enter the number of poles to define the filter slope The larger the number of poles the steeper the filter rolloff slope Max frequency You can specify a maximum frequency to pass or reject Set this to a very large number to extend the filter to Nyquist frequency Filter Type Select whether to pass or reject the specified range of dips Pass Pass the range of dips Reject Reject
230. ength Filter coefficient Number of iterations Window If the Use window box is checked the following window parameters will be applied Taper length Window start ms Window length ms 286 Output type Output filtered traces Output raw filter coefficients Bandpass filter Lo cut Lo pass High pass High cut 287 Adaptive Radon Demultiple Usage The Adaptive Radon Demultiple step performs parabolic radon demultiple through a modeling of primaries multiples and noise in the parabolic radon domain followed by subtraction of multiples and noise in the time domain You specify the transform type the range of ray parameters in the output transform a percentage of multiples plus noise to subtract and the spatial and temporal taper lengths used to generate the transform Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Hampson D 1991 Inverse velocity stacking for multiple elimination Journal of the Canadian Society of Exploration Geophysics 22 p 44 55 Example Flowchart O o II III 2 Documentation flo BAX ii Input spw a Adaptive Radon Demultiple BS Output spw lt Status Open 52 7 288 Step Parameter Dialog xA lt A lt lt lt lt gt gt A gt 5 gt 7 Adaptive Radon
231. ent types The common receiver gathers should be sorted by 1 receiver number 2 source receiver offset 3 receiver component Output Links 1 Seismic data rotated into principal axis of the azimuthally anisotropic medium in common receiver order with strike angle of the principal axis in User Def 1 trace header mandatory Reference Alford R M 1986 Shear data in the presence of azimuthal anisotropy Dilley Texas Presented at the 56 Annual SEG Meeting Houston Texas Example Flowchart R Documentation flo 2C Inline and Crossline components spw 2C Inline and Crossline components spw First Break Time Picks Birefringence Analysis 4C Birefringence Analysis 4C Radial and Transverse compnents spw Radial and Transverse compnents spw Status Open 460 111 447 Step Parameter Dialog Birefringence 4C Birefringence Analysis 4C Window start ms 9 9 Window length ms 200 0 Cancel Parameter Description Window start ms If a First Break Time Pick file is not linked to the Birefringence step this value will indicate the start time of the analysis If a First Break Time Pick file is linked to the Birefringence step this value will indicate the start time of the analysis with respect to the first break time Window length ms Length of birefringence analysis following start time 448 CCP Binning Usage The Common Conversion Point CCP binning step assigns CCP n
232. er Column Math Trace Header Column Math Type of Operator A B sin A B C A B cos A B Co A B tan A B AIB asin A B Remainder of AB acos A B Modulus of B atan B Equal to Angle Specification C Angles in Radians C Angles in Degrees Output Header Field Header Field A None Nome gt Header Field B None Cancel Parameter Description Type of operator Select the mathematical operation that will be applied to the seismic trace header Angle Specification If a trigonometric operation is to be performed indicate whether the angles involved are measured in units of degrees or radians Output Header Field Select the trace header field where the result of the operation will be output Header Field A Select the first trace header field used in the operation 271 Header Field B Select the second trace header field used in the operation Example Set the CMP Location equal to the sum of the Source Location and the Receiver Location MM Trace Header Column Math Trace Header Column Math Type of Operator A B sin A B A B cos A B A B tan A B AIB asin A B Remainder of B acos AB Modulus of B atan B Equal to Angle Specification C Angles in Radians C Angles in Degrees Output Header Field Header Field A CMP Location Source Location Header Field B CAT Cancel 272 Trace Header Logic Usage The Trace H
233. er Description Operator type Forward Q modeling Check this option if attenuation is to be introduced to the input seismic traces Inverse Q modeling Check this option if attenuation is to be removed from the input seismic traces Compensation type Phase only Check this option if an allpass phase only filter is to be applied for forward or inverse Q filtering This is the computationally efficient option Phase and Amplitude Check this option if a phase and amplitude type filter is to be applied for forward or inverse Q filtering This is the computer intensive option Constant Q value Specify the value of Q for forward or inverse Q filtering Reference frequency Hz Specify the reference frequency for forward or inverse Q filtering There will be slight frequency dependent phase shifts with respect to this frequency 333 Gain limit dB Specify the maximum gain limit per frequency in the case of inverse Q filtering 334 Radon Demultiple Usage The Radon Demultiple step performs parabolic radon demultiple through a modeling of multiples in the parabolic radon domain followed by subtraction of those multiples in the time domain You specify the transform type the range of ray parameters in the output transform and the spatial and temporal taper lengths used to generate the transform Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order
234. er gathers should be sorted by 1 receiver number 2 source receiver offset 3 receiver component Output Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory Example Flowchart B 2 Horizontal Rotations flo Cala Inline Xline spw E Horizontal Rotation 7 Radial Transverse spw Status Open 228 343 462 Step Parameter Dialog Horizontal Rotations Horizontal Rotations Component Orientations Orientation of inline component deg 90 0 Orientation of crossline component deg 180 0 Cancel Parameter Description Orientation of inline component Enter the azimuth of the field orientation of the inline component receiver Orientation of crossline component Enter the azimuth of the field orientation of the crossline component receiver 463 Select Component Usage The Select Component step is used to extract source and receiver components from multi component seismic data based on the trace header types described at the beginning of the Multi Component section Input Links 3 Multi component seismic data mandatory The trace header must be updated with the source and receiver component types Output Links 1 Seismic data containing selected source or receiver component mandatory Reference Example Flowchart RE lt UNTITLED gt Select Component os Output spw Status Open 354 198 464 Step Parameter Dialog Select Component
235. er offset among traces in neighboring bins used to increase fold Gamma Enter the assumed Vp Vs ratio gamma used to determine the offset to the P to S conversion point If a PS Nhmo gamma function card file is not linked to the CCP Binning step this is the constant gamma value used to determine the offset to the P to S conversion points Common Midpoint The above figure illustrates the difference between the location of the common conversion point and the common midpoint 451 CCP Fold Geometry The CCP Fold Geometry step extracts common asymptotic conversion point fold from the source receiver and cross reference SPS card data files Input Links 4 Observers Notes SPS Format cards mandatory 5 Receiver Locations SPS Format cards mandatory 6 Source Locations SPS Format cards mandatory Output Links 1 CCP Fold Image file mandatory Example Flowchart FE Documentation flo FA Receiver sps E H Source sps Observer sps CCP Fold Geometry El CCP Fold grd Status Open 127 201 452 Step Parameter Dialog CCP Fold Geometry CCP Fold Geometry Easting x first corner 0 000000000 First CCP line number Northing y first corner 0 000000000 Line increment Easting x second corner 0 000000000 First CCP location number Northing y second corner 11 000000000 CCP location increment Easting x third corner 1 000000000 Gamma 20 Northing y t
236. er the increment in Hertz between output slices Start output time Enter the first time to use in the output End output time Enter the last time to use in the output 499 F T Time Slice Usage The Frequency Time Time Slice step converts each trace in a data set into an F T data set then outputs the selected constant time slices Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 F T Time Slice Image mandatory Reference Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Ma input spw F T Time Slice F T Time Slice Image A SELECT 355 71 500 Step Parameter Dialog F T Time Slice Image F T Time Slice Image Record number to output 1 Number of times to output 1 Start time for analysis ms 1 0000 Time increment for analysis ms 1 0000 Start low output frequency Hz 0 End high output frequency Hz 100 Cancel Parameter Description Record number to output Enter the record number to use in the calculation Number of times to output Enter the number of time slices to output Start time for analysis ms Enter the time in milliseconds of the first slice to output Time increment for analysis ms Enter the increment in milliseconds between output slices Start low output frequency Hz Enter the first frequency in Hertz to use in the output End high output frequency Hz Enter the last frequency in Hertz to use in the
237. eractively pick eta functions that result in the most coherent stacked sections Input Links 1 Seismic data pre stack in CMP sort order mandatory 2 Velocity card data file containing p wave stacking velocity functions mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw P wave Stacking Velocity Function K PP Constant Eta Stacks Status Open 396 221 664 Step Parameter Dialog PP Constant Eta Stack PP Constant Eta Stack Mute Control V Apply stretch mute Percentage 30 Taper length samples 15 20 a e a EE Number of etas First eta Last eta First CMP line to analyze Interpolation Type Selection CMP line increment Linear Quadratic No of CMP lines Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces No of CMP locsfanalysis Use true amplitude traces First CMP loc to analyze 150 00 CMP loc increment 50 00 Exponent for normalization 1 00 Output SPW format seismic file name Browse Parameter Description Number of etas Enter the number of gammas to use in the analysis A stacked section is calculated for each eta linearly interpolated between the starting and ending input gamma The eta increment will be Etainc last eta first eta Number of eta 1 First eta Enter the starting eta for the analysis This eta will be used for non hyp
238. erate from SPS 78 When you select the Basemap gt Generate from SPS command for a 3D dataset you will see the dialog shown below SPS file selection Source file Receiver file Map npr3 sps npr3 rps x Exdusion zones Background image Display exclusion zones on basemap _ Display background image on basemap Exclusion file Format Pm Lima Load Image Configure Unload image C Loaded C Configured Survey 3D Basemap Dialog You can select from the SPS files from the SPS database You can also display a background image file and exclusion zones on the basemap 79 FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help Wountitied E FA Survey Basemap E 769624 784267 798910 813553 828250 977279 977279 957954 957954 938630 938630 769624 784267 798910 813553 828250 Receiver icon O i3 Icon size 1 0 a e 9 2 Je Dey coe es BHAE et project Teapot Dome Curent fe temp bt Easing TEST ES Norting 945304 96 A Survey 3D Basemap Display 80 Base Map Display Control Panel Source icon Receiver icon a TT O a gt a Icon color El Icon color E i Icon size 1 0 Icon size 1 0 a 9 9 le Display sources Yes Display receivers yes 3
239. erbolic NMO on the first output stack gt 0 0 Last eta Enter the ending eta for the analysis This eta will be used for non hyperbolic NMO on the last output stack gt 0 0 First CMP line to analyze Enter the first CMP line number to analyze CMP line increment Enter the CMP line increment between lines to analyze No of CMP lines Enter the number of CMP lines to analyze 665 No of CMP locs analysis Enter the number of CMP locations in each analysis panel At each CMP location a range of constant velocity stacks will be generated from the first velocity to the last velocity in increments of Vinc First CMP loc to analyze Enter the first CMP location to analyze CMP loc increment Enter the CMP location increment between groups of CMP locations to analyze Mute Control Select the stretch mute definition Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting restricts the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since t
240. ercent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute tape length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone 646 Scale input velocities by Enter the amount by which the input velocities are scaled up or down A value of 1 0 does not alter the velocity field Do inverse NMO application If checked the inverse NMO correction will be applied instead of the usual forward NMO 647 Azimuth Velocity Analysis Usage The Azimuth Velocity Analysis step creates azimuth restricted velocity semblance displays from the input CMP records Azimuthal stacking velocities may be picked interactively from these semblance displays in SeisViewer For semblance display generation you designate the number of azimuth groups the number of velocities the starting velocity and the velocity increment The resulting output will contain one semblance panel for each user defined azimuth group see figure below An option exists to restrict the azimuthal semblance analysis to a time window of the input data Input Links 1 Seismic data in CMP sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic File mandatory Reference Taner M and Kohler 1969 Velocity spectra digital computer derivation and applications of velocity functions Geophysics v 34 no 6 p 859ff Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Input CMP Gathe
241. erpolate mute functions for the records between the picked mute records or to just mute the records associated with the picked mutes You have a choice of applying a Hanning Hamming or Blackman type of mute taper You may also specify the length of the mute taper Early mutes may be interactively defined in Seis Viewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Early Mutes cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi input spw del aH Apply Early Mute Early Mutes 4 Mi input spw S SELECT 276 295 476 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Early Mute Apply Early Mute Mute Taper Type Hanning C Hamming Blackman C No taper Mute taper length samples 10 v Mute interpolation cancel Parameter Description Mute Tape Type Select the type of taper to use when applying the mute function Hanning A Hanning taper is specified by the equation x n 0 5 0 5 cos 2 pi n N Hamming A Hamming taper is specified by the equation x n 0 54 0 46 cos 2 pi n N Blackman A Blackman taper is specified by the equation x n 0 42 0 5 cos 2 pi n N 0 08 cos 4 pi n N No taper No taper will be applied to the mute This may result in problems in later processing steps due to Gibbs effect Mute taper length
242. es Specify trace spacing Algortihm adapted from Seismic Unix Copyright c Colorado School of Mines Cancel Parameter Description Constant velocity Enter an average velocity for the entire stack This velocity will be used as the constant migration velocity if no velocity cards are linked Stretch factor In the case of a time variable velocity field the Stolt stretch factor is designed to stretch the time axis so that the data appear to have propagated through a constant velocity earth Values of 0 5 to 1 are typical Scale input velocities by The input velocities are multiplied by this number This scalar may be used for adjusting the input velocities if they are interval velocities derived using Dix s equation rather than true interval velocities Maximum frequency to migrate Enter the maximum frequency component in the data to be migrated Trace taper length traces Number of traces to over which to taper traces at the start and end of the line prior to migration Time taper length samples Number of samples to over which to taper at the start and end of each trace prior to migration Specify trace spacing If checked allows for manual specification of the trace spacing By default SPW calculates the trace spacing for the stack as the group interval as you defined it in the geometry definition divided by two 2 436 Multi Component This section documents Component category
243. es that the offsets in the output gathers will be entered manually First offset enter the smallest offset to be present in the output gather Last offset enter the largest offset to be present in the output gather 343 Number of offsets enter the number of offsets to be present in the output gather User auxiliary gather for inverse offsets If checked the offsets in the output gathers will be taken from those of an auxiliary data file e g the input to the forward transform Browse select the data file that will provide the offset header information 344 Ricker Filter Usage The Ricker Filter step applies a ricker filter to the input seismic file The Ricker filter is completely determined by the center frequency of the Ricker wavelet Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart t Documentation flo si Input spw Ricker Filter ii Output spw v ram E Status Open 381 253 345 Step Parameter Dialog Ricker Filter Ricker Filter Center frequency Hz 30 0000 Parameter Description Center frequency Hz Specify the center frequency of the Ricker wavelet 346 Spatial Noise Filter Usage The spatial noise filter step is a random noise reduction technique for removing or suppressing random noise in your data This time variant ad
244. eteaceeschu arcs gncnsouaeasen toners 507 This talitaneOus PTeQUCI Cy soars site rhea taste ate aah Gi e ee ea cage 509 INS tantanieOuUs PHASE ncaro na a i a aS 511 Phase Mate hing sireenin A IO 513 A A PE A A E E A calla 515 SHOT tO NOISE anten O 517 Sotres Energy Estimation sitas 519 Trace Analysis Rep ti 521 Trace Header Maps nenne a E EE E E E 523 Seismic o ad o 525 A e a a Aa chins E T A Aaa OEA 526 ARAM SEGY Pileta iS 528 Brick 2D D taipi niani o E E E E EEE E E E EE 530 Copy Sm lito 532 Cr ate Sine Waves DR E ESTA gestae 535 Create SPIKES A A ead Aa ceed aw 537 F X Trace A sss eo ae aa as rake Sees cea a a aat 540 OEA AAA PP E 542 Imerpol te Traci AA 544 Progress 12 SEGD Ple Ns 546 Rgsample Seismic a e e a Set fi 548 A geo aaes wats ieee ce Sees sets ees anaes ewe ibe ems en 550 SEG Y Pile sisi c3 assanvacca beauties ayantacenbasducchoadis EE rE RE EASA RRES Ses iaeoanensasieenadaudandeeaaniens 553 Selismio Ple ib 556 SPW Demo Ele a ala 559 Seismic ME o a e ad ie 561 Sercel SEGD El A A ead dade hea deans 563 Signature A et e Mate aT a 565 Sorting SEPS e Sea teate i a dsd ad 567 CMP SOU ia e i E Auaweaetetadisas Aeieacs envied Aiwa E Me lew RA 568 General Trace Ud Oi 570 O 575 Receiver Sort ea EEEE RE AREE AEE AT E AE G 577 Select ACC Gidea tush tices as E E OE E A EE A E O EE 579 A o a 581 Stacking and Summing PS id a A ida 583 Diversity Stack rt bos 587 Horizontal Trace SUMs iiser a iea a 589 Me dian A O 591 o
245. eter Dialog oo 1 0 SEG Y File 110 SEG Y File Specify input directory O Specify starting input file Input Directory Dataset Parameters Override Number of records 0 O Sample interval ms 0 0000 C Samples pertrace 0 O Maximum traces perrecord 2048 O Input files as they are written to disk Strip auxiliary traces Parameter Description Specify input directory With the radio button set to Specify input directory the browse button toggles to Input Directory Use the Input Directory button to specify the folder where the SEGY files are located Specify starting input file With the radio button set to Specify starting input file the browse button toggles to First Input File Use the First Input File button to specify the first SEGY file located inside the Input Directory to be reformatted Number of records By default all records will be reformatted Check the override box to specify the number of records starting with the first input file Sample interval ms By default the sample interval will be extracted from the binary header If that value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify a sample interval in milliseconds Samples per trace By default the number of samples per trace will be extracted from the binary header If that value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify a the number of samples per trace 543 Interpolate Traces
246. ets or the mid 1 3 offsets the far 1 3 offsets You may also choose to stack signed positive and negative or unsigned absolute value of positive and negative offsets For the signed or unsigned offset cases you specify the minimum and maximum offsets to stack You may apply a scaling exponent for scaling of your traces Traces are scaled by the fold of your data raised to the power of the chosen exponent i e fold EXP You also specify whether you want to sum relative or absolute amplitude traces Input Links 1 Seismic data in any CMP order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input cmp data spw os CMP Stack 242 102 584 Step Parameter Dialog CMP Stack CMP Stack Exponent for normalization 1 00 Stack Range Definition All offsets C Near offsets C Mid range C Far offsets C Signed offset Unsigned offset Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces Use true amplitude traces Remove sample mean after stack Override Write 3D output to 2D format Output SPW format seismic file name Browse cancel Parameter Description Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Stack Range Definition Set the offset range to stack All offsets All offsets will be stacked Near offsets The near 1 3rd offsets will be stac
247. f the Seismic Display Control Panel allows you to step through the entire list of records one by one forwards or backwards It also allows you to select an arbitrary primary sort key number by means of a drop down list displaying each one for quick selection anywhere in the data set 4 150 150 151 152 153 154 156 R 157 z 158 a 159 ha Arbitrary Primary Number Drop down List 66 Right Side of the Seismic Display Control Panel Tools le a Primary sort key Field File 2 i E Secondary sort key Channel v eS F gt 0 o W Tertiary sort key None v J LA Quaternary sort key None ES z Z Q Create record at Change in primary kA ul D Q E a Primary sort key interactively adjusts the seismic display by using a drop down menu to select the first order in sequence by which the data will be sorted Secondary sort key interactively adjusts the seismic display by using a drop down menu to select the second order in sequence by which the data will be sorted Tertiary sort key interactively adjusts the seismic display by using a drop down menu to select the third order in sequence by which the data will be sorted Quaternary sort key interactively adjusts the seismic display by using a drop down menu to select the fourth order in sequence by which the data will be sorted Create record at interactively creates a record by change in
248. f traces to sum into each resulting output trace A number such as 50 indicates that 50 of the samples centered on the median sample value will contribute to the summed output sample Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Browse Select this button to set the output seismic file name Amplitude Samples ranked by amplitude 592 Offset Order Stack Usage The Offset Order Stack step allows you to input data sorted in common offset order and output a common offset stack seismic file You may apply a scaling exponent for scaling of your traces Traces are scaled by the fold of your data raised to the power of the chosen exponent i e fold EXP You also specify whether you want to sum relative or absolute amplitude traces Input Links 1 Seismic data in common offset sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Me input spw os Offset Order Stack gt 298 235 593 Step Parameter Dialog Offset Order Stack Offset Order Stack Exponent for normalization 1 00
249. ffsets Filter type Reject filter O Pass filter Taper Type Hanning O Hamming O Blackman O No taper Taper length samples 10 Parameter Description Enter minimum velocity Specify the minimum velocity of the pass or reject zone Enter maximum velocity Specify the maximum velocity of the pass or reject zone Specify trace spacing Check this box to manual set the trace to trace spacing in the gather to be filtered By default the group interval is read from the seismic data and the trace to trace spacing is calculated from the group interval If the Geometry Definition step has not been applied to the data the seismic data will not contain information regarding the group interval and this option should be used Velocity type Specify whether the applied F K filter will be symmetrical or asymmetrical Double sided The specified minimum and maximum velocities will be used to create a double sided or symmetrical F K filter Single sided positive offsets The specified minimum and maximum velocities will be used to pass or reject energy propagating in the direction of increasingly positive source to receiver offset Single sided negative offsets The specified minimum and maximum velocities will be used to pass or reject energy propagating in the direction of increasingly negative source to receiver offset 296 Filter type Specify whether the minimum and maximum velocity values
250. file Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Latitude Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source latitude associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Longitude Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source longitude associated with a given record in the Source SPS file 218 Easting Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source easting associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Northing Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source northing associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Elevation Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source elevation associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Static Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source static associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Depth Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source depth associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Datum Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the elevation of the datum at the source station associated with a given record in the Source SPS file Uphole Enter the st
251. finition File card data mandatory Example Flowchart RE derivative flo Crooked Line Seismic Data spw Crooked Line Fit Crooked Line Definition File 373 Step Parameter Dialog Crooked Line Fit Crooked Line Fit Number of points in linear fit 201 In line bin size ft or m 200 01 Cancel Parameter Description Number of points in linear fit Enter the number of CMP coordinate pairs used in determining the best fit line through the sources and receivers In line bin size ft or m Enter the dimensions of the in line bin dimension along the direction of the best fit line Least squares best fit line through the scatter of CMP positions Acquisition line of sources and receivers Best fit line through a scatter of source receiver midpoints 376 Extract Geometry Usage The Extract Geometry step will extract geometry information from the seismic trace header and create source receiver and observer i e cross reference SPS card data files Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Source SPS card data file mandatory 2 Receiver SPS card data file mandatory 3 Observer SPS card data file mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi Seismic with Geometry spw A 4 E F receiver SPS file Extract Geometry source SPS file Observer SPS file Status Open 257 68 377 Step Parameter Dialog Extract
252. first arrivals mandatory Output Links None A text file of the source energy estimation is specified inside the step dialog Example Flowchart FE Documentation flo first break mute pics Source Energy Estimation Status Open 285 9 519 Step Parameter Dialog Shot Energy Estimation Shot Energy Estimation Noise window specification Start Time above Mute ms 1 00 000 Window length samples 32 Data window specification Start Time Below Mute ms 100 000 Window length samples 32 Output Header lUserDefi y Output report disk file Browse Parameter Description Noise window specification Specify the window for the analysis of noise Start Time above mute ms Specify the time above the mute to start the analysis Window length samples Specify the number of samples used to determine the noise estimate Data window specification Specify the window for the analysis of noise Start Time above mute ms Specify the time above the mute to start the analysis Window length samples Specify the number of samples used to determine the signal estimate Output report disk file Specify the name of the text file txt that will contain the results of the analysis Output Header Indicate the trace header field to store the results of the source energy estimate 520 Trace Analysis Report Usage The Trace Analysis Report creates a text file th
253. flo Ey 3 asi Input Data spw Diffusion Filter ai Filtered Data spw Status Open 300 496 311 Step Parameter Dialog El Diffusion filter Diffusion filter Gradient scale 1 00 Structure scale 3 00 Number of iterations 2 Use Edge preserving filters Parameter Description Gradient scale Standard deviation of 2D Gaussian filter used for smoothing the input data prior to gradient calculation Structure scale Standard deviation of 2D Gaussian filter used for smoothing the gradient tensors prior to eigendecomposition Number of iterations Number of filter iteration to apply to the input data Use Edge preserving filters If check a continuity coherence factor is calculated that inhibits diffusion across edges 312 Dip Filter Usage The Dip Filter step allows you to apply a double sided or symmetric dip filter to your data You designate whether you want to pass or reject in the filter zone The pass or reject zone can be specified as milliseconds per trace or in velocity The number of poles controls the steepness of your filter The higher the number of poles the steeper the slopes on your filter You may also enter a maximum frequency to pass or reject To specify your filter in terms of velocity trace headers with valid offsets and a valid group interval are required Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 S
254. for the analysis tools in SPW 3 The Velocity Analysis tool is the only active analysis tool in the current version Velocity analysis displays and datasets can automatically be generated using these wizard type commands Velocity Analysis gt Create velocity analysis Gamma Analysis Load files for analysis Refraction Analysis Open existing analysis Frequency Analysis Seismic Analysis Menu Save current analysis 53 O Velocity field O Velocity picks C Hyperbola display O Horizons First line to analyze Last line to analyze Line increment Lines per analysis First location to analyze Last location to analyze Location increment Locations per analysis ocessing O Butterworth Filter O Apply mute from data file 8 Apply stretch mute Percentage A Taper length samples Interpolation Type Selection O Linear 9 Quadratic Trace Amplitude Definition O Use relative amplitude traces 9 Use true amplitude traces O Use RMS balanced traces C Automatic Gain Control Velocity Analysis Builder Wizard 54 The Attribute Map Menu The Attribute Map menu contains commands that allow you to display maps of attributes which are calculated on the seismic data S New Attribute Display Clear Current Map Refresh Current Map Remove Current Map Survey Picking Replace Current Map Open Attribute Map Display Selected Map Open recent
255. fyou decide to add multiple rows a dialog will appear o the screen requesting the number of rows you would like to add RE Source sps Ob Step 4 cont Now we have a spreadsheet full of empty cells and can begin to enter values Most of the data values can be entered by using the Cell Math function 140 RE Source sps Step 5 Fill out the values in the first row as well as those in the second row that are need to determine the series of subsequent values In the case of the source location the two values 101 and 102 are sufficient to determine that the source position advances by 1 In the case of the source northing the two values 1000 and 1025 are sufficient to determine that the source northing advances by 25 141 RE Source sps DAR Cell Math Source Lin S Source Loc Easting Northing Elevation ARANA NI ST 1000 000001 TUS IIS RX SR SAS OSOS KHI Step 6 Highlight the columns to which you will apply the Cell Math function In this case we select the entire spreadsheet by clicking on the Source Line tab holding down the mouse button and scrolling over to the Elevation tab Cell Math Cell Math Subtract from Modulo of Multiply by Divide by Remainder of Absolute value Math operand fi 000 Column Math Add A B Subtract A B Multiply A B Divide A B Column ho Column B EN Results Column 3 Clear cells Interpolate Done Step 7 Click on the Cell Math button to v
256. g x third corner Enter the easting coordinate of the third corner of your survey Northing y third corner Enter the northing coordinate of the third corner of your survey Bin size in line 1 to 2 Enter the size in distance units of the in line side of each bin Bin size cross line 1 to 3 Enter the size in distance units of the cross line side of each bin First CMP line number Enter the first CMP line number This line number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 2 Line increment Enter the increment in line numbers between adjacent CMP lines 366 First CMP location number Enter the first CMP location number This location number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 3 CMP location increment Enter the increment in locations between adjacent CMP locations Second Corner Northing Easting Bin corner survey definition Second Corner es Northing First Corner Easting Bin center survey definition 367 CMP Fold Data Usage The CMP Fold Data step extracts CMP fold from the seismic data trace headers Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links None Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo ws input spw CMP Fold Data 368 Step Parameter Dialog CMP Fold Image CMP Fold Image Cancel Parameter Description T
257. g Reports via FTP in Real Time so isscccascdescncstctescessstoveeoectansad doa detec 110 Sending Image Files via FTP in Real Time cccccssccsscssesssnscsssncsercessasssasensneses 112 The Processing OS 113 OVETVIE Worse e oa aE E RE Aa TEE h T E 113 Ampltude Ad UMSS lios 115 Amp tds EQUINA A da A ROS 116 Amplitude Versus Angle x ssccicccxsti segsvesresessucseasonactsbess Error Bookmark not defined e cays cash ayia a Gerea esi Error Bookmark not defined Apply CIs eiai ea ss eax ante ad 120 Apply Trace Balance iii Error Bookmark not defined POU LOMAS Gam A ee a Pa hth alan eee ca St 122 LR tet Secaanhde candela eta N Maa Sonar 124 PER MOVES AGO Ciria Error Bookmark not defined Sliding Window ACC i 125 Spherical Divergence COME AR 128 Surface Consistent Amplitude CorrectionS Error Bookmark not defined Trace Bal sts neces sects aiaia Error Bookmark not defined Trace Header Amplitude Mat A IS 131 PEN IO Wed a ia Error Bookmark not defined Windowed race Balan bids A os Mite likes Mis eta Rains eal belo a Sos 133 Card Dat SUC DS ltd cada 135 Creating and Editing Card Data Files ss 137 Card Data Customization Dialog iii cia ci ii s 144 Creating Card Data ImExE li ts 149 Crooked Line Bin Det 150 CMP Statics na NO ad aia clio 153 Early MISS nit ini 155 First Break Time PICKS as lt invn eesnaces See Ae ewe eee RAS 158 A O 161 GMG Source Card Ple na an a a a a a 164 GMG Station Card ti A
258. g the appropriate SPS files and any background and or exclusion zones that you wish to display will result in creating an annotated fold map as is shown below Zu Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 S FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help Untitled L 15 Survey Basemap Untitled 19 Survey Foldmap EJ 774047 786436 798825 811214 823602 977360 977360 958106 958106 58 00000 29 00000 0 00000 938799 938799 774047 786436 798825 811214 823602 Reference amplitude method Set automatically a O a 3 f i a o gt le Coordinate reference Geographic e a 3 a W A Current project Teapot Dome Current file temp bsf Easting 789438 14 Northing 978367 26 Survey 3D Fold Map Display 86 Displaying Spreadsheets of Auxiliary Data Each of the Auxiliary data types has a unique display and spreadsheet view which is customized for that spreadsheet s specific data type and contents The following pages show examples of the spreadsheet views for a number of the data types Each spreadsheet also has controls allowing you to move between displays For example Velocity Functions exist in multiple locations in a 3D survey at specific CMP Line and CMP Location positions You can move between control points using the control at the top of the spreadsheet where it shows the Line and Location 87 Early Mute Function
259. ge 1 Ju File Browse Create format file IBM Floating Point IEEE Floating Point SEGY Analyzer 40 After you use the File Browse to select a file then the Analyzer entries are populated with the information retrieved from the dataset T 4 SEGY Analyzer NPR3 Geometry sgy 72 Endian order Text header Textheader Binary header Traceheader Seismic view Get from data Header size in bytes 3200 Bo eian 1 byte Integers 2 byte Integers 4byteIntegers IBM Floating Point IEEE Floating Point j Text format EBCDIC ASCII ISE Byte position Description Tracel Trace 2 Trace3 Trace4 Trace Sop 1 1to4 a 2 3 4 5 Header size in bytes 400 2 5to8 0 0 0 0 0 Start byte Data type Override Value 3 9to12 Field File 14 14 14 14 14 Samples per trace 21 4byteit v 1000 4 13to16 Channel 2 3 4 5 6 Sample interval 17 4byte int v 20 5 17to20 Source Location 6173 6173 16173 6173 6173 a AS 6 21to24 CMP Location 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 N of races 7 25to 28 0 0 0 0 0 O 8 29to 32 65536 65536 165536 65536 65536 Trace header L 4 al f ani 20 9 33to236 65536 65536 165536 65536 65536 A E ene Dots oe Maa A 2 37 to 40 Offset 8663 8571 8484 8401 8320 11 41 to 44 Receiver Elevation 5031 5028 5025 5022 5021 Field File Number 9 4byteint y 114 14 12 45 to 48 Sor Elevati 5031 5031 5031 5031 503
260. grees Enter the angle increment used in the analysis The step will analyze all angles from the Start angle to the End angle at increments specified by the Angle increment Second seismic file name Use the Browse button to select the seismic file that will be cross correlated with the input reference seismic file 514 Resolution Usage The Resolution step provides a statistical estimate of the resolving power of the selected seismic data The results of the process are output to the console file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links None The results of the process are output to the console file Reference Hatton L Worthington M H and Makin J Seismic Data Processing Theory and Practice 1986 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mia input spw Es Resolution MAA A AA 515 Step Parameter Dialog Resolution Resolution Window start time ms 0 0 Window length in samples 200 Output Header User Def 1 Parameter Description Window start time ms Enter the starting time of the analysis window on the trace data Window length in samples Enter the length of the analysis window in samples Output Header Indicate the trace header field to store the results of the resolution calculation 516 Signal to Noise Usage The Signal to Noise step provides an statistical estimate of the signal to noise ratio of the selected sei
261. he first channel associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Last channel Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the last channel associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Channel incr Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the increment between channels associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Receiver line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line number associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file First receiver Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the first receiver associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Last receiver Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the last receiver associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Receiver incr Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the increment between receivers associated with a given record in the Cross Reference SPS file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the SPS Observer Notes file 180 Phase Matching Statistics File Usage The Phase Matching Statistics card data item is stores the statistical output of the Phase Matching processing step In addition to the phase rotation and the stati
262. he data volume Number of records The number of sort ordered records in the seismic file Traces per record The number of traces per sort ordered record in the seismic file Sample interval The time sample interval of the seismic file in seconds Samples per trace The number of data samples per trace in the seismic file Browse Select this button to set the seismic file name 560 Seismic Merge Usage The Seismic Merge step allows you to merge up to a total of five seismic files into a single output seismic file Input Links 1 Seismic file in any sort order mandatory 2 Seismic file in any sort order mandatory 3 Seismic file in any sort order optional 4 Seismic file in any sort order optional 5 Seismic file in any sort order optional Output Links 1 Seismic data unsorted mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo input 2 spw input 4 spw oe M input 1 spw input 5 spw merged output spw SSS A ate 561 Step Parameter Dialog Seismic Merge Seismic Merge vV Reset unique sequential trace ID Cancel Parameter Description Reset unique sequential trace ID If checked the SPW unique trace ID will be reset This is highly recommended as merged data files will often have overlapping trace ID numbers 562 Sercel SEGD File Usage The Sercel SEGD File step is for the direct input of SEGD data files recorded with a Sercel recording instr
263. he migration also requires a working data store Proper sizing of the working dataset size can greatly improve the processing speed of the migration The migration requires a working data store size that is approximately equivalent to the size of the output data volume This size is equal to the number of output bins times the number of output offsets times the number of output samples times 4 in bytes The Minimum virtual memory size printed during the initial phase of the migration is the amount of memory required for the data store If the amount of real or virtual memory available is not greater than this value the migration creates a disk file to use for the data store Disk input output is substantially slower than memory input output As such the best performance occurs when the data store can reside in memory For modest 3d data volume sizes the working file can be large In the event that the working file size is greater than available memory best performance is obtained by partitioning the output data volume and merging the resultant migrations once they have completed Tape Utility provides a convenient option for the merging process The partitioning process identifies all the input traces that are candidates for contributing to a given set of migration bins and creates an input data volume from the candidate CMP gathers For large apertures these data volumes can overlap 426 Partitioning 1 Identify available real or vi
264. header field Location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location number in the multicomponent receiver statics file 176 Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver static in milliseconds in the receiver static file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the output multi component receiver statics file 177 Observers Notes SPS Format Usage The Observer Notes card data item is used to store the relational acquisition geometry information for sources and receivers In the SPS lingo this is referred to as the Cross Reference file An example seismic survey with the corresponding source receiver and observer SPS files is illustrated in the Geometry Definition step p 243 Step Parameter Dialog Cross Reference SPS Format File Cross Reference SPS Format File Enter the cross reference SPS file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data B ExObs sps Field File FEN Incr Src Line First Channel Last Channel Channel Incr Recv Line First Recv Last Recv Recv Incr 1 24 104 127 25 48 131 154 1 24 106 129 25 48 133 156 1 24 108 131 25 48 135 158 1 24 110 1133 25 48 137 160 1 24 112 135 25 48 139 162 1 24 114 137 25 48 141 164 178 Card Data Customiz
265. heduler Parameter Testing Configure real time displays Preferences Processing Menu The New processing tab command creates tabbed windows for opening or building flowcharts The Open flow command will open an existing flow in the current flowchart tab The Close flow command closes the current flowchart but leaves the tab open The Open recent flow is not yet implemented The Save command saves the current flow If it is an existing file then it is overwritten If it has not been named then it issues the Save As command and you are then prompted for a file name 48 The View trace headers command opens a spreadsheet view of the trace headers of a selected SEG Y file If you do not have a SEG Y file currently selected it does nothing Trace Header Ranges Trace Header Values Trace Header Pinos Value Maximum Value Byte position Field File Channel CMP cwptine CMP Location Sourceline Source Locatation Receiver tf Field Fie Number 14 863 1 3600 14 2 2036 0000 1044 0000 2036 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Channel Number 1 998 1 3 2037 0000 1044 0000 2037 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 P 2019 2205 14 4 2038 0000 1044 0000 2038 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 oz 14 5 2039 0000 1044 0000 2039 0000 6023 6173 0000 2138 Crossline 2019 2205 PT T 5 37308 1 6 2040 0000 1044 0000 2040 0000 6023 Azimuth f 45780 1 7 2041 0000 1044 0000 2041 0000 6023 Offset
266. hen you will not be able to execute it 100 Executing a Flow inside the Flowchart Running a flow is a simple matter of selecting a processing step on the flowchart and pressing the Execute button or selecting the Execute command from the Flowchart menu Processing Seismic Dis New processing tab Open flow Close flow Open recent flow Save Save as View trace headers Map trace headers Submit to cluste Job Scheduler Parameter Testing Preferences Execute Command Below is a display of the console area at the bottom of the flowchart display The console will show any errors or warnings It also shows messages about the status of the job execution The execution of the flow is done on a separate thread from the flowchart seismic and map displays so you can continue working during a job execution Lal EA Processing sequence 1 SEGY Import File name C Data SamaraTest Seismic SNTest sgy 2 Automatic Gain Control 3 Seismic File File name C Data SamaraTest Seismic rest say DJ Gh I Execution Console 101 Executing a Flow on a Cluster This feature is currently in testing 102 Instantaneous Field QC Capabilities and Procedures A focus of the development of this version of SPW has been to simplify and automate field quality control Multiple new map displays have been implemented to enable rapid visualization of your survey Real time input of data direct from seismic re
267. here are no parameters for this step 369 CMP Fold Geometry Usage The CMP Fold Geometry step extracts CMP fold from the source receiver and cross reference SPS card data files Input Links 1 Observers Notes SPS Format cards mandatory 2 Receiver Locations SPS Format cards mandatory 3 Source Locations SPS Format cards mandatory Output Links 1 CMP Fold Image file mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Observer SPS file E file SA e EL receiver SPS file CMP Fold Geometry CMP Fold Image 370 Step Parameter Dialog CMP Fold Geometry CMP Fold Geometry Easting x first corner 0 000000000 First CMP line number Northing y first corner 0 000000000 Line increment Easting x second corner 0 000000000 First CMP location number Northing y second corner 1 000000000 CMP location increment Easting x third corner 11 000000000 Northing y third corner 0 000000000 Bin size in line 1 to 2 11 000000000 Bin size cross line 1 to 3 11 000000000 Cancel Tn Parameter Description Easting x first corner Enter the easting coordinate of the first corner of your survey Northing y first corner Enter the northing coordinate of the first corner of your survey Easting x second corner Enter the easting coordinate of the second corner of your survey Northing y second corner Enter the northing
268. hese new time locations of the data sample values are not exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Trace Amplitude Definition Select the trace amplitude definition Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Browse Select an existing SPW format seismic file or enter the name of a new SPW format seismic file to use for output from the process 666 Supergather Velocity Analysis Usage The PP Constant Eta Stacks step generates a file of constant eta stack traces where eta is defined as 0 5 V V nmo 1 A P wave stacking velocity field must be supplied and you choose the number of eta with which to stack your data the first eta to apply and the last eta to apply Input Links 1 Seismic data output from the
269. hird corner 0 000000000 Bin size in line 1 to 2 11 000000000 Bin size cross line 1 to 3 11 000000000 Cancel _ m Parameter Description Easting x first corner Enter the easting coordinate of the first corner of your survey Northing y first corner Enter the northing coordinate of the first corner of your survey Easting x second corner Enter the easting coordinate of the second corner of your survey Northing y second corner Enter the northing coordinate of the second corner of your survey Easting x third corner Enter the easting coordinate of the third corner of your survey Northing y third corner Enter the northing coordinate of the third corner of your survey Bin size in line 1 to 2 Enter the size in distance units of the in line side of each bin Bin size cross line 1 to 3 Enter the size in distance units of the cross line side of each bin First CMP line number Enter the first CMP line number This line number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 2 Line increment Enter the increment in line numbers between adjacent CMP lines 453 First CMP location number Enter the first CMP location number This location number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 3 CMP location increment Enter the increment in locations between adjacent CMP locat
270. ia Mi input 1 spw input 2 spw NY ES Compare Traces input spw 285 208 490 Step Parameter Dialog Compare Traces Compare Traces v Check trace values for differences Maximum variation 1 0000 v Compare trace headers Cancel Parameter Description Check trace values for differences If checked the two input seismic trace data sets will be compared sample by sample and checked against the maximum allowed percent variation that is entered Max variation Enter the maximum allowable percentage variation for differences in the trace sample values Compare Trace Headers If checked the trace header fields for the data traces with are compared and a failure will occur if they do not match exactly 491 Cross Correlation Usage The Cross Correlation step computes the cross correlation function for each pair of corresponding input data traces The length of the cross correlation trace is 2n 1 samples where n is the number of samples in each of the input data traces The zero lag value of the cross correlation trace occurs at sample n Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi Reference Data Set spw e Cross Correlation Mi Cross correlations spw Status Open 239 9 492 Step Par
271. ialog F X Trace Interpolation F X Trace Interpolation Design window width Use all traces in gather Specify design window width Design window width traces 31 Design window length Use full trace length Specify design window length Design window length ms 1000 Filter order 11 Parameter Description Design widow width Use all trace in gather Allows the window width to vary with changes in fold for pre stack trace interpolation Specify design window width Use this option to enter a fixed design width Design window width traces Enter the width of the design window in units of traces Design widow length Use full trace length Use this option if the design length is to equal the record length Specify design window length Use this option to enter a fixed design length Design window length ms Enter the length of the design window in units of milliseconds Filter order Number of terms in the prediction filter 541 VO SEGY File Usage The I O SEGY File step is for the direct input of SEGY data recorded with an I O System IV recording instrument Input Links 1 None The I O SEGY file is selected inside the step dialog mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart ES Documentation flo y El y 1 0 SEG Y File ds Output spw lt gt Status Open 121 4 542 Step Param
272. ibutes Velocities Wavelet Shaping e Le a Le Execute Abort Save SaveAs Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome Current flow 1 Geometry ST Y I The Processing Categories When you click on a button in the Processing Categories such as Geometry the list of processing steps in that category will appear in place of the Processing Categories list To navigate back to the Processing Categories list simply click on the Processing Categories button containing an up arrow at the top of the Processing List 35 Processing Steps Lists When you click on the desired processing step button it will appear highlighted in light blue as shown below To place the item on the flowchart select it with a single mouse click and then click on the flowchart where you wish to place the item You may also double mouse click on the item in the processing step list and it will be placed below the last item you selected on the flowchart The item may then be dragged on the flowchart to correctly position it into your processing sequence Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 S Lo J 5 me FlowChart Processing Seismic Analysis Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Help Wi Geometry EJ CMP Binning Crooked Line Binning i Geometry Definition Simple Marine Geometry o Le Execute Abort Save SaveAs x Open flow Close flow a D g
273. ic Trace Edit Sa Trace Edit Method Spectral semblance Power ratio Both methods Either method Spectral semblance cutoff percent 70 Power ratio decay cutoff dB 12 Calculate spectral semblance on receiver line basis x me Ce Parameter Description Trace Edit Method Select the analysis method s to be used to determine if a trace will be killed Spectral semblance The spectral semblance method uses the semblance between a single traces power spectrum and the average power spectrum of the gather as the basis for killing a trace Power ratio The power ratio method uses the ratio of trace energy in the upper part of a trace to that in the lower part of a trace as the basis for killing a trace This is often an effective means of editing traces that are contaminated with 60 Hz powerline noise which does not decay as a function of record time Both methods Traces will be killed only if they fail BOTH the power ratio test AND the spectral semblance test Either method Traces will be killed if they fail EITHER the power ratio test OR the spectral semblance test Spectral semblance cutoff percent If you choose the spectral semblance method enter the minimum semblance value you expect for each trace s power spectrum relative to the power spectrum for the gather Power ratio decay cutoff in dB If you choose the power ratio method enter the minimum decay of trace energy in dB that you
274. icts the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Trace Amplitude Definition Select the trace amplitude definition Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Browse Select an existing S
275. iew the functions available with the Cell Math tool The Cell Math tool consists of intuitive functions that can be used to alter the values in card data spreadsheets or trace header spreadsheets All we will do in this example is use the Interpolate function to fill out the remainder of the Source Locations SPS Format file Click on Interpolate 142 RE Source sps OB Source Line Source Loc Easting Northing Elevation Step 7 cont The complete source SPS spreadsheet Click on the red X in the upper right corner to close the spreadsheet Be sure to save your changes 143 Card Data Customization Dialog The utility of the card data customization feature is best understood through an example Consider the following job flow designed to compute automatic source and receiver residual statics HE Documentation flo ws input spw e Automatic Residual Statics j HH Source Statics Receiver Statics S Status Open 260 282 Double clicking on the Source Statics icon brings up the following dialog which allows you to set the file name of the output statics file with the Browse button and to customize the format of the output statics file with the Customize button Source Statics Card File Source Statics Card File Enter the source statics card data file name Customize Browse Cancel 144 Select the Customize button and the following dialog appears Customize Source Statics Customi
276. ill Browse Select this button to set the input auxiliary file containing the pilot traces 283 Filtering Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the Filtering Steps category Processing steps currently available are 2 Filtering BAX Adaptive Filter Apply FK Filter Apply Frequency Filter Apply Time Filter Butterworth Filtering Design Frequency Filter Design Notch Filter Design Time Filter Horizontal Median Filter Median Filter Wachter Amer Radon Demotipe Padon inverse CS Radon Transom Fierrne O Spall noise rier wet Removal O Time Yariant Bandpass Time Variant Butterworth 284 Adaptive Filter Usage The Adaptive Filter step is currently under development Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi Seismic File Es Adaptive Filter Mi Seismic File Status Open 143 101 285 Step Parameter Dialog Adaptive Filter Adaptive Filter Filter parameters Output type Filter length 65 Output filtered trace Filter coefficient 0 010 C Output raw filter coefficients Number of interations 1 Bandpass filter Window M Use bandpass filter Use window MV Zero weights every trace SPW format noise trace file Browse Parameter Description Filter parameters Filter l
277. ill be used to assign signs to source receiver offsets 382 383 Geometry Definition Example Source and Receiver Number _ m w 2 m w N a o o o _ 119 121 123 125 1 vvyvvyy 2 vyyvyy a v VYVYY i vyvvvy TEE vyyvyy e vvVVYY 2 7 vvVVVY E vvvVYY vvvvyvy A Source location vvvVvVY V Channel 1 VUXvvvv j vvyVvVV VY ha vvVvVvVVvVV Figure 1 2D seismic survey consisting of a 6 channel spread and a 25 m station interval The spread rolls off at the end of the line 384 RE Source Location sps Source Line Source Loc Easting Northing Elevation 113 1000 000000 1300 000000 100 000000 125 1000 000000 1600 000000 100 000000 385 Figure 2 Source SPS file corresponding to the survey illustrated in figure 1 HE Receiver Location sps Recv Line Recv Loc Easting Northing Elevation 1000 000000 1000 000000 100 000000 1000 000000 1025 000000 100 000000 1000 000000 1175 000000 100 000000 1000 000000 1200 000000 100 000000 1000 000000 1225 000000 100 000000 CON On al Qin o 117 1000 000000 1400 000000 100 000000 Figure 3 Receiver SPS file corresponding to the survey illustrated in figure 1 386 387 RE Observer Notes sps Field File Src Line Sre Loc First Channel Last Channel Channel Incr Recv Line First Recv 102 Recy Incr 104 106 108
278. ilter Usage The Horizontal Median step allows you to apply a horizontal median filter across the data traces of a gather or stack This process is very useful in processing VSP data for separation of up going and down going events Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory References Hardage B A 1983 Vertical Seismic Profiling Geophysical Press Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo ZA input spw eo Horizontal Median Filter output spw rs SELECT 103 21 322 Step Parameter Dialog Horizontal Median Filter Horizontal Median Filter Number of traces in window 5 Trace Amplitude Analysis Method Use true trace amplitude Use relative trace amplitude Cancel Parameter Description Number of traces in window Enter the number of traces in the spatial window Trace Amplitude Analysis Method Amplitude summing selection Use true amplitude traces True amplitude traces will be used in the median process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be used in the median process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another 323 Integration Usage The Integration step will integrate the data samples in each input seismic data trace Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order
279. ime Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the mute time in seconds at a specified offset and trace number in the output mute file Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset corresponding to a specified mute time and trace number in the output mute file Unique trace number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the unique trace number corresponding to a specified mute time and source receiver offset in the output mute file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the tail mute file 233 Time Filter Usage The Time Filter card data item is used to store the time domain impulse response representation of a filter in units of milliseconds Step Parameter Dialog Time 1D Filter Card File Time 1D Filter Card File Enter the time 1D filter card data file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data HE Time Filter Coefficients Cell Math Amplitude 2sa000000 0 223250 252 000000 0 222726 246 000000 0 213590 242 0000 0 202795 0 159793 234 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Time Filter Customize Time Filter File Format No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows ES Data header field Start column Length Time s Amplitud
280. ime shifts Horizon number Indicate the horizon number in the horizon file for which the residual NMO time shifts will be calculated 654 Constant Velocity Stacks Usage The Constant Velocity Analysis step generates a file of constant velocity stack traces You choose the number of velocities with which to stack your data the first velocity to apply and the last velocity You have the option to apply a stretch mute if you so desire With the series of constant velocity stack traces you may page through these stacked panels in SeisViewer and interactively pick velocity functions that result in the most coherent stacked sections Input Links 1 Seismic data pre stack in CMP sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Us input spw os Constant Velocity Stacks 317 296 655 Step Parameter Dialog Constant Velocity Stacks Constant Velocity Stacks Mute Control V Apply stretch mute First velocity 8000 00 Percentage 30 Last velocity 16000 00 Taper length samples 15 Number of velocities 10 First CMP line to analyze Interpolation Type Selection CMP line increment Linear C Quadratic No of CMP lines Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces No of CMP locsfanalysis C Use true amplitude traces First CMP loc to analyze 1150 00 CMP loc increment 50 00 Exponent fo
281. ine of the source gains file 216 Source Locations SPS Format Usage The Source Locations SPW Format card data item is used to source location geometry information An example seismic survey with the corresponding source receiver and observer SPS files is illustrated in the Geometry Definition step p 243 Step Parameter Dialog Source SPS Format File Source SPS Format File Enter the source SPS file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data RE ExSrc sps Cell Math Easting Northing Elevation 0 000000 0 000000 2140 000000 0 000000 110 000000 2139 000000 07 oon nanaan 919C nnnnnn 0 000000 220 000000 2137 000000 217 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize SPS Format Source SPS Format File Length Implied decimal Digits after decimal a Column Load Line Iv Location Lat Long xI a1 7 Easting Northing xl Elevation Static Depth Datum Up hole Water depth Date E E G G u G G G U a C Ei r r E 1 F rc Start col e p fe ie sito a7 ia a a O 2 Ca Y zk ao a aria a e a ja fe E fs ie Time MAMAAA AAA TTT r Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Load If checked indicates the existence of the entity in the file Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source line associated with a given record in the Source SPS
282. ine to analyze Interpolation Type Selection CMP line increment Linear Quadratic No of CMP lines Trace Amplitude Definition Use relative amplitude traces No of CMP locsfanalysis p C Use true amplitude traces First CMP loc to analyze 150 00 CMP loc increment 50 00 Exponent for normalization 1 00 Output SPW format seismic file name Browse Parameter Description Number of gammas Enter the number of gammas to use in the analysis A stacked section is calculated for each gamma linearly interpolated between the starting and ending input gamma The gamma increment will be Ginc last gamma first gamma Number of gammas 1 First gamma Enter the starting gamma for the analysis This gamma will be used for non hyperbolic NMO on the first output stack gt 0 0 Last gamma Enter the ending gamma for the analysis This gamma will be used for non hyperbolic NMO on the last output stack gt 0 0 First CMP line to analyze Enter the first CMP line number to analyze CMP line increment Enter the CMP line increment between lines to analyze No of CMP lines Enter the number of CMP lines to analyze 456 No of CMP locs analysis Enter the number of CMP locations in each analysis panel At each CMP location a range of constant velocity stacks will be generated from the first velocity to the last velocity in increments of Vinc First CMP loc to analyze Enter the first CMP location
283. ints in the running average smoother Median This selects a median smoothing operator Number of points odd Enter the number of points in the median smoother Polynomial fit This selects a polynomial fitting operator to approximate the long period statics Polynomial order Enter the order of the orthogonal polynomials to fit to the data 620 Receiver Statics Summing Usage The Receiver Statics Summing step will sum together two input Receiver Statics card data files into a single output Receiver Statics card data file Input Links 1 Receiver Statics cards mandatory 2 Receiver Statics cards mandatory Output Links 1 Receiver Statics cards mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Long Period A Statics Short Period FH Statics Sie Receiver Summing Output Receiver Statics A l O E 105 y E 621 Step Parameter Dialog Statics Summing Receiver Statics Summing Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 622 Refraction Statics 2D Only Usage The Refraction Statics step generates 2D Source and Receiver Statics card data files based on a one or two layer refraction statics solution The step requires as input a seismic data file with complete geometry header information and a First Break Time Picks card Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 First Break Time Pick card mandatory Output Link
284. ion category The types of migration currently available are E Migration QuE 2 D Dip Moveout Create Simple Geometry from XYs Finite Diference Migration Kirchhoff Dip Moveout Phase Shit Migration PostStack Kirchhoff Time Migration Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration Split Step Migration Stolt Migration 408 2 D Dip Moveout Usage Normal moveout corrections assume a layered earth In areas of significant structure the NMO corrections can have large residual NMO contributions To correct for dipping structures an elliptical dip moveout summation operator can be applied to NMO corrected CMP gathers Following the DMO correction the CMP gathers are more properly common reflection point CRP gathers We apply an integral DMO correction as described by Yilmaz see Yilmaz 2001 Seismic Data Analysis p 655 835 This is a summation operator applied to each source receiver pair There are no assumptions about regular geometry and the correction can be applied to irregularly spaced CMP gathers This step operates on common offset gathers for calculating dip related NMO corrections You must enter the first time in milliseconds of interest for dip moveout correction The algorithm pads the data volume on the order of four times the trace length and width for stability of the algorithm In that regard the later the first time of interest that you enter the less memory needed for computations and the faste
285. ions Gamma Enter the constant gamma used to compute the asymptotic source receiver conversion point 454 Constant Gamma Stacks Usage The Constant Gamma Stack step generates a file of constant gamma stack traces where gamma is defined as the V V ratio A P wave stacking velocity field must be supplied and you choose the number of gammas with which to stack your data the first gamma to apply and the last gamma to apply You have the option to apply a stretch mute if you so desire With the series of constant gamma stack traces you page through these stacked panels in SeisViewer and interactively pick gamma functions that result in the most coherent stacked sections Input Links 1 Seismic data pre stack in CMP sort order mandatory 2 Velocity card data file containing p wave stacking velocity functions mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart FE Documentation flo ba Converted Wave CCP spw Converted Wave CCP spw P wave Stacking Velocities i Converted wave Constant Gamma Stacks spw P wave Stacking Velocities Stretch Mut Converted wave Constant Gamma Stacks spw Status Open 248 126 455 Step Parameter Dialog Constant Gamma Stack Constant Gamma Stack Mute Control V Apply stretch mute Percentage 30 Taper length samples 15 w o FLA Number of gammas First gamma Last gamma First CMP l
286. ions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required Sheet Header field Streamer number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of streamers in the streamer definition file Data Header field First channel Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of the first channel on the streamer in the streamer definition file Last channel Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of the last channel on the streamer in the streamer definition file 226 Receiver line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of the receiver line associated with a particular streamer number in the streamer definition file First receiver location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of the first receiver location on the streamer in the streamer definition file Receiver location increment Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the increment between receiver numbers associated with each channel on the streamer in the streamer definition file Distance between channels Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the group interval associated wi
287. ip Moveout 3 D Dip Moveout Time window Dip limits Limit output time V Limit dip Dip limit at target degrees 20 0 Dip roll off band degrees 3 0 Offsets Apply anti alias filter Traveltime at target 2500 0 Output Range Maximum DMO offset 2000 0 Limit Min Max Maximum output offset 2000 0 Line f Number of output offsets 20 Location f v Verbose console mode Output SPW file name and working directory for temporary disk file Browse Cancel Parameter Description Time window The output time may be limited to decrease the run time and the amount of memory required for execution Start time on trace Enter the start time for DMO correction in msecs End time on trace Enter the end time for DMO correction in msecs Offsets Determine the range of offsets output by the 3D DMO algorithm Traveltime at target Estimated travel time of target event This time is used to estimate candidate CMP bins for the DMO correction Maximum DMO offset The maximum offset from the source receiver mid point to apply the DMO correction Typically this number should be no larger than 10 times the CMP bin spacing Maximum output offset The maximum source receiver offset for the output DMO corrected gathers 419 Number of output offset Enter the number of output offsets Maximum output offset Number of output offsets is the output DMO offset spacing Dip Limits The maximum allowable
288. is the use of SEG Y format as the default native format for processing data A simple graphical user interface reduces the learning curve and accelerates your analysis and processing time The SPW system is designed to be user expandable Parallel Geoscience Corporation will release the programming API interfaces for the SPW Flowchart version 3 to all SPW users in 2014 Since Qt is available with an open source license this will allow for easily adding customized processing algorithms and data formats to the SPW system Product Support For solutions to questions about SPW first look in this manual or consult the release notes file accompanying every software release If you cannot find answers in the documentation contact Parallel Geoscience Corporation via E mail support parallelgeo com or for time critical issues by phone 1 541 421 3127 The support email account is monitored daily by several people It is the best way to get a response since it is checked even when no one is in the office Please be ready to provide the following information e Your name e Your company name e The SPW version you are using e The operating system you are using e The type of hardware you are using e What you were doing when the problem occurred e The exact wording of any error messages appearing on your screen e Any other pertinent data set information 10 SPW Flowchart Version 3 SPW 3 Installer Available Online The SPW 3 ins
289. isplay may be windowed and a stretch mute may be applied if so desired Input Links 1 Seismic data in CMP sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic File mandatory Reference Taner M and Kohler 1969 Velocity spectra digital computer derivation and applications of velocity functions Geophysics v 34 no 6 p 859ff Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo PA input spw e Velocity Semblance output spw o gt Status Open 270 211 672 Step Parameter Dialog Velocity Semblance Velocity Semblance Number of velocities Mute Control V Apply stretch mute Percentage 30 Taper length samples 15 Starting velocity Velocity increment Semblance length ms Interpolation Method Window Control C Linear Quadratic Window output Trace Amplitude Definition Use true amplitude traces Use relative amplitude traces Parameter Description Number of velocities Enter the number of velocities to use in the analysis At time increments of Semblance Length 2 a semblance value is calculated for each velocity linearly interpolated between the starting and ending input velocities Starting velocity Enter the first velocity to scan Velocity increment Enter the value by which the velocity is incremented Semblance length ms Enter the length of the semblance calculation window in milliseconds Interpolation Method Select the interpolation type line
290. itude dB down Uset litude t se true amplitude traces Output Min Max Extended K Space Range limit the output using l Extend the trace k dimension DB Scale Control Use this value as the 0 dB value J Cancel Parameter Description Trace Amplitude Definition Select the amplitude to use as input to the F K transform either relative or true amplitude Use relative amplitude traces Selects the use of relative amplitude scaled traces in the analysis Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Extend the trace k dimension If checked the trace dimension may be extended padded to help reduce Fourier wrap around effects Enter the extended number Enter the number of traces to extend pad in the trace direction for the 2 D FFT dB scale control If checked the zero dB amplitude value may be entered Using this option allows you to compare two dB scale images Output Select the output amplitude scale either absolute amplitude or dB down from the maximum Output min max If this option is on the output amplitude values may be range limited by the input values Again this is useful for comparisons 317 F X Deconvolution Usage The FX Deconvolution step is a 2D multi channel noise filter designed to
291. ize Browse Cancel 223 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Statics List File Customize Statics List File Format No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows Data header field Start column Line Location Static shift time ms Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of source stations in the source statics list file Data Header field Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write source line number in the output source statics list file Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location number in the output source statics list file Static shift time ms Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source static shift in the output source statics list file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the source statics list file 224 Streamer Definition Usage The Streamer Definition card data item is used to define the coo
292. ked Mid range The mid 1 3rd offsets will be stacked Far offsets The far 1 3rd offsets will be stacked Signed offset Offsets in the signed both positive and negative offsets range will be stacked Specify the minimum and maximum offsets to be used 585 Unsigned offset Offsets in the unsigned absolute value of positive and negative offsets range will be stacked Specify the minimum and maximum offsets to be used Minimum Set the minimum offset range to stack Maximum Set the maximum offset range to stack Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Remove sample mean after stack If checked removes the average DC bias from each stacked trace Override Write 3D output to 2D format Browse Select this button to set the output seismic file name 586 Diversity Stack Usage The Diversity Stack step performs a sample by sample horizontal stack using a specified percent of the samples centered on the median sample Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file
293. ked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting restricts the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Trace Amplitude Definition Select the trace amplitude definition Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record CVS Browse Assign a file name to the output
294. l Example Card Data Sheet 1 of 1 Location 13 128250 200 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Receiver Statics Customize Receiver Statics Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets io Sheet header field Start column Length Receiver line number Ss Number of rows ES Data header field Start column Length Location number fs Time fs Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of lines Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver lines in the receiver statics file Sheet Header field Receiver line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line number in the output receiver statics file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver positions per receiver line in the output receiver statics file Data header field Location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location number in the receiver statics file 201 Time Enter the sta
295. le at tal oa alana Bed ca al ate Sates 70 Sort Data Tool ii A elects techn 67 Trace Amplitude Spectra LOO eesuacti5ec e ee 71 Artea Amplit de Spectra LOG aca a A ad a 71 Propagate Display Setting Tool viii iia a ii 71 Synchronize Scrolling Ol a se ceases ss sender asco dad estasia ves 71 Deleted Ptk Tool eci o E 71 Additional Display Parameters ToOl oooooconnccioconococonccononconnononoconn cono noonnccono cnn nono nconncns 712 Right Side of the Seismic Display Control Panel Error Bookmark not defined Displaying Seismic Headers Spreadsheets 0d dis 73 Map Displays tc e E tes Acco acs A E A a e A A AR 74 The TBS CITT AP soca A ia R a ATES TI Displaying a Survey BIS 78 Base Map Display Control Panel ts 81 A MA det nately 83 Interactive CMP Bin DEA Ai ia 84 Displaying Survey Fold Map A SS 85 Displaying Spreadsheets of Auxiliary Data oooonnccnnnccnociconnnnocnnonnconncconocnnn cono nonnnccnnocnnos 87 Early M te PACO oa 88 RECEIVE AOS A AE A ai 89 SAUCE a Acta 90 Velocity A potest Se eaten a Gas edvs a ae bata ea a a a as 91 Running the POW Chtt Ns 100 Naming and Saving a PFloWiiini di 100 Executing a Flow inside the Flo Wwe iaa ratas 101 Executing a Flow on a Cluster sac cass is 102 Instantaneous Field QC Capabilities and Procedures oooonccninconocccoccnononconncconocanccnnnoo 103 Real Time Processing sario ads 104 Real Time Seismic Dip Sta 106 Real Time Map Displays dolido 107 FPP GODNEGO etn aig E O 108 Sendin
296. limited supergathers Browse Use the browse button to select the input file Illustration of parameters in the Build Supergathers step 364 CMP Binning Usage The CMP Binning process assigns CMP line and location numbers according to user specified coordinate parameters Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo PA input spw CMP Binning output spw SELECT 186 22 365 Step Parameter Dialog CMP Binning CMP Binning Easting x first corner 0 000000000 First CMP line number 1 Northing y first corner 0 000000000 Line increment 1 Easting x second corner 0 000000000 First CMP location number 1 Northing y second corner 1 000000000 CMP location increment 1 Easting x third corner 1 000000000 Northing fy third corner 0 000000000 Bin size in line 1 to 2 11 000000000 Bin size cross line 1 to 3 11 000000000 Cancel Parameter Description Easting x first corner Enter the easting coordinate of the first corner of your survey Northing y first corner Enter the northing coordinate of the first corner of your survey Easting x second corner Enter the easting coordinate of the second corner of your survey Northing y second corner Enter the northing coordinate of the second corner of your survey Eastin
297. line definition file Data header field Easting Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the easting associated with a given coordinate pair in the output line definition file Northing Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the northing associated with a given coordinate pair in the output line definition file Point order index Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the point index associated with a given coordinate pair in the output line definition file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the output line definition file 174 Multicomponent Receiver Statics File Usage The Multicomponent Receiver Statics card data is used to store unique receiver statics for multicomponent data volumes containing P wave arrivals S wave arrivals and or PS wave converted arrivals Static values are stored in units of milliseconds Step Parameter Dialog Multicomponent Receiver Statics Card X Multicomponent Receiver Statics Card File Enter the receiver statics card data file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data HE MC Receiver Statics Add Sheet Del Sheet Cell Math Sheet 1 of 1 Location 101 000000 4 300000 16 400000 102 000000 3 070000 12 160000 i 1 840000 7 920000 104 000000 0 610000 3 680000 105 000000 0 620000 0 560000 106
298. located to write the receiver location number in the output Rotation Card file 212 Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of rotation estimates one per source receiver offset in the output Rotation Card file Sort Order Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the sort order of the data Data header field Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset associated with the rotation estimate in the Rotation Card file Rotate Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the rotation estimate in the Rotation Card file Unique Trace Number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the unique trace number associated with the estimated rotation in the Rotation Card file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the rotation card file 213 Source Gains Usage The Source Gains card data item is used to store gains associated with source locations Step Parameter Dialog Source Gains Card File Source Gains Card File Enter the source gains card data file name Customize Browse conce Example Card Data HE source gains Cell Math Sheet 1 of 1 Location 214 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Source Gains
299. location 60 To receiver Source index TS a3 Ol Receiver index 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 i 14 6023 6173 2 72 12138 2007 2077 14 6023 6173 73 132 12142 2012 2071 314 6023 6173 192 12146 2012 2071 14 6023 6173 252 12150 2012 2071 14 6023 6173 300 12154 2018 2065 14 6023 6173 348 12158 2018 2065 14 6023 6173 396 12162 2018 2065 14 6023 6173 432 12166 2024 2059 14 6023 6173 468 12170 2024 2059 14 6023 6173 497 12174 2024 2052 15 6024 6174 72 12138 2007 2077 15 6024 6174 132 12142 2012 2071 15 6024 6174 192 12146 2012 2071 15 6024 6174 252 12150 2012 2071 15 6024 6174 300 12154 2018 2065 15 6024 6174 348 12158 2018 2065 15 6024 6174 396 12162 2018 2065 is 6024 6174 432 12166 2024 2059 is 6024 6174 468 12170 2024 2059 15 6024 6174 497 12174 2024 2052 17 6018 6158 71 12134 2007 2077 17 6018 6158 143 12138 2007 2077 17 6018 6158 203 12142 2012 2071 27 6018 6158 263 12146 2012 2071 17 6018 6158 323 12150 2012 2071 17 6018 6158 371 12154 2018 2065 17 6018 6158 419 12158 2018 2065 17 6018 6158 467 12162 2018 2065 Ez 6018 6158 503 12166 2024 2059 an enio caco anann anna norn H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 de EE 1 1 1 1 1 a SPS Relation Record Record Analysis Tab 93 SPS Receiver Locations The SPS Point Record displays Receiver Locations in a tabbed worksheet
300. lume through rotation angles determined by the Two Component Horizontal Rotation step The rotation angles are read from a Rotation Card file In the case of 2D data acquisition with field oriented 3C receivers an option exists to limit the rotation angle to a user specified range Input Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory The trace header must be updated with source receiver azimuth and source and receiver component types The common receiver gathers should be sorted by 1 receiver number 2 source receiver offset 3 receiver component 2 Rotation Card file containing the estimated rotation angles optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo First Break Mute Function e f Two Component Horizontal Rotation Receiver Sort spw Rotations Apply Horizontal Rotation g Horizontally Rotated Receivers spw Status Open 377 123 439 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Horizontal Rotation Apply Horizontal Rotation Rotation angle v Limit rotation angle Minimum angle oo Maximum angle 90 0 Zz i Polarity Polarity of xlinef E V component Polarity of inline N S component l Apply negative of rotation cancel Parameter Description Rotation angle Limit rotation angle If checked the rotation angle used to rotate the horizontal components will be limited by the user specified minimu
301. lumns allocated to write the number of CMP lines in the output CMP static file Sheet Header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write CMP line number in the output CMP static file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of CMP positions in the CMP line in the output CMP static file Data header field Location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number in the output CMP static file Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP static value in milliseconds in the output CMP static file 154 Early Mutes Usage The Early Mutes card data item is used to store the mute definition for early top mutes Mute times are in units of seconds Early mutes may be interactively defined in Seis Viewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog Early Mute Card File Early Mute Card File Enter the early mute card data file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data RE early mutes 20 000000 120 000000 360 000000 480 000000 155 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Early Mute Customize Early Mute Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of mute locations sheets fi E Sheet hea
302. m and maximum angles Minimum angle The minimum allowable rotation angle Maximum angle The maximum allowable rotation angle Polarity Polarity of xline E W component Defines polarity of crossline component Valid values are 1 Polarity of inline N S component Defines polarity of inline component Valid values are 1 440 Apply PS Non hyperbolic Moveout Usage Converted wave travel times are not a hyperbolic function of offset The total moveout of a converted wave reflection can be described accurately with the double square root DSR equation This equation gives the complete travel time correction as a function of offset bounce point and gamma where gamma is defined as the ratio of compressional wave to shear wave velocity The Apply PS Non hyperbolic Moveout step uses the combination of P wave stacking velocities and Gamma functions to correct for non hyperbolic moveout Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 PS Nhmo Gamma Function card data file containing gamma pics mandatory 3 Velocity Function card data file containing P wave velocity pics optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Yilmaz 2001 Seismic Data Analysis 2 Ed p 1946 1959 Example Flowchart RE lt UNTITLED gt es Converted Wave CMP spw Apply PS Nonhyperbolic Moveout PS Nhmo Gamma Function PZA NMO Corrected Converted Wave CMP spw
303. main Apply negative of static shifts If this is checked the negative of the static values will be applied Apply header statics If this is checked the value in the Static Time field in the trace header spreadsheet will be applied to the seismic trace Bulk shift in ms Enter a constant statics shift in milliseconds to apply to all the seismic data traces 608 Automatic Residual Statics 2 D Only Usage The Automatic Residual Statics step uses a least squares linear inversion routine to decompose traveltime equations into source receiver CMP and offset related terms The pick times input to the inversion are picked automatically using cross correlation in a specified time window You control the window of data for analysis as well as the maximum allowable static that can be computed A damping filter can be applied to suppress any long period effects associated with the residual statics solution Options exist for removing either or both the residual normal moveout RNMO term and a linear trend from the statics solution Surface consistent source and receiver statics are generated and output for later application using the Apply Statics step Input Links 1 Seismic data NMO corrected CMP gathers mandatory Output Links 1 Source Statics cards mandatory 2 Receiver Statics cards mandatory Reference Wiggins R A et al 1976 Residual statics analysis as a general linear inverse problem Geophysics v
304. mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw a Integration Mi output spw Status Open 285 147 324 Step Parameter Dialog Integration Integration Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step Cancel 325 326 Median Filter Usage The Median Filter step is a single channel filter that may be used to remove spikes from your data or any other features such as the wow in radar which may be filtered by a median operator You enter the size of the window for calculating the median value Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mia input spw Es Median Filter M output spw SELECT 208 22 327 Step Parameter Dialog Median Filter Median Filter Window length in samples 5 Cancel Parameter Description Window length in samples Enter the number of samples in the window over which the median will be calculated The sample at the windows center will be replaced by the calculated median value 328 Notch Filter Usage The Notch Filter step applies a frequency domain notch filter to the input data The filter is specified by describing the frequency notch and the width of the notch Options exist to 1 apply th
305. maximum dip of the migration operator in degrees Limiting the aperture of the migration operator will decrease the run time and the amount of memory required for execution Limit dips If checked the maximum dip of the migration operator is limited by the following parameters Dip limit at target Enter the number of degrees of aperture in the Migration impulse response at the target time Dip rolloff band Taper length in degrees of aperture over which the Migration impulse response is tapered to zero Anti alias filter The summation of high temporal frequencies at each bin in 3D and at each CMP in irregularly sampled 2D data are prone to spatial aliasing To avoid 431 aliasing a 2D sinc interpolator with an apodizing Hanning filter is applied to spatially smooth the migrated traces Apply anti alias filter If checked applies a filter to reduce spatial aliasing of high frequency components of the migration operator Maximum frequency Enter the maximum frequency of the migration operator Restart In the case of system failure during migration the following parameters allow the migration to be restarted from a point closely preceding the failure Create restart file If checked checkpoint files will be created during the migration to minimize data loss in the event of a system failure Line interval Line interval to write restart and QC files The writing of restart and QC files can be time con
306. ment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of horizons sheets i a Sheet header field Start column Length Horizon number Number of rows il Data header field Start column Len T gt Trace index number CMP line CMP location PECE Offset Time Amplitude Other info Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 a cancel i Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of horizons Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of horizons in the output horizon file Sheet Header field Horizon number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the horizon number associated with a given horizon in the output horizon file 171 Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of time picks per horizon in the output horizon file Data header field Trace index number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the trace index number associated with a given horizon time pick in the output horizon file CMP Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write th
307. mputer Ga Network jE vmware host pl win7 A Control Panel El Recycle Bin Select Project XML File 22 If you are starting in a new area or starting FlowChart for the first time you will need to choose the Create Project command from the FlowChart menu When you issue this command the following dialog will appear The main project directory in this case New3DProject will be created inside the selected project root directory The project root directory can be any mounted disk on your system including networked disk drives f Project Creation Project Name Survey Information Seismic Data Processing Flows Seismic Display Project root directory C Set as current project Save Help Create Project Dialog Auxiliary Data Project name New3DProject Well Logs Images Data dinenel E Reports 2 Crooked line 3D Feet Meter Select project on application start up gt EME Browse Survey type e Land Marine Transition 23 The Create Project feature builds the directory structure shown below All auxiliary files such as velocities and statics are stored in the project Auxiliary directory by default All the flowcharts are stored in the project Flows directory Any output image files jpg png bmp gif are saved in the Images directory Reports output by the analysis processing steps will be saved in the project Report directory The output seismic data files generated during processi
308. mum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of refractor velocity locations in the refractor velocity file Sheet Header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line number associated with a specified refractor velocity in the output refractor velocity file 209 CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number associated with a specified refractor velocity in the output refractor velocity file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of CMP location per CMP line in the output refractor velocity file Data Header field Layer Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the layer associated with a specified refractor velocity value in the output refractor velocity file Velocity Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the velocity associated with a specified layer and location in the output refractor velocity file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the residual NMO analysis file 210 Rotation Card File Usage The Rotation Card File is used to store horizontal rotations output from the Two Component Horizontal Rotation ste
309. mum differential moveout gt Set number of ray parameters If checked the number of ray parameters is determined manually By default the number of ray parameters is determined internally Number of ray parameters set the number of ray parameter Percent pre whitening Enter the amount of pre whitening used to stabilize the least squares inversion in the presence of noise Minimum live traces Enter the minimum number of live traces that must be present in a gather in order to transform that gather 336 Mini mum Differential Moveout 337 Radon Transform Usage The classical Radon transform consists of a straight line summation over a range of ray parameters at each intercept value The generalized Radon transform allows for summation along curved surfaces which for geophysical applications may also be parabolic and hyperbolic functions of offset The Radon Transform step can be used to compute the linear parabolic or hyperbolic Radon transform from the space time domain to the domain of linear parabolic or hyperbolic ray parameter and intercept You specify the transform type the range of ray parameters in the output transform and the spatial and temporal taper lengths used to generate the transform Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Thorston J R and Claerbout J F 1985 Velocity stack and slan
310. n receiver order mandatory The trace header must be updated with source receiver azimuth and source and receiver component types The common receiver gathers should be sorted by 1 receiver number 2 source receiver offset 3 receiver component Output Links 1 Seismic data rotated into principal axis of the azimuthally anisotropic medium in common receiver order with strike angle of the principal axis in User Def 1 trace header mandatory Reference Alford R M 1986 Shear data in the presence of azimuthal anisotropy Dilley Texas Presented at the 56 Annual SEG Meeting Houston Texas Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo pa g 2C Inline and Crossline components spw 2C Inline and Crossline components spw First Break Time Picks Birefringence Analysis 2C Birefringence Analysis 2C pa gi Radial and Transverse compnents spw Radial and Transverse compnents spw Status Open 464 325 444 445 Step Parameter Dialog Birefringence 2C Birefringence 2C Window start ms 0 000 Window length ms 200 001 Polarity of xline E V component 1 Polarity of inline N S component 1 Rotate traces Cancel Parameter Description Window start ms If a First Break Time Pick file is not linked to the Birefringence step this value will indicate the start time of the analysis If a First Break Time Pick file is linked to the Birefringence step this value will indicate the s
311. n to display a history of all processing steps that have been performed on the data set from the first to the last process 558 SPW Demo File Usage The SPW Demo File is a seismic data file generated by the staff of the Parallel Geoscience Corporation that is designed to work with the SPW suite of software tools in Demo Mode When operating in Demo Mode the SPW suite of software tools does not require the use of a hardware key As such SPW Demo Files are meant to allow prospective users to evaluate the software without the need for a hardware key Input Links None This file is created by the staff of the Parallel Geoscience Corporation Output Links Output links from the Seismic File may be directed to any processing step that requires as input a seismic data file In this case execution of the flow will require that the user provides the file name of the SPW Demo File by left clicking on the icon to open the Seismic File dialog and selecting the input file name with the Browse button Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo RT DEMO SPW Demo File Status Open 339 Step Parameter Dialog SPW Demo File SPW Demo File SPW demo file name Number of records Traces per record fo Sample interval sec 0 0000000 Samples per trace fo Browse El Cancel Data description If the seismic file is linked to an existing file name the four parameter boxes provide a brief description of t
312. ncy Filter Mi output spw SELECT 320 311 299 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Frequency Filter Apply Frequency Filter Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this process 300 Apply Time Filter Usage Apply the input time filter card to the seismic data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Time Filter cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Pm H input spw Time Filter e Apply Time Filter M output spw LINK 262 216 301 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Time Filter Apply Time Filter Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this process 302 Butterworth Filtering Usage The Butterworth Filtering step allows you to apply recursively a Butterworth filter to your trace data in the time domain You specify the low pass high pass and high and low rolloff rates in decibels dB for the filter You may choose to apply the filter as either a zero phase or minimum phase filter Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Me input spw Butterworth Filtering output spw 303 Step Parameter Dialog Butterworth Filtering Butterworth Filtering V Low cut Low frequency Hz 10 0
313. ng are automatically stored in the project Seismic directory You need to place your SPS or UKOOA files into the Survey directory so the project can recognize them to be able to generate basemaps Usually the SPS files have extensions of sps for Source Survey files an extension of rps for Receiver Survey files and an extension of xps for the Cross reference observers notes files r EEES GO Computer Local Disk C New3DProject X 4 Search New3DProject p Organize v Include in library Share with v New folder H v g y E Documents E Name Date modified Type Size a Music s NA a Ji Auxiliary 11 16 2011 2 29 AM File folder Pictures g Vid d Flows 11 16 2011 2 29 AM File folder 11eos di Images 11 16 2011 2 29 AM File folder as J Report 11 16 2011 2 29 AM File folder I om er ee Le Seismic 11 16 2011 2 29 AM File folder mig Local Disk C AP Ji Survey 11 16 2011 2 29 AM File folder Shared Folders bh 6 items Project Directory Structure 24 The Edit Project command allows you to easily move projects As an example if you have built a project on a portable disk and then mount the disk again but it is a different drive letter you can edit the project settings and define the new project root directory All references to files in the project directories are relative to the root directory path Z le Project Name Survey Information Project root directory C
314. nge in value of the Monitor Trace Header will result in a change in value of the Trace Header to Modify based on the following two values Restart value This value will be placed in the Trace Header to Modify whenever there is a change in the Monitor Trace Header Increment value This value will be added to the Restart value for each trace header in which the Trace Header to Modify does not change 278 Trace Math Usage The Trace Math step allows you to apply various math operators the trace data amplitude values Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw Ip Trace Math Mia output spw Status Open 157 172 279 Step Parameter Dialog Trace Math Trace Math Type of Operator Y i X 1 a b retain sign Y i exp a X i b CyY i X 1 a b CxyY i X 1 1 X i CxyY i a X i b C Y i X i 1 X i CyY i a X i b C Running sum integration CyY i In a X i b C Absolute value Enter operator a 11 00000000 Enter operator b 0 00000000 cancel Parameter Description Type of operator Select the equation to that will be applied to the seismic data trace amplitude values Enter operator a Enter the value for the parameter a in the equations Enter operator b Enter the value for the parameter b in the equations 2
315. ngle Fold Profile Geometry Usage The Single Fold Profile Geometry step allows you to assign geometry for single fold lines and GPR data lines Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Profile Geometry File cards optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo 2 HA Seismic field files spw Profile Geometry File E Single Fold Profile Geometry oe Shot gathers with Trace Header Geometry spw SELECT 283 1 396 HE Documentation flo Seismic field files spw Single Fold Profile Geometry Shot gathers with Trace Header Geometry spw SELECT 252 21 397 Step Parameter Dialog Single Fold Profile Geometry Single Fold Profile Geometry Enter the first trace CMP location ho Enter the CMP location increment 05 Enter the origin Easting x m or ft 0 00000 Enter the origin Northing y m or ft 0 00000 Enter the offset increment m or ft 10 0000 Enter the azimuthal angle degrees 0 00 Cancel Parameter Description Enter the first trace CMP location Enter the CMP location of the first trace Enter the CMP location increment Enter the CMP location increment between traces Enter the origin Easting x m or ft Enter the Easting of the first trace in this line Enter the origin Northing y m or ft Enter the Northing of the first trace in this line Enter the offset increment m or
316. ngth of each gate The calculated gain functions may be output to an optional seismic file which allows you the option to remove the AGC functions prior to subsequent processing steps Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory Example Flowcharts Ze Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 Arima FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled EJ Am plitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing Filtering Geometry gt Miaration Me y e e a Le Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 762 Y 203 122 Step Parameter Dialog Number of operators 5 Overlap between gates ms 50 0 window Satine ns Window eng ms 1 0 00 1000 00 2 1000 00 1000 00 3 2000 00 1000 00 4 3000 00 1000 00 5 4000 00 1000 00 Equalize RMS amplitudes Ca Oe o Parameter Description Number of operators Enter the number of operators to design and apply on each trace Each trace will be divided into this number of time gates windows 1 5 Overlap between gates ms Enter the overlap between gates in milliseconds Longer overlap between gates results in a smoother transition between the gated windows gt 0 Start Time ms
317. nner in which closely spaced 2D profiles GPR or seismic were stored on disk so that they could be view as time slices Input Links 1 Post stack seismic data in inline order mandatory Output Links None This process writes directly to an output disk file Example Flowchart Bex E v 2 Documentation flo di Input spw I d Brick 2D Data lt gt SELECT 286 92 530 Step Parameter Dialog Brick 2D Data Brick 2D Data Output file name Parameter Description Output file name Assign a file name for the bricked data file 331 Copy Seismic File Usage The Copy Seismic File step allows you to copy a portion of a seismic data file into a separate seismic file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Mi input spw pl Copy Seismic File output spw 233 113 532 Step Parameter Dialog Copy Seismic File Copy Seismic File Number of Traces per Record Limit traces per record output No of first trace fi Traces per record 96 Trace increment fi Azimuth Range OK Cancel Azimuth Range Azimuth Range Limit by azimuth Raypaths In Azimuth Range C Uni directional Bi directional Starting azimuth deg 40 00 Azimuth range deg 10 00 Azimuths to output
318. nstant static shift ms 0 00 Correction velocity 7000 0 Application Mode C Coarse grain Fine grain l Do inverse linear moveout application Cancel Parameter Description Constant static shift ms Enter a constant static shift in milliseconds Correction velocity Enter the constant moveout velocity Static Application Mode Select the statics application mode Coarse grain This specifies the statics shifts will be applied to the nearest discrete sample position Fine grain This specifies the statics shifts will be applied as a precise phase shift operator in the Fourier domain Do inverse linear moveout application If checked inverse linear moveout will be applied to your data 641 Apply NMO Usage The NMO Correction step allows you to apply normal moveout corrections to your pre stack data using a single velocity or a set of velocity function cards You choose between a linear or quadratic interpolation method for interpolating trace sample values back to even sample intervals after applying the moveout You may also apply a stretch mute to your NMO corrected data A constant velocity moveout may be accomplished by inputting a correction velocity in the dialog and not connecting any velocity function cards to the step The NMO process automatically spatially interpolates the velocity over the entire range of CMPs in the line In the case of 3D data the velocity functions are interpolated
319. nter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Load If checked indicates the existence of the entity in the file Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Location Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Latitude Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver latitude associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Longitude Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver longitude associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file 198 Easting Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver easting associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Northing Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver northing associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Elevation Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver elevation associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Static Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver static associated with a given record in the Receiver SPS file Depth Enter the
320. number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the frequency domain filter coefficients in the frequency filter file Data header field Frequency Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the frequency value in Hertz associated with a given magnitude and phase in the output frequency filter file Magnitude Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the magnitude value associated with a given frequency and phase in the output frequency filter file Phase Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the phase value associated with a given frequency and magnitude in the output frequency filter file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the output frequency filter file 163 GMG Source Card File Usage The GMG Source Card File is used to store source statics information previously computed with Green Mountain Geophysics refraction statics software These files cannot be created manually in SPW Step Parameter Dialog GMG Source Card File GMG Source Card File Enter the GMG Source card data file name Browse cancel Example Card Data 164 GMG Station Card File Usage
321. o on see figure below At time increments of Semblance Length 2 a semblance value is calculated for each velocity linearly interpolated between the starting and ending input velocities 649 Interpolation Method Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to even sampling at the correct interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Trace Amplitude Definition Amplitude summing selection Use relative amplitude traces Selects the use of relative amplitude scaled traces in the analysis Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Absolute amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Mute Control Set the stretch mute control parameters Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting restricts the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction prior to one second Pe
322. o select or name an image file on disk It is the output SPW image format file for the F T Frequency slice data Input Links 1 The F T Frequency Slice Image receives the output from the F T Frequency Slice step Output Links None This process requires a SPW image format disk file Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo input spw Es F T Frequency Slice F T Frequency Slice Image 326 231 404 Step Parameter Dialog F T Frequency Slice Image F T Frequency Slice Image Image file name Browse Parameter Description Enter the name of the Image format disk file that will contain the F T Frequency Slice Image 405 F T Time Slice Image Usage The F T Time Slice Image step allows you to select or name an image file on disk It is the output SPW image format file for the F T Time slice data Input Links 1 The F T Time Slice Image receives the output from the F T Time Slice step Output Links None This process requires a SPW image format disk file Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo input spw Es FT Time Slice x F T Time Slice Image 406 Step Parameter Dialog F T Time Slice Image F T Time Slice Image Image file name Browse Parameter Description Enter the name of the Image format disk file that will contain the F T Time Slice Image 407 Migration This section documents the processing steps available in the Migrat
323. o way time ms 2000 3000 4000 Velocity 2000 3000 4000 5000 Delta T Functions Reference Function Delta T Velocities 6000 661 Dix s Equation Usage The Dix s Equation step will convert a set of RMS velocity function cards to interval velocity cards The interval velocity cards are suitable for input into a migration process Input Links 1 Velocity Function cards containing RMS stacking velocities mandatory Output Links 1 Velocity Function cards containing interval velocities mandatory Reference Dix C H 1955 Seismic velocities from surface measurements Geophysics vol 20 no 1 p O8ff Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo RMS Velocity Function ES Dix s Equation H Interval Velocity Function es gt Status Open 337 377 662 Step Parameter Dialog Dix s Equation Dix s Equation Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 663 PP Constant Eta Stacks Usage The PP Constant Eta Stacks step generates a file of constant eta stack traces where eta is defined as 0 5 V Vamo 1 A P wave stacking velocity field must be supplied and you choose the number of eta with which to stack your data the first eta to apply and the last eta to apply You have the option to apply a stretch mute if you so desire With the series of constant eta stack traces you page through these stacked panels in SeisViewer and int
324. ocation Number Receiver Line Number Receiver Location Number CMP Location Inline Number Crossline Number F Offset General Dataset Properties Azimuth E Data Dimension Number ecord Samples per trace 2 Frequency 2D surve Traces per record Sample interval X Trace Type 3D survey z Number of traces Sample format CMP Easting CMP Northing Input Sort and Selection Options CMP Elevation Resetto Internal Order Range Minimum Maximum E CMP Datum Elevation A ON ad limit value value Interval Group Primary sort key None x 1 Source Easting Secondary sort key None z 1 pore Nong ws Source Elevation Tertiary sort key None X E Source Depth Quaternary sort key None X 1 j n Source Datum Elevation Create record at Change in primary v Regather groups into supergathers _ Source Uphole Time y Receiver Fastina E Caj cos SEG Y Import Dialog 26 An index file is created for each SEG Y file used in SPW 3 These files contain important information used in the processing and are required to be present for processing and displays If they are not present they will be created by the processing or you may create them by using the Build Index command in the SEGY Import parameter dialog Note that the Sorting keys must be set to valid header fields before you press the Build SEG Y Index button and build the index file The SEG Y file format is defined by mappings of the SEG Y binary and tr
325. of the cross correlation Signature Input Options Select the method of accessing the Vibroseis pilot sweep Auxiliary SPW seismic file Select the seismic file that contains the Vibroseis pilot One pilot per record from an auxiliary file This option inputs one pilot trace in sequential order from an auxiliary file and crosscorrelates that pilot signature with the respective sequential record Therefore number of pilot traces should equal the number of input records One pilot per trace from an auxiliary file This option inputs one pilot trace in sequential order from an auxiliary file and crosscorrelates that pilot signature with the respective sequential trace Therefore number of pilot traces should equal the number of input traces 282 One pilot per record in the data file This option uses one trace from the each of the uncorrelated input records as the pilot trace for that record Sweep trace number Enter the trace number to use as the pilot sweep First trace to kill If you demultiplexed the data set with the auxiliary traces to recover the pilot sweep you may wish to kill the these auxiliary traces so that the do not appear on output Enter the first trace number to kill Last trace to kill If you demultiplexed the data set with the auxiliary traces to recover the pilot sweep you may wish to kill the these auxiliary traces traces so that the do not appear on output Enter the last trace number to k
326. of the statics The stacks show the sorted input file stacked in the analysis window with static corrections applied The stacks are accumulated in the frequency domain and back transformed for the final stack trace Numerical round off may cause slight variations when compared with stacks from the CMP Stack processing step Stack type may be source receiver or CMP Analysis stacks at specified intervals may be created to evaluate optimal convergence The analysis stacks are a selected subset of source receiver or CMP lines output to a specified directory A unique filename suffix is assigned automatically for each iteration Small subsets are recommended to reduce disk storage requirements Full volume source receiver and CMP stacks with user specified filename may be output for the final iteration An option exists to output to the console a summary of the static corrections generated at the end of each iteration The source and receiver statics output by the Stack Power Optimization Statics Step are applied with the Apply Statics step Input Links 1 Seismic data 3 D binned or 2 D in any sort order with geometry applied mandatory Output Links 1 Source statics cards mandatory 2 Receiver statics cards mandatory 3 Selected stack analysis files optional 4 Selected stack volume optional Reference Ronen J and Claerbout J 1985 Surface consistent residual statics estimation by stack power maximization Geophysics
327. ol 50 no 11 p 2172ff See Technical Note TN ResSt doc Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw El Automatic Residual Statics HH H Receiver Statics Source Statics Status Open 309 122 609 Step Parameter Dialog Automatic Residual Statics Automatic Residual Statics Picking window start time ms 1000 Picking window length ms 1000 Maximum allowable static ms 20 Long period damping factor 0 Remove RNMO term l Remove linear trend Cancel Parameter Description Picking window start time ms Enter the time in milliseconds of the start of the cross correlation window for picking the times for use in the residual statics calculation Picking window length ms Enter the length of the correlation window in milliseconds for picking the times for use in the residual statics calculation gt 0 Maximum allowable static ms Enter the maximum allowable static shift pick number of correlation lags in milliseconds gt 0 Long period damping factor This parameter controls the degree the periodic components in the statics solution longer than a spread length will be damped 8 8 Remove RNMO term If checked residual normal moveout RNMO term will be included in the matrix calculations of the solution If this term is not included in the matrix then the RNMO will affect the source and receiver static solutions Remove linear trend If checked
328. ol points Filter 3 If checked the first filter will be interpolated between picked control points Filter 4 If checked the first filter will be interpolated between picked control points Extend the trace k dimension If checked the trace dimension may be extended padded to help reduce Fourier wrap around effects Enter the extended number Enter the number of traces to extend pad in the trace direction for the 2 D FFT AGC before filter If checked an AGC is applied to each trace before filtering The AGC gain function is removed after filtering 294 Apply F K Velocity Filter Usage The Apply F K Velocity Filter step transforms T X domain data to the F K domain applies an F K pass or reject filter and returns the data to the T X domain A user specified minimum and maximum velocity defines the pass or reject zone Note the step is currently under construction Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi Seismic File e Apply F K Velocity Filter Mia Seismic File Status Open 103 4 295 Step Parameter Dialog FK Velocity Filter FK Velocity Filter Enter minimum velocity 200 Enter maximum velocity 1500 Specify trace spacing Velocity type Double sided O Single sided positive offsets O Single sided negative o
329. om Out Tool Clicking on this button widens the area of focus and decreases the size of your data Trace Amplitude Spectra Tool The Trace amplitude spectra tool button is not implemented PR Trace Amplitude Spectra Tool Area Amplitude Spectra Tool The Area amplitude spectra tool button is not implemented Ml Area Amplitude Spectra Tool Propagate Display Setting Tool The Propagate display setting tool button is not implemented mr Propagate Display Setting Tool Synchronize Scrolling Tool The Synchronize scrolling tool button is not implemented f Synchronize Scrolling Tool Delete a Pick Tool The Delete a pick tool button is not implemented Delete a Pick Tool 71 Additional Display Parameters Tool The Additional display parameters tool button is not implemented O Additional Display Parameters Tool 72 Displaying Seismic Headers Spreadsheets You may display the trace headers by first right clicking on a seismic data item on the flowchart then second by selecting the View trace header values from the context menu Display geometry sgy View trace header values Context menu for Seismic File PEA Zij Index Viewer NPR3 Binned ny _ Trace Header Ranges Trace Header Values Trace Header Minimum Value Maximum Value Byte position Field File Channel CMP cuptine CMPLocation SourceLine Source Locatation Re
330. ometry information Step Parameter Dialog Profile Geometry File Profile Geometry File Enter the profile geometry file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data RE Profile Geometry Origin Easting Origin Northing Azimuth 180 000000 33 000000 fi 000000 1 000 000000 F 180 000000 34 000000 fi 000000 h 000 000000 180 000000 35 000000 fi 000000 1 000 000000 180 000000 191 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Profile Geometry File Customize Profile Geometry File Format Number of comment records preceeding data 1 Data header field Start column Length Field file number CMP Line CMP Location CMP Location increment Origin Easting Origin Northing Azimuth in degrees Offset increment Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required Data header field Field file number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the field file number associated with a given record in the profile geometry file CMP Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line number associated with a given record in the profile geometry file CMP Lo
331. on number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location number in the receiver gain file 195 Gain Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver gain in the receiver gain file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the receiver gains file 196 Receiver Locations SPS Format Usage The Receiver Locations SPS Format card data item is used to store positional receiver location information An example seismic survey with the corresponding source receiver and observer SPS files is illustrated in the Geometry Definition step p 243 Step Parameter Dialog Receiver SPS Format File Receiver SPS Format File Enter the receiver SPS file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data wm ExRcv sps Elevation 0 000000 770 000000 2135 000000 0 000000 880 000000 2135 000000 990 000000 2134 000000 0 000000 660 000000 2136 000000 197 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize SPS Format Receiver SPS Format File Column Load Line Iv Location Lat Long Length Implied decimal Digits after decimal E xl lt i i Easting Northing Elevation Static Depth Datum Up hole Water depth Date xl OO w N E a G a E G G G a E a ai ia 5 1 Time a a Uo al Bl Be ba a i i al a PRAT E
332. on operator Input Links 1 Seismic data in offset sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in offset sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw A Offset Deconvolution i output spw lt lt Status Open 246 381 687 Step Parameter Dialog Deconvolution Offset Deconvolution Type Of Operator Pre whitening 2 0 100 Spiking Inverse filter length ms 150 0 Predictive Number of operators per trace 1 Overlap of design window ms 500 0 Range limit trace in design window Design window start ms 0 0 oo Design window length ms 500 0 3000 0 M Apply moveout to decon design window Linear moveout velocity 7000 0 Cancel Parameter Description Type of Operator Select type of deconvolution to perform Spiking or Predictive Spiking Weiner Levinson spiking deconvolution Predictive Weiner Levinson predictive or gapped deconvolution Prediction length ms Enter the prediction length in milliseconds Pre whitening percent Enter the prewhitening multiplier The zero lag of the autocorrelation function is increased by this amount to induce stability in the matrix solution Inverse filter length ms Enter the length of the filter to be calculated and applied in milliseconds Design window start ms Enter the start time of the decon design window in milliseconds Design window length ms Enter
333. ond selected header field Tertiary header Select the third trace header field to use for reversing traces This is combined with the other selected header key values to determine the set of traces to reverse Tertiary start Enter the start value for the third selected header field Tertiary stop Enter the end value for the third selected header field Import Import a set of picked trace reversals from a Trace Reversals auxiliary dataset Export Export the entered trace reversals into a Trace Reversals auxiliary dataset Add Row Add a row to dialog Delete Row Delete a row from the dialog 266 Trace Header Cell Math Usage The Trace Header Cell Math step allows you modify the trace header values of a seismic trace using standard mathematical operations Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo 2 Input spw Trace Header Cell Math Me Output spw Status Open 293 250 267 Step Parameter Dialog MM Trace Header Math Trace Header Math Type of Operator Add to sin Subtract from cos Multiply by tan Divide by asin Remainder of acos Modulus of atan Equal to Integer part of a a An pe A A Absolute value Fractional part of Angle Specification Angles in Radians Angles in Degrees Header Field
334. ons Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of velocity locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of refractor velocity locations in the refractor velocity file Sheet Header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line number associated with a specified refractor velocity in the output refractor velocity file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number associated with a specified refractor velocity in the output refractor velocity file 206 Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of CMP location per CMP line in the output refractor velocity file Data Header field Layer Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the layer associated with a specified refractor velocity value in the output refractor velocity file Velocity Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the velocity associated with a specified layer and location in the output refractor velocity file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of on
335. onstant 215 Example If the source receiver azimuth is greater than or equal to zero set the User Def 1 field equal to 1 Otherwise set the User Def 1 field equal to 1 E Trace Header Logic Trace Header Logic if Header Field Relation C Header Field Constant Azimuth Angle gt Rev Locatioi x or 0 0000 l Logic Header Field Relation C Header Field then Header Field C Header Field Constant User Def 1 None or 1 0000 else Header Field C Header Field Constant User Def 1 Non or 1 0000 OK Cancel 276 Trace Header Resequencing Usage The Trace Header Resequencing step is used to modify trace header values based on changes in other trace header values Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data file containing the duplicated trace mandatory Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo uE E i Input spw Trace Header Resequencing ii Output spw v lt gt Status Open 119 318 277 Step Parameter Dialog Trace Header Resequencing Trace Header Resequencing Trace Header to Modify None v Monitor Trace Header None Restart Value 1 0000 Increment Value 1 0000 Parameter Description Trace Header to Modify Select the trace header field that will be modified Monitor Trace Header Select the monitor trace header field A cha
336. ords to be displayed 249 Real Time Source Attribute Map Usage The Real Time Source Attribute Map process is used to display maps of source attributes amplitudes frequency attributes during the processing flow Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links none Example Flowchart Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 tejto FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W 1 Geometry EJ Processing Categories Real Time Near Trace Display slonik sps Real Time Receiver Attribute Map Real Time Seismic Display slonik rps Real Time Source Attribute Map Real Time Stack Display slonik xps a e se a e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Slonik Current flow 1 Geometry X 481 Y 397 250 Step Parameter Dialog Trace header containing attribute gt Reference locations Trace header User Defined 1 la C Initialize source locations from SPS file s L Coordinate reference system File name Add File D Average magnitude Maximum magnitude Scale to fit view Height pixels Scale to fit dimesions Width pixels L Scale to fit vertical Background image Scale to fit horizontal Fixed scale 10 Display background image on receiver spread Map title fee Load Image Unload image C Loaded C Configured
337. ormat Source Locations SPS Format ms geometry updated output spw Status Open 355 274 359 Example Flowchart for a crooked line 2D seismic survey RE lt UNTITLED gt input spw Receiver Locations SPS Format e Geometry Definition Observer Notes SPS Format Source Locations SPS Format 2 oo geometry output spw Crooked Line Fit e Crooked Line Binning Crooked line Definition Binned output spw Status Open 650 827 360 Example Flowchart for a 3D seismic survey RE lt UNTITLED gt Me input spw Receiver Locations SPS Formai ES Geometry Definition Observer Notes SPS Format Source Locations SPS Format eo CMP Binning Mi binned output spw Status Open 308 2 361 Build Supergathers Usage The Build Supergathers step outputs patches of pre stack CMP data defined on an inline and crossline grid The output of the Build Supergathers step is designed to be input to the Super Gather Velocity Analysis step located in the Velocities category Together the two steps allow for improved velocity analysis by increasing the fold of coverage at the velocity analysis location The user defines the patch size and the patch interval in units of inlines and crosslines Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart _ ___ _____ __ _ e__ 2 Document
338. ormat from the Processing List and place the item on the flow chart Locate the Formatted Text file created in Excel To locate the file double click on the card data icon in Flowchart and a Format File dialog will appear Click on the Browse button and a Select File dialog will appear that allows you to maneuver through your directory structure and locate the file Customize the file format so that SPW can properly read your text file To customize the file click on the Customize button in the Format File dialog and a Customize Format dialog will appear In the case of the receiver SPS file created in Excel we will load five columns Line Location Easting Northing and Elevation each of which is 8 characters wide The starting column for Line number is and the length of the Line field is 8 The starting column for the Location number is 9 and the length of the Location field is 8 The starting column for the Elevation field is 33 and the length of the Elevation field is 8 When the appropriate parameters have been entered select OK View the card data spreadsheet to verify the data values 149 Crooked Line Bin Definition Usage The Crooked Line Bin Definition card file is used to 1 store the best fit line to the scatter of CMP resulting from a crooked line seismic survey and 2 to specify and ultimately extract a random 2 D line from a 3 D data volume Step Parameter Dialog Crooked Line Bin Definition Crooked Line
339. oveout velocity 7000 0 Output operator SPW filename Browse Parameter Description Gauss Seidel Iteration Parameters Number of iterations Specify the number of iterations performed in the Gauss Seidel decomposition of the amplitude spectra End iteration based on amplitude difference If checked the step will continue until changes in component amplitudes from one iteration to the next do not exceed a user specified value Amplitude difference for exit Specify the value Type of Operator Select type of deconvolution to perform Spiking or Predictive Spiking Spiking deconvolution Predictive Predictive or gapped deconvolution Prediction length ms Enter the prediction length in milliseconds 703 Range Limit Range limit trace in design window If checked the range of traces used to design the deconvolution operator may be limited by offset Minimum absolute offset Enter the minimum absolute offset trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator Maximum absolute offset Enter the maximum absolute offset trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator Linear moveout velocity Enter the linear moveout of the deconvolution design window Deconvolution Parameters Pre whitening percent Enter the pre whitening multiplier The zero lag of the autocorrelation function is increased by this amount to induce stability in the matrix solution Inverse filter length
340. owchart HE documentation flo Seismic input spw e Minimum Phase Compensation Mi Min Phase Compensated Output spw Status Open 117 237 684 Step Parameter Dialog Minimum Phase Compensation Minimum Phase Compensation Input pilot is correlated Pilot length 10000 Pilot seismic file name Browse CASPYA Signature Input spw Signature Input Options One pilot per record from auxiliary file C One pilot per trace from auxiliary file One pilot per record from data file Parameter Description Input pilot is correlated If checked indicates that the pilot trace containing the source signature used to design the minimum phase compensation filter is a correlated seismic trace Pilot length ms Enter the length of the pilot in milliseconds Pilot seismic file name Use the Browse button to select the auxilairy file contains the pilot signature traces Signature Input Options Select the method of accessing the signature One pilot per record from an auxiliary file This option inputs one pilot trace in sequential order from an auxiliary file and crosscorrelates that pilot signature with the respective sequential record Therefore number of pilot traces should equal the number of input records One pilot per trace from an auxiliary file This option inputs one pilot trace in sequential order from an auxiliary file and crosscorrelates that pilot signature with the respecti
341. p between the sort and the output will result in the compilation of all linked steps on the Flowchart canvas Second if the flow to be compiled contains an intermediate processing step i e Copy Seismic Data between the sort and the seismic output the flow may be compiled and executed as the subset of a larger job flow on the Flowchart canvas Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file Output Links 1 Seismic data in receiver sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN Sort doc Example Flowchart R lt UNTITLED gt Source Sori Source Sort Copy Seismic File ws es CMP Sorted output spw CMP Sorted output spw Status Open 581 Step Parameter Dialog Source Sort Enter the SPW format seismic file name Browse cancel Parameter Description Browse Select this button to set the input seismic file name 582 Stacking and Summing Steps This section documents the processing steps available in the Stacking and Summing Steps category Processing steps currently available are 2 Stacking Summing Jog CMP Stack Horizontal Trace Sum Median Stack Offset Order Stack Real Time CMP Stack Receiver Order Stack Source Order Stack Variable Trace Mix 583 CMP Stack Usage The CMP Stack step generates a CMP stack seismic file from CMP sorted input data You may choose among stacking all offsets the near 1 3 offs
342. p in units of degrees Step Parameter Dialog Rotation Card File Rotation Card File Enter the rotation card data file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data RE Rotations Del Sheet 1 Location 2016 000000 Cell Math 5heet 19 of 41 s00 000000 55525031 211 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Rotate Customize Rotate Number of comment records preceding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of mute locations sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows fr oi fT i mo fa oo Sort order Data header field Start column Length Time Offset VW aae Unique trace number Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel i Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of lines Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver locations in the Rotation Card file Sheet Header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line number in the output Rotation Card file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns al
343. play a seismic file by using the right mouse button Click with the right mouse button on a seismic item on the flowchart and a context sensitive menu will appear Display geometry sgy View trace header values Context Menu for Seismic Display 62 The Seismic Display The SPW 3 Seismic Display is a very simple but powerful display tool allowing you to freely adjust the display parameters and step through or scroll through your data set Eu Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Spectral Decomposition Help W segoo1 Geometry A NPR3 Field Fies sgy
344. ply GMG Statics Static Application Mode Coarse grain Fine grain xI Apply receiver refraction statics xI Apply source refraction statics Apply receiver datum statics Iv Iv Apply source datum statics Apply receiver relative statics Apply source relative statics E Eu E Apply negative of static shifts Cancel Parameter Description Static Application Mode Select the mode of statics application Coarse grain Statics shifts are applied to the nearest discrete sample position Fine grain Statics shifts are applied as a precise phase shift operator in the Fourier domain Apply receiver refraction statics If checked the receiver refraction statics in the GMG Station file will be applied Apply source refraction statics If checked the source refraction statics in the GMG Source file will be applied Apply receiver datum statics If checked the receiver datum statics in the GMG Station file will be applied Apply source datum statics If checked the source datum statics in the GMG Source file will be applied Apply receiver relative statics If checked the receiver relative statics in the GMG Station file will be applied Apply source relative statics If checked the source relative statics in the GMG Source file will be applied 605 Apply negative of static shifts If this is checked the negative of the static values will be applied 606 Apply Static Shif
345. primary secondary tertiary quaternary each trace or last trace There are large number of tools on the right side of the Seismic Display Control Panel which facilitate the manipulation of your data display Sort Data Tool The Sort data tool button allows you to change the sort order in the visual display of your data A Zw Sort Data Tool Clicking on this button changes the sort order of your data using current sort keys When new sort keys are selected from the right side of the seismic display control panel clicking on this button implements the selection 67 Capture an Image Tool The Capture an image tool button allows you to create an image file of your seismic data display wr Capture an Image Tool When you click on the button a Setup image dialog box appears Zil Setup Image Filename Format Quality Colorbar Image format BMP Low y Yes Cancel Setup Image Dialog Box Specify a name for the image file and browse for the destination Then specify the format BMP JPEG TIFF PNG from the Image format drop down list Set the image quality on the Low High sliding continuum and determine whether or not to use the Colorbar Clicking OK captures the image and stores it in the project image folder Select Color Scale Tool The Select color scale tool button allows you to select from a variety of color scales to apply to your data Select Color Scale Tool Clicking on this button open
346. ptimum rotation angle is not determined through analysis allows rotation from a preferred azimuth Polarity Polarity of xline E W component Defines polarity of crossline component Valid values are 1 Polarity of inline N S component Defines polarity of inline component Valid values are 1 472 Wavefield Separation Usage The Wavefield Separation step is designed to extract the compressional and shear wavefield from three component or full vector recordings based on the polarization attributes of the P and S wavefield The polarization attributes of a three component recording are extracted through covariance analysis of a window of the recording Input Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory The trace header must be updated with the source and receiver component types The common receiver gathers should be sorted by 1 receiver number 2 source receiver offset 3 receiver component 2 Early Mute card file mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data file containing the P wave or the S wave three component wavefield mandatory Reference Flinn E A 1965 Signal analysis using rectilinearity and direction of particle motion IEEE Proc 12 1874 1876 Jurkevics A 1988 Polarization analysis of three component array data Bull Seis Am 78 1725 1743 Jackson G M Mason I M and Greenhalgh S A 1991 Principal component transforms of triaxial recording by singul
347. put directory With the radio button set to Specify input directory the browse button toggles to Input Directory Use the Input Directory button to specify the folder where the SEGD files are located Specify starting input file With the radio button set to Specify starting input file the browse button toggles to First Input File Use the First Input File button to specify the first SEGD file located inside the Input Directory to be reformatted Number of records By default all records will be reformatted Check the override box to specify the number of records starting with the first input file Sample interval ms By default the sample interval will be extracted from the general header If that value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify a sample interval in milliseconds Samples per trace By default the number of samples per trace will be extracted from the general header If that value is absent or incorrect check the override box and specify the number of samples per trace 547 Resample Seismic Usage The Resample Seismic step creates a copy of a data set with options to 1 resample to a specified sample interval and 2 change the start time and trace length of the data on the fly Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw ES Resampl
348. quations into source receiver CMP and offset related terms The pick times input to the inversion are picked automatically using cross correlation in a specified time window You control the window of data for analysis as well as the maximum allowable static that can be computed A damping filter can be applied to suppress any long period effects associated with the residual statics solution Options exist for removing either or both the residual normal moveout RNMO term and a linear trend from the statics solution The source and receiver statics output by the Surface Consistent Residual Statics Step are applied with the Apply Statics step Input Links 1 Seismic data NMO corrected CMP gathers mandatory Output Links 1 Source Statics cards mandatory 2 Receiver Statics cards mandatory Reference Wiggins R A et al 1976 Residual statics analysis as a general linear inverse problem Geophysics vol 50 no 11 p 2172ff See Technical Note TN ResSt doc Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Es NMO Corrected CMP Gathers spw Surface Consistent Statics H H Receiver Statics Source Statics Ei Status Open 176 189SC 633 634 Step Parameter Dialog Surface Consistent Statics Surface Consistent Statics Control Parameters Number of iterations 3 Maximum allowable static ms 20 00000 Analysis window length ms f 000 Analysis start time ms fi 000 Maximum static off
349. r Def 2 User Def 3 adda lt 515515050159 050159 1601 5 601 5 6 Iv ne T ENE ZEE ae m 35s a CR CEN CA EN Record in the file in bytes Cancel i Parameter descriptions Load If checked indicates the existence of the entity in the file Field File Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the field file number associated with the trace kill Channel Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the channel number associated with the trace kill Source loc Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source location associated with the trace kill Source line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source line associated with the trace kill 237 Receiver loc Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver location associated with the trace kill Receiver line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line associated with the trace kill CMP loc Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location associated with the trace kill CMP line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line associated with the trace kill Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset associ
350. r Description Traces in window Enter the number of traces in each analysis window 350 Time Variant Bandpass Usage The Time Variant Bandpass step allows you to apply up to five 5 different time variant bandpass filters to your trace data You specify the low cut low pass high pass and high cut filter points for each filter and the starting time for application of the filter You also specify the filter taper length which allows you to control the smoothness of the transition between adjacent filters Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw EJ Time Yariant Bandpass output spw SELECT 351 Step Parameter Dialog Time Variant Bandpass Time Variant Bandpass Number of filters to use 4 Filter taper length samples 50 Lo cut Lo pass Hi pass Hi cut Start time Hz Hz Hz Hz ms 5 0 10 0 100 0 125 0 0 000 5 0 1 0 0 70 0 90 0 1000 000 65 0 2000 000 55 0 3000 000 000 000 Parameter Description Number of filters to use Enter the number of filters to apply Filter taper length Enter the length of the filter taper in samples The longer the filters taper length the smoother the transition between adjacent filters Low cut Enter the low cut frequency of the bandpass filter in Hertz Low pass Enter the low pass frequency of the b
351. r field Start column Length Time Velocity 1 Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of velocity locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of velocity locations in the velocity file Sheet header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP line number associated with a velocity function in the velocity file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP location number associated with a velocity function in the velocity file Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the CMP locations per CMP line in the velocity file 186 Data header field Time Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the two way travel time in milliseconds associated with a given velocity pick in the velocity file Velocity Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the RMS or interval velocity value associated with a given velocity pick in the velocity file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the
352. r migration in milliseconds Target Allows the migration operator to be customized to the target time and velocity Traveltime at target Two way traveltime in milliseconds to the target event This time is used to determine candidate bins in the migration aperture 430 Velocity at target Estimated velocity at the target event Offsets The offset menu controls the range and number of the pre stack migrated traces per bin according to the following parameters Number of offsets per gather Enter the number of output pre stack migrated offsets per bin Maximum offset distance Enter the maximum offset distance to migrate The offset interval of output traces in each bin will be max offset distance of offsets Output range The Output range menu controls of the spatial range of pre stack migrated data The partitioning process identifies all the input traces that are candidates for contributing to the specified range of migration bins and creates an input data volume from the candidate CMP gathers Line If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP lines output by the algorithm Min Minimum CMP line number to output Max Maximum CMP line number to output Location If checked allows you to limit the range of CMP locations output by the algorithm Min Minimum CMP location number to output Max Maximum CMP location number to output Dip Limits The Dip Limits menu controls the
353. r normalization 1 00 Output SPW format seismic file name Browse Parameter Description Number of velocities Enter the number of velocities to use in the analysis A stacked section is calculated for each velocity linearly interpolated between the starting and ending input velocities The velocity increment will be Vinc last velocity first velocity Number of velocities 1 First velocity Enter the starting velocity for the analysis This velocity will be used for NMO on the first output stack gt 0 0 Last velocity Enter the ending velocity for the analysis This velocity will be used for NMO on the last output stack gt 0 0 First CMP line to analyze Enter the first CMP line number to analyze CMP line increment Enter the CMP line increment between lines to analyze No of CMP lines Enter the number of CMP lines to analyze 656 No of CMP locs analysis Enter the number of CMP locations in each analysis panel At each CMP location a range of constant velocity stacks will be generated from the first velocity to the last velocity in increments of Vinc First CMP loc to analyze Enter the first CMP location to analyze CMP loc increment Enter the CMP location increment between groups of CMP locations to analyze Mute Control Select the stretch mute definition Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting restr
354. r the algorithm will complete Input Links 1 Seismic data in offset order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in offset order mandatory References Hale D 1984 Dip moveout by Fourier transform Geophysics v 49 no 6 p 741 757 See Technical Note TN DMO doc Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Offset ordered seismic data spw E 2 D Dip Moveout Mi Dip moveout corrected seismic data spw gt SELECT 266 140 409 Step Parameter Dialog 2D Dip Moveout 2D Dip Moveout First time of interest ms 1 Cancel Parameter Description First time of interest ms Enter the first time of interest in milliseconds The later this time the faster the step will run and the less memory it will use 410 Create Simple Geometry from XY s Usage The Create Simple Geometry from XY s step is a utility that was designed for use with the Parallel Migrations application The step updates the trace headers of the input file with inline and crossline information based on easting and northing trace header values Input Links 1 Seismic data in offset order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in offset order mandatory Example Flowchart El Documentation flo ii Input spw Create Simple Geometry from XYs ii Output spw Bex SELECT 337 84 411 Step Parameter Dialog Create Simple Geometry from XYs C
355. raveltime equation may be attributed to one or more phenomena 1 The standard hyperbolic travel time equation is only a two term short offset approximation of the full travel time equation for P wave reflections in layered media 2 the earth media may be anisotropic The Apply PP Non hyperbolic Moveout step uses the travel time equation for transversly isotropic TI media described by Alkhalifah and Tsvankin 1997 The resulting moveout is a function of the zero offset time the source receiver offset P wave short spread stacking velocity and n eta where eta is an effective anisotropy parameter that measures the ratio of horizontal to vertical P wave velocity The Apply PP Non hyperbolic Moveout step uses the combination of P wave stacking velocities and Eta functions to correct for non hyperbolic moveout Input Links 4 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 PP Nhmo Eta Function card containing eta pics mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Alkhalifah Tariq 1997 Velocity analysis using nonhyperbolic moveout in transversely isotropic media Geophysics 62 1839 1854 Alkhalifah Tariq and Tsvankin Ilya 1995 Velocity analysis for transversely isotropic media Geophysics 60 1550 1566 Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Ma input spw Apply PP Nonhyperbolic Moveout PP Nhmo Eta Function mi output spw Status Open 645 Step Par
356. rcentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute tape length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Window Control If checked only a window of the scan will be output Start of scan ms Enter the starting time of the semblance scan window Length of scan ms Enter the scan window length 650 Group 3 Group 1 90 180 Azimuth Velocity Analysis for the case of three azimuth groups 0 60 60 120 and 120 180 651 Calculate 3 D Residual NMO Usage Calculate residual NMO time shifts Input Links 1 NMO corrected seismic data in bin sorted order mandatory 2 Horizon Pick cards mandatory 3 Velocity Function cards optional Output Links 1 Residual NMO Analysis card data mandatory Example Flowchart R Residual NMO Analysis flo H RNMO Horizons H VYelocities Calculate 3 D Residual NMO Residual NMO Analysis Status Open 360 59 652 Step Parameter Dialog Calculate 3 D Residual NMO E Calculate 3 D Residual NMO Correction velocity 7000 0 Interpolation Type Selection C Linear Quadratic Mute Control vV Apply stretch mute Percentage 30 Taper length samples 15 Smoothing Control E i Correlation window samples 20 Horizon number 1 Cance Parameter Description Correction veloci
357. rdinate positions of receivers in a streamer The receivers may be hydrophones as is the case in marine acquisition or geophones attached to a land streamer for land acquisition The Streamer Definition card data is linked to the Simple Marine Geometry step to update trace headers with the relevant geometry information Step Parameter Dialog Streamer Definition Card File Streamer Definition Card File Enter the streamer definiton card data file Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data KZ Streamer Definition Hee RX Line First RXLoc RXLoc Incr RX Separation Easting Origin Northing Origin Azimuth 25 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 25 000000 0 000000 25 000000 0 000000 25 000000 0 000000 50 000000 0 000000 25 000000 0 000000 75 000000 0 000000 225 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Streamer Definition Customize Streamer Definition File Format Number of comment records preceeding data 1 Sheet header field Start column Length Streamer number Data header field Start column First channel Last channel N a Receiver line w a First receiver location Receiver location increment a a Distance between channels m i Easting offset from origin a Northing offset from origin a AN il TT S Azimuth of stream degrees wo Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Cancel Parameter descript
358. reate Simple Geometry from XYs First CDP line 1 Inline X interval 25 0 First CDP location 1 0 Crossline Y interval 25 0 Easting x first corner 9 0 Inlines parallel to Y axis Northing y first corner 9 0 Output file is 3d Define 3 corners Define by azimuth Easting x second corner 0 0 Azi rom North along Y 0 0000 Northing y second corner 0 0 Easting x third corner 0 0 Survey corners define bin corners Northing y third corner 9 9 Survey corners define bin centers Parameter Description First CDP line First CDP location Easting x first corner Northing y first corner Easting x second corner Northing y second corner Easting x third corner Northing y third corner Inline X interval Crossline Y interval 412 Define 3 corners Inlines parallel to Y axis Output file is 3D Define by azimuth Azimuth from north along Y Survey corners define bin corners Survey corners define bin centers 413 Convert Time to Depth Usage The Convert Time to Depth step does a vertical time to depth conversion of a seismic file using an input set of interval velocities The input velocities are assumed to be in units of feet or meters per second If the input file to be depth converted is a GPR image and the input velocity file is in units of feet or meters per nanosecond you must first multiply the velocity values by 1x10
359. rgical Mute Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of mute locations sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows Sort order Data header field Start column Length Time Offset Unique trace number Pick order index Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of mute locations Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of mute locations in the output mute file Sheet Header field CMP line number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write CMP line number in the output mute file CMP location number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write CMP location number in the output mute file 229 Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of CMP positions in the CMP line in the output mute file Sort Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the sort order e g common source CMP etc of the data file on which the early mute was picked Data header field Time
360. ro will mute everything prior to one second Taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data samples between or beyond existing data Trace Amplitude Definition Select the trace amplitude definition Use relative amplitude traces Relative amplitude traces will be summed in the stacking process Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record Exponent for normalization Enter the scaling exponent Traces are scaled by fold EXP Browse Select an existing SPW format seismic file or enter the name of a new SPW format seismic file to use for output from the process 660 Tw
361. roject Teapot Dome Field File 14 Channel 111 Time 2122 00 Amplitude 0 000019 SS Variable Density Seismic Display 63 Seismic Display Control Panel The SPW 3 Seismic Display Control Panel empowers you to select parameters to best view your data Trace type Variable area wiggle v Horizontal scale 24 00 Primary anno 1 gt 4 150 gt Primary sort key Field File al Trace polarity Normal Vertical scale Z Secondary anno 20 gt Secondary sort key Channel ala 7 Orientation Left to right Display gain 00 500 Tertiary sort key None s Amplitudes Trace scaling Window length 500 0 Major time ines 500 Quaternary sort key None ES yla Reference Trace excursion 20 Minor time ines 100 Create record at Change in primary y aj o 9 aja Seismic Display Control Panel Left Side of the Seismic Display Control Panel set or adjust Trace type Variable area wiggle v Horizontal scale 24 00 Primary anno 1 E Trace polarity Normal z Vertical scale Secondary anno 20 Orientation Left to right z Display gain 0 0 Vertical anno 500 E Amplitudes Trace scaling Window length 500 0 gt Major time lines 500 Reference 0 19108640 Trace excursion 2 0 Minor time lines 100 Left Side of the Seismic Display Control Panel Trace type interactively adjusts the seismic display by type using a drop down menu Variable area is
362. rrlation window start time Parameter Description Zero lag time ms Enter the time to display the zero lag value of the autocorrelation If the value is zero only the positive lags will be computed If the value is equal to half the input trace length a fully symmetric autocorrelation will be output Autocorrelation window start ms Enter the start time in milliseconds for computing the trace autocorrelation Autocorrelation window length ms Enter the length in milliseconds for computing the trace autocorrelation The autocorrelation function will be generated from data samples between the start time and the start time window length Apply LMO to autocorrelation window start time If checked the autocorrelation window start time will be a function of offset Start time source receiver offset velocity Autocorrelation window start time 489 Compare Traces Usage The Compare Traces step allows you to compare two seismic data files and determine if they are identical within a user specified tolerance The results of the comparison are written to the console and the numeric differences of each trace are written to the output seismic file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Seismic data in the same sort order as input link 1 mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in the same sort order as the input mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo M
363. rs on the flow chart as a seismic icon Therefore compilation and execution of the Receiver Sort is performed by either of two methods First if the flow segment to be compiled only contains the sort step and the corresponding seismic output the flow must be compiled and executed as a separate job This is because the lack of an intermediate processing step between the sort and the output will result in the compilation of all linked steps on the Flowchart canvas Second if the flow to be compiled contains an intermediate processing step i e Copy Seismic Data between the sort and the seismic output the flow may be compiled and executed as the subset of a larger job flow on the Flowchart canvas Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file Output Links 1 Seismic data in receiver sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN Sort doc Example Flowchart R lt UNTITLED gt Copy Seism me es CMP Sorted output spw CMP Sorted output spw Status Open 577 Step Parameter Dialog Receiver Sort Enter the SPW format seismic file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description Browse Select this button to set the input seismic file name 378 Select Traces Usage The Select Traces step allows you to select seismic data on the basis one or two header words Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any
364. rs spw Azimuth Velocity Analysis Azimuthal Semblance Gathers spw Status Open 648 Step Parameter Dialog W Azimuthal Velocity Analysis Azimuth Velocity Analysis Number of velocities 31 v Apply stretch mute Starting velocity 7000 0 Percentage 30 Velocity increment 100 0 Taper length samples 15 Semblance length ms 29 0 Window Control Window output Mute Control Number of Azimuth Groups Trace Amplitude Definition C Use true amplitude traces Interpolation Method Use relative amplitude traces C Linear Quadratic Cancel Parameter Description Number of velocities Enter the number of velocities to use in the analysis A semblance value is calculated for each velocity linearly interpolated between the starting and ending input velocities Starting velocity Enter the first velocity to scan Velocity increment Enter the value by which the velocity is incremented Semblance length ms Enter the length of the semblance calculation window in milliseconds Number of Azimuth Groups Enter the number of azimuth groups to use in the analysis The input CMP gathers sorted into source receiver azimuth groups covering angles from 0 to 180 degrees The first group will contain all source receiver azimuths in the range 0 to 180 Number of Groups The second group will contain all source receiver azimuths in the range 180 Number of Groups to 2 180 Number of Groups and s
365. rt column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver static in milliseconds in the receiver static file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the receiver statics file 202 Receiver Statics List Usage The Receiver Statics List card data item is used to store receiver static information received in a foreign text format Step Parameter Dialog Receiver Statics List Card File Receiver Statics List Card File Enter the receiver statics list card data file Customize Browse cancel 203 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Statics List File Customize Statics List File Format No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows Data header field Start column Line Location Static shift time ms Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of receiver stations in the receiver statics list file Data Header field Line Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the receiver line number in th
366. rtual memory For Windows see Help Managing Computer Memory Virtual Memory or Pagefile For Linux see ManPages Swapfile 2 Divide available memory in bytes by the number of output samples the number of output offsets 4 This is the number of output bins that can fit into memory 3 Determine the number of complete inlines that can fit within this number of bins 4 Allow a little margin 5 The partition size is the subset number of inlines by the number of cross lines 6 Use the PreStack Kirchhoff Data Input processing flow to generate input volumes for the partitioned data set 7 Migrate each partition separately 8 Use Tape Utility SPW File Merge to collate the output volume from each of the partitions Monitoring Migration times can be lengthy depending on the migration aperture and the input seismic volume size The migration process generates quality control QC files for evaluation during the migration QC files are generated at a user specified line interval The output QC CMP gathers correspond to the gathers for a partial migration of the last completed inline of input CMP records The line number is printed to the console screen for reference Since the full migration is not complete until all records within the migration aperture have been migrated the purpose of the QC file is to monitor the migration for amplitude spikes dead traces and overall data character The QC file can be found in the spwQC subdirector
367. s 1 Receiver Statics cards mandatory 2 Source Statics cards mandatory Reference Farrell R C and Euwema R M 1984 Refraction Statics IEEE 72 no 10 p 1316 1329 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Refraction Statics First Break Time Picks H Receiver Refraction Statics Source Refraction Statics AAA MEA E 7 623 Step Parameter Dialog Refraction Statics Refraction Statics Solver Number of Refractors in Solution One C Two Weathering velocity 5000 00 Bulk shift sec 0 0000 First Refractor Velocity Value to use 6000 00 Second Refractor Velocity Fai l Do not use shot hole depths Cancel Parameter Description Number of Refractors in Solution Select whether to compute a one or a two layer refraction static solution Weathering velocity Enter the value of the weathering i e overburden velocity Bulk Shift Enter a constant statics shift in milliseconds to apply to all the seismic data traces First Refractor Velocity Enter the constant value to be used for the first refractor velocity Second Refractor Velocity Enter the constant value to be used for the second refractor velocity Do not use shot hole depths If checked the value in the Source Depth field of the trace header spreadsheet will not be used when computing the refraction static solution 624 Source Statics Separation Usage The Source Statics Separation step
368. s Mute functions are defined by time offset pairs They are usually picked on a few gathers in the dataset and interpolated between these control points sg Mute Card a Early mute file Mute format Early mute file name C Data SEG2010 Teapot Dome Auxiliary mute pics Format type SPW y 4 Line 120 Location 140 gt gt Offset 371 795 108 974 102 564 102 108 Two way time ms 14000 11000 8000 5000 2500 01500 4000 6500 9000 11500 SPW Early Mute Function Spreadsheet 88 Receiver Statics The receiver statics are displayed on a line by line basis You can move through the lines in a 3D survey by selecting the lines above the spreadsheet columns using the directional arrows CE A e Receiver statics file File name C Data SEG2010 Parsan Auxiliary freceiver stal File Browse Static ms 15 2 1216 10 61 10 5 6 04 77 Static time ms SPW Receiver Statics 89 Source Statics The source statics are displayed on a line by line basis You can move through the lines in a 3D survey by selecting the lines above the spreadsheet columns using the directional arrows x Zi Statics se Source statics file Static format File name C Data SEG2010 Parsan Auxiliary source sta Format type sPw y 4
369. s Hz 10 00 End frequency for analysis Hz 70 00 Cancel Parameter Description Start time for analysis ms Enter the start time of the F T cube End time for analysis ms Enter the end time of the F T cube Start frequency for analysis Hz Enter the value of the first frequency slice to output End frequency for analysis Hz Enter the value of the last frequency slice to output 497 F T Frequency Slice Usage The Frequency Time Frequency Slice step converts each trace in a data set into an F T data set then outputs the selected constant frequency slices Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 F T Frequency Slice Image mandatory Reference Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Mi input spw F T Frequency Slice F T Frequency Slice Image A SELECT 326 231 498 Step Parameter Dialog F T Frequency Slice Image F T Frequency Slice Image Record number to output Number of frequencies to output Start frequency for analysis Hz Frequency increment for analysis Hz Start output time ms End output time ms Parameter Description Record number to output Enter the record number to use in the calculation Number of frequencies to output Enter the number of frequency slices to output Start frequency for analysis Enter the frequency in Hertz of the first slice to output Frequency increment for analysis Ent
370. s x Kill bad records Audio alarm __ Sound audio alarm for each bad record Alarm volume Volume test Alarm Browse vmware hostiShared Folders Documents spw warning mp3 Report file File Browse C Teapot Dome Report DeadTracesReport txt xXx Send file via ftp x Append to existing file Send Trace Analysis Report via FTP 111 Sending Image Files via FTP in Real Time 112 The Processing Library Overview The library of processing steps is separated into categories The categories are as follows Amplitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing Filtering Geometry Migration Multi component Mutes Quality Analysis Seismic Data Spectral Attributes Spectral Decomposition Stacking Summing Statics Trace Attributes User Plugins Velocities Vsp Wavelet Shaping 113 Not all processing steps from SPW 2 are available in SPW 3 The standard use of each processing step will be described in the pages that follow If the step is enabled for only 2 D or only 3 D it will be explicitly annotated as such otherwise the process may be used with both 2 D and 3 D data Each of the Processing Step descriptions lists the mandatory and optional input and output links required for execution and contains an illustration of an example flow chart References are given
371. s the Color Scale Viewer dialog box from which you can select your preferred color scale 68 Color Scale Viewer default xml rainbow xml sequential xml spec decomp xml topography xml trial xml Select Color Scale Viewer Dialog Box Create Color Scale Tool The Create color scale tool button allows you to design your own color scale to apply to your data Create Color Scale Tool Clicking on this button opens the ColorScaleEditor dialog box from which you can design your own color scale 69 E ColorScaleEditor Red 0 Hue 0 Green 0 5 Saturation 0 Blue 0 Value 0 Sample Color Color Interpolation Linear Quadratic Color Segmentation e Continuous Segmented Ley l L Le Minimum D Maximum Open Color Scale Save Color Scale Save and Apply Apply Cancel Color Scale Editor Dialog Box Click on the color wheel to begin and adjust by using up and down arrows or numerical data entry in the primary color boxes and the color feature boxes Save your scales and apply using the Save and Apply button or use the Select Color Scale Tool from which you can select your preferred color scale Zoom In Tool The Zoom in tool button allows you to magnify the visual display of your data sS Zoom In Tool Clicking on this button narrows the area of focus and increases the size of your data Zoom Out Tool The Zoom out tool button allows you to shrink the visual display of your data A 70 Zo
372. seismic file into offset ordered records The Offset Sort step appears on the flow chart as a seismic icon Therefore compilation and execution of the Offset Sort is performed by either of two methods First if the flow segment to be compiled only contains the sort step and the corresponding seismic output the flow must be compiled and executed as a separate job This is because the lack of an intermediate processing step between the sort and the output will result in the compilation of all linked steps on the Flowchart canvas Second if the flow to be compiled contains an intermediate processing step i e Copy Seismic Data between the sort and the seismic output the flow may be compiled and executed as the subset of a larger job flow on the Flowchart canvas Input Links None This process requires an input seismic disk file Output Links 1 Seismic data in offset sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN Sort doc Example Flowchart RE lt UNTITLED gt Offset Sort Copy Mi CMP Sorted output spw CMP Sorted output spw mic File Status Open 575 Step Parameter Dialog Offset Sort Enter the SPW format seismic file name Browse Cancel Parameter Description Browse Select this button to set the input seismic file name 576 Receiver Sort Usage The Receiver Sort step allows you to sort a seismic file into receiver ordered records The Receiver Sort step appea
373. set 3000 0 Iteration Convergence Value End iteration based on static value aaa V Include residual NMO term Y Verbose console mode cancel Parameter Description Control Parameters Number of iterations Enter the number of iterations performed to calculate final source and receiver statics The value must be greater than zero and it is suggested that the value be no larger than 5 Maximum allowable static ms Enter the maximum allowable static shift in milliseconds gt 0 Analysis window length ms Enter the length of the analysis window The trace data used for cross correlation with the pilot trace will extend from the start time to start time window length Analysis start time ms Enter the start time for statics analysis 635 Maximum static offset Enter the largest offset used during analysis to generate source and receiver residual statics Iteration Convergence Value The option exists end the Gauss Seisdel iterative scheme based on a maximum static supplied by the user End iteration based on static value If checked the Gauss Seidel iterative scheme will end if maximum static computed in the previous iteration does not exceed a user specified value Static value for exit ms Enter the maximum static Include residual NMO term If checked a least squares linear fit will be removed from the final statics solution Verbose console mode If checked
374. sing the assumption that the signal portion of the data is predictable and the noise portion of the data is inherently random and therefore non predictable You specify the length of the filter window in samples the inline dimension of the filter window in traces the crossline dimension of the filter window in traces and the filter adaptation percent Note the step is currently under construction Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Reference Hornbostel S 1991 Spatial prediction filtering in the t x and f x domain Geophysics v 56 no 12 p 2019 2026 Example Flowchart HE FXDocumentation flo Input spw Es FXY Deconvolution Mi Output spw Status Open 320 Step Parameter Dialog MN F XY Deconvolution FXY Deconvolution Filter length samples Inline filter width traces r r Xline filter width traces 7 TE Filter adaptation 5 Cancel Parameter Description Filter length in samples Enter the length of the filter in number of time samples Inline filter width in traces Enter the width of the filter in along the inline direction Xline filter width in traces Enter the width of the filter in along the crossline direction Filter adaptation percent Enter the percent adaptation of the filter Use a smaller percent if filter destroys signal 321 Horizontal Median F
375. smic data The results of the process are output to the console file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links None The results of the process are output to the console file Reference Hatton L Worthington M H and Makin J Seismic Data Processing Theory and Practice 1986 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mi input spw Signal to Noise 268 1755C 517 Step Parameter Dialog Signal to Noise Signal to Noise Window start time ms 0 Window length in samples 200 Output Header User Def 1 i Parameter Description Window start time ms Enter the starting time of the analysis window on the trace data Window length in samples Enter the length of the analysis window in samples Output Header Indicate the trace header field to store the results of the signal to noise calculation 518 Source Energy Estimation Usage The Source Energy Estimation computes an estimate of the source energy to noise ratio based on an analysis of samples values prior to and following the arrival of first break energy A text file is output that contains for each source location an estimate of 1 the energy to noise ratio 2 the average energy and 3 the average noise Input Links 1 Seismic data in source order mandatory 2 An Early Mute card containing reference times to the start of analysis Typically these would be picked at the time of the
376. smic data in stacked order mandatory and sampled in depth Reference Claerbout J F 1985 Imaging the earth s interior Blackwell Scientific Publications Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw Velocity Function E Finite Difference Migration Mi output spw 248 185 416 Step Parameter Dialog Finite Difference Migration Finite Difference Migration Output start depth m or ft 0 000 Output depth increment 10 0 Number of depth samples 1000 Maximum dip Scale input velocities by Specify trace spacing Algortihm adapted from Seismic Unix Copyright c Colorado School of Mines Cancel Parameter Description Output start depth m or ft Enter the starting depth for migration Output depth increment tau Depth sampling interval Number of depth samples Total number of output depth samples Maximum dip Maximum dip of migration operator in degrees Scale input velocities by Input velocities will be multiplied by this number This scalar is used for adjusting the input velocities in the case that they were derived using Dix s equation and are not true interval velocities Specify trace spacing If checked allows for manual specification of the trace spacing By default SPW calculates the trace spacing for the stack as the group interval as you defined it in the geometry definition divided by two 2 417 Kirchhoff Dip Moveout Usage Normal moveou
377. so there are controls on the reporting of processing information into the console r zi Processing Preferences Multi threading C Use multi threaded job execution Default number of threads 2 _ Override number of job execution threads Number of threads Console Output Report records processed every N th record Pete Cluster Processing Job file target directory on duster UNC path WIN7 Win7Disk Development pac64 Browse Cpu count for each job 16 Output debug info C Output low level info Processing Preferences Dialog 51 The Seismic Display Menu The Display menu contains commands that allow you to display your seismic data and control the display New Seismic Display Open Seismic File Display Selected File Open recent Clear Selected View Refresh Selected View Remove Selected View Replace Selected View Add Seismic Layer Delete Seismic Layer Display Next Record Display Previous Record Display Next Layer Display Previous Layer Show Display Controls Display Preferences Tool Preferences Seismic Display Seismic Analysis At Right Left Up Down Ctrl V The Seismic Display Menu The New Seismic Display command creates a new display tab in the Flowchart Window The Remove current view command removes the current active display tab from the SPW Window The Refresh current view command is in development 52 Seismic Analysis Menu The Seismic Analysis menu contains
378. specify a pass or a reject zone Reject filter The portion of F K space defined by the minimum and maximum velocities will be rejected Pass filter The portion of F K space defined by the minimum and maximum velocities will be passed Taper Type Select the type of taper to use when applying the F K mute function Hanning A Hanning taper is specified by the equation x n 0 5 0 5 cos 2 pi n N Hamming A Hamming taper is specified by the equation x n 0 54 0 46 cos 2 pi n N Blackman A Blackman taper is specified by the equation x n 0 42 0 5 cos 2 pi n N 0 08 cos 4 pi n N No taper No taper will be applied to the mute This may result in problems in later processing steps due to Gibbs effect Taper length ms Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone 297 Frequency He A Weserarvises ler Waverertbe ir Single sided negative offsets Single sided positive offsets Double sided Types of FK Velocity filters 298 Apply Frequency Filter Usage Apply the input frequency filter card to the seismic data Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Frequency Filter cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo 2 H input spw Frequency Filter Apply Freque
379. st acceptable negative value Negative values greater than the clipping lower limit are replaced with the clipping lower limit 125 Random Noise Usage The Random Noise step allows you to Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory Example Flowchart a Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 baka FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled E Am plitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display j Editing Jr Filtering e Le e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow 4 New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome X 843 Y 260 126 Step Parameter Dialog Signal amplitude estimation mode Single channel _ Multi channel Signal amplitude estimation type RMS Amplitude _ Average magnitude _ Max magnitude Parameter Description Signal amplitude estimation mode Select single channel of multi channel Signal amplitude estimation type Select Signal to noise ratio Enter the desired signal to noise ratio 127 Spherical Divergence Correction Usage The spherical divergence correction is designed to compensate for the decrease in seismic amplitude as a wavefront propagates away from the source location The Spherical Divergence Corr
380. stment 3 AAA E Card Data R Z eceiver Statics Receiver Statics List efractor Velocities Residual NMO Analysis ource Gains Source Locations SPS Format ource Statics Source Statics List jajajaj E El a E 3 3 2 a Surgical Mutes PA tiyiBinning o o Source Locations SPS Format n S Analysis Source Statics Pata Source Statics List Streamer Definition O vel Unable to open survey note file Lo 7 FT lt UNTITLED gt Creating new file Lox omponent Preprocs flo flo Comp Brute Stack omp Brute Stack compile rocessing steps rocessing links pile 4 Source sps Step 3 Double left click on the icon to access the spreadsheet of data values Since the data file is currently empty Flowchart will issue a warning message stating that it is unable to open the specified file and that a new file will be created Click OK RE Source sps Source Line Source Loc Easting Northing Elevation Step 3 cont An example of an empty Source Locations SPS Format file 139 FZ Source sps aaa Add Row Source Line Source Loc Easting l Northing Elevation Rows In Spreadsheet Rows In Spreadsheet Enter number of rows fi 0 Cance Step 4 You can add a row at a time to the empty data file by using the Add Row button or add multiple rows by clicking on the Add Row button while simultaneously pressing the Ctrl key on your keyboard I
381. suming Therefore this option should only be used for prolonged migration runs gt 3days Create QC SPW file If checked QC files will be generated at the user specified line intervals The output QC CMP gathers correspond to the gathers for a partial migration of the last completed inline of input CMP records and can be used to monitor the quality of the migration It is recommended to create QC files during initial testing Restart migration If checked the migration is of a restart file and is restarted from the last checkpoint Record Checks the console file for the input record number that corresponds with the last saved checkpoint file The migration can be restarted from this point Verbose console mode If checked allows for the user to view a running summary of migrated traces and aperture bins Output SPW file name and working directory for temporary disk file The Browse button allows selection of the migrated output data volume file name 432 Split Step Migration 2 D only Usage The Split Step Migration step implements a split step frequency domain depth migration of post stack data The input velocity field is assumed to be an interval velocity field that was derived from the stacking velocity field via Dix Equation Input Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in stacked order mandatory and sampled in depth
382. t New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome Current flow 1 Geometry X 753 Y 45 Processing Step List 36 Console Display The Console Display at the bottom of the flowchart shows the messages from the execution of your flows The first messages will show the list of processing steps being executed followed by any output warnings and the status as the processing steps are executed Critical messages may be highlighted in red in the console window fa Open tiow Close tlow Ci EE KD le New flow Help Processing sequence Reading SEGY index file for 1 Seismic File NPR3 Bin Sort sgy Mo 6 Seismic File urrent project Teapot Dome X 889 Y 485 The FlowChart Console Display 37 Menu Items The SPW 3 application menu bar contains the following menus e FlowChart e Processing e Seismic Analysis e Seismic Display e Attribute Map e Survey e Picking e Help Menu z Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 FlowChart Processing Seismic Analysis Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W 1 Geometry EA Source Attribute EJ SPW 3 0 Menu 38 FlowChart Menu The FlowChart menu shown below has a number of tools available for project management FlowChart Processing Select Project Create Project Edit Current Project Set Startup Project Set Working Directory Close Currrent Tab Analyze SEGY File Analyze SEGD File Analyze SPS File Anal
383. t Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic attribute data in any sort order mandatory Reference Taner M T Koehler F Sheriff R E 1979 Complex Seismic Trace Analysis Geophysics v 44 no 6 p 1041 1063 Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Me input spw E Instantaneous Frequency Mi input spw 263 230 509 Step Parameter Dialog Instantaneous Frequency x Instantaneous Frequency Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 510 Instantaneous Phase Usage The Instantaneous Phase step calculates instantaneous phase attribute for each trace and outputs each as a seismic trace in the output seismic file This attribute is a measure of the continuity of events on a seismic section Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic attribute data in any sort order mandatory Reference Taner M T Koehler F Sheriff R E 1979 Complex Seismic Trace Analysis Geophysics v 44 no 6 p 1041 1063 Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo Me input spw Es Instantaneous Phase input spw 187 295 511 Step Parameter Dialog Instantaneous Phase Instantaneous Phase Cancel Parameter Description There are no parameters for this step 512 Phase Matching Usage The Phase Matching step computes the constant phase rotation and
384. t corrections assume a horizontally layered earth In areas of significant structure the NMO corrections can have large residual NMO contributions To correct for dipping structures an elliptical dip moveout summation operator can be applied to NMO corrected CMP gathers Following the DMO correction the CMP gathers are more properly common reflection point CRP gathers We apply an integral DMO correction as described by Yilmaz see Yilmaz 2001 Seismic Data Analysis p 655 835 This is a summation operator applied to each source receiver pair There are no assumptions about regular geometry and the correction can be applied to irregularly spaced CMP gathers The summation operator is applied at a user specified number of evenly spaced offsets located along an axis connecting the source and receiver These DMO corrected traces are then summed at each bin location For 3D datasets the summation at each bin can cause the resulting gathers to be spatially aliased To avoid aliasing a 2D sinc interpolator with an apodizing Hanning filter is applied to spatially smooth the DMO corrected traces Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 None The DMO corrected data are output to an auxiliary disc file Reference See Technical Note TN DMO doc Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo 3D seismic data input spw E 3 D Dip Moveout SELECT 235 147 418 Step Parameter Dialog 3 D D
385. t stack stochastic inversion Geophysics 50 p 2727 2741 Hampson D 1991 Inverse velocity stacking for multiple elimination Journal of the Canadian Society of Exploration Geophysics 22 p 44 55 Example Flowchart RE lt UNTITLED gt ME input gather spw e Radon Transform Me transformed gather spw Status Open 338 Step Parameter Dialog Radon Transform Radon Transform Transform Linear Hyperbolic Parabolic Inverse power weighting T Use inverse power weighting Inverse power value Model moveout Minimum differential moveout Maximum differential moveout Tapers Spatial taper length Ray parameter taper length Time taper length N POE Percent pre whitening Minimum live traces Cancel Parameter Description Transform Select the type of Radon transform to perform i Linear If selected a transform will be performed from the domain of space and time to the domain of ray parameter and intercept Parabolic If selected a transform will be performed from the domain of space and time to the domain of parabolic ray parameter and intercept Hyperbolic If selected a transform will be performed from the domain of space and time to the domain of hyperbolic ray parameter and intercept Inverse power weighting If checked a weighting scheme is applied to the input data prior to computing the transform Not Recommended Model moveout Set
386. t using the primary relational operator 274 Logic If checked the Logic option allows selection of a secondary header field using andjor logic Header Field Select the secondary trace header field to be tested Relation Select the secondary relational operator Header Field If selected the primary trace header field will be evaluated against the chosen header field using the secondary relational operator Constant If selected the primary trace header field will be evaluated against the user supplied constant using the secondary relational operator then Define the trace header operation to be performed in the case that the if conditions are satisfied Header Field Select the trace header field to be modified in the case that the if conditions are satisfied Header Field If selected the header field selected above will be set equal to the chosen header field Constant If selected the header field selected above will be set equal to the user supplied constant else Define the trace header operation to be performed in the case that the if conditions are not satisfied Header Field Select the trace header field to be modified in the case that the if conditions are not satisfied Header Field If selected the header field selected above will be set equal to the chosen header field Constant If selected the header field selected above will be set equal to the user supplied c
387. talin eh E A iota 675 Wavelet Shaping ter tec thu a ca cates 678 Apply Deconvolution Operators ccccceccceesseceseceeceeeeeeeseeceseceseeeeeeesseecsaeceeeseneensees 679 Do A O A a a 681 Minimum Phase CoOmpeasation is 684 Offs t Dec nvolution AS 687 Receiver Deconvolutioti A AA O Ai 690 Source Deconvol ti iir dd 693 A 696 Special WINE 699 Surface Consistent Decony Ohition sa Wisssshacds eee esses 702 Time Variant DeCOonvolution cccccccscccessssceceessssecccssssececeessececeeessseeeceesseeeeeettsaeees 705 Wavelet Estimation Seismic DU ever sco neaean 708 Wavelet Estimation Seismic Well in atea 711 Introduction to SPW Welcome to Seismic Processing Workshop SPW SPW is a seismic processing solution written by Parallel Geoscience Corporation SPW was originally written for the Macintosh computer platform and has been redesigned and rewritten for the third time version 3 using the Qt by Nokia cross platform framework SPW is currently available and has been tested on the Windows 7 Windows Vista Windows XP Windows 2003 Server and Windows 2008 HPC Server operating systems Linux and Macintosh OSX versions will be available sometime in 2014 The SPW version 3 Flowchart has adopted a project model for data management Flowchart allows you to create or select a project build processing flows set the parameters for the processing steps and display seismic data and maps Another significant change in SPW 3
388. taller package msi is available on the Parallel Geoscience ftp site The ftp site is anonymous access so there is no need for a user name and password To access the ftp site point your ftp client or your web browser at ftp ftp parallelgeo com e00 Index of ftp ftp parallelgeo com AA Index of ftp ftp parallelgeo com 3 Up to higher level directory Name Size Last Modified B miscellaneous 1 11 11 12 00 00 AM E spw_Products 7 7 09 12 00 00 AM E spw_users 10 27 11 3 05 00 AM Slideshows 10 10 11 10 32 00 PM Ed incoming 11 10 11 2 44 00 PM PP oo ftp parallelgeo com Directory listing 11 Select the SPW_ Products directory then select the Windows directory and finally select the SPW3Current directory You will see a directory listing as shown below Yahoo News x Q VMware Dow x 4 Marriott Find x FireFTP d gt ftp ftp parallelgeo com SPW_Products Windows SPW3Current vie Index of ftp ftp parallelgeo com SPW_Products Windows SPW3Current x J El index of ftp x l a y Google a A Most Visited i Google Maps Wikipedia 7 News Popular bsd18 infinolog EJ Bookmarks y Index of ftp ftp parallelgeo com SPW_Products Windows SPW3Current a Up to higher level directory Name Size E SPW3 manual rev 3 docx 12775 KB SPW3_0_1111installer msi 37613 KB SPW 3 Current Release Directory Last Modified 2 1 11 11 12 11 12
389. tant rotation angle C Angle in radians Third rotation Parameter Description Number of rotations Indicate the number of rotations to be performed First rotation Number of rotations gt 1 Rotation axis Select the component axis about which to perform this rotation Header rotation angle If the Header rotation angle radio button is selected then the rotation angle will be read from the trace header field selected in the adjacent drop down menu Constant rotation angle If the Constant rotation angle radio button is selected then the rotation angle will be read from the user supplied value in the adjacent text entry box Angle in radians If checked the rotation angle will be read in units of radians Otherwise the rotation angle will be read in units of degrees Second rotation Number of rotations gt 2 467 Rotation axis Select the component axis about which to perform this rotation Header rotation angle If the Header rotation angle radio button is selected then the rotation angle will be read from the trace header field selected in the adjacent drop down menu Constant rotation angle If the Constant rotation angle radio button is selected then the rotation angle will be read from the user supplied value in the adjacent text entry box Angle in radians If checked the rotation angle will be read in units of radians Otherwise the rotation angle will be read in units of degr
390. tart time of the analysis with respect to the first break time Window length ms Length of birefringence analysis following start time Polarity of xline E W component Defines polarity of crossline component Polarity of inline N S component Defines polarity of inline component Rotate trace If checked the optimum rotation angle determined by the Birefringence analysis is applied to the output data Otherwise only the analysis is performed 446 Birefringence Analysis 4C Usage The splitting of shear waves into fast and slow components is called Birefringence Analysis of the split shear waves allow the data recorded in the acquisition or inline crossline coordinate system to be rotated into the frame of reference of the principal axes of the azimuthally anisotropic medium The rotated data correspond to the radial and transverse components of motion The 4C Birefringence analysis requires as input the inline and crossline receiver components recorded by horizontal inline and crossline sources respectively The analysis computes the optimum rotation angle and time delay that maximizes the radial component energy of an inline source or the transverse component energy of a crossline source The analysis also provides an estimate of the azimuth of anisotropy Input Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory The trace header must be updated with source receiver azimuth and source and receiver compon
391. tatics Steps category Processing steps currently available are RE Statics Apply GMG Statics Apply Static Shifts Automatic Residual Statics CMP Statics Separation CMP Statics Summing Flattening Statics Floating Datum Statics Receiver Statics Separation Receiver Statics Summing Refraction Statics Source Statics Separation Source Statics Summing Stack Power Optimization Statics Trim Statics 603 Apply GMG Statics Usage The Apply GMG Statics step allows you to apply datum statics refraction statics and relative statics calculated by Green Mountain Geophysics third party software The static shift values can be applied in a coarse grain mode or fine grain mode The coarse grain mode applies static shifts by shifting to the nearest sample in the time domain The fine grained mode phase shifts your data in the frequency domain allowing an efficient method of shifting your data in increments less than the sample interval Finally the negative of the static values in the card data can be applied Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 GMG Source File optional 3 GMG Receiver File optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Me input spw GMG Source File Es Apply GMG Statics GMG FH File output spw pl Status Open 281 121 604 Step Parameter Dialog Apply GMG Statics Ap
392. te file Offset Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the source receiver offset corresponding to a specified mute time and trace number in the output mute file Unique trace number Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the unique trace number corresponding to a specified mute time and source receiver offset in the output mute file 157 First Break Time Picks Usage The First Break Time Picks card data item is used to store the first break time picks in milliseconds First break may be picked interactively in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog First Break Time Picks Card File First Break Time Picks Card File Enter the first break time picks card data file Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data RE first break picks Hee Index Src Line Src Location Pick Sort 7 rso00000 fooooooo0 foore fs 13 000000 80 000000 86 134811 A e E 13 000000 60 000000 74 188705 o anata aro 13 000000 40 000000 54 427715 E E 11 13 000000 20 000000 40 390427 2 y p oe O 13 13 000000 0 000000 18 750000 Co JO 13 000000 20 000000 43 750000 158 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog First Break Time Picks Customize First Break Picks File Format Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows 1
393. ter the easting coordinate of the second corner of your survey Northing y second corner Enter the northing coordinate of the second corner of your survey Easting x third corner Enter the easting coordinate of the third corner of your survey Northing y third corner Enter the northing coordinate of the third corner of your survey Bin size in line 1 to 2 Enter the size in distance units of the in line side of each bin Bin size cross line 1 to 3 Enter the size in distance units of the cross line side of each bin 450 In line oversize Enter the percent of the in line bin dimension used to extend the bin in the in line direction Cross line oversize Enter the percent of the cross line bin dimension used to extend the bin in the cross line direction First CMP line number Enter the first CMP line number This line number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 2 Line increment Enter the increment in line numbers between adjacent CMP lines First CMP location number Enter the first CMP location number This location number is assigned to all the bins along the side of the survey from corner 1 to corner 3 CMP location increment Enter the increment in locations between adjacent CMP locations Maximum Fold Enter the maximum allowable fold attainable after flex binning Maximum Offset Enter the maximum allowable source receiv
394. ter the line definiton card data file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data R Line Definition File Cell Math Point Index Location Index rove coooun pose anooo0 fr ov oo0000 1092 000000 3276 000000 2 108 0000 1186 000000 3556 000000 fs 121000000 120000000 3612 000000 a frasoooooo 1244 000000 5732 000000 fs fresoooooo 1298 000000 3694 000000 fe 15000000 1399 000000 far97 000000 fe fras oooooo 1421 000000 fa263 000000 9 196 000000 1471 00000 _ 4a13 000000 fo 21z 000000 _ 1590 000000 2770 000000 fi 243 000 1720 000000 s1oa 0no000 12 270000000 1788 000000 5364 000000 ta feoe ooooo0 173 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Line Definition File Customize Line Definition File Format Number of comment records preceeding data 1 Sheet header field Start column Length Number of rows as Data header field Start column Length Easting ES Northing EN Point order index 7 Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required Sheet Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of coordinate pairs used to define the line in the output
395. th a group of channels on the streamer in the streamer definition file Easting offset from origin Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the easting offset distance from the survey origin for the first channel on the streamer in the streamer definition file Northing offset from origin Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the northing offset distance from the survey origin for the first channel on the streamer in the streamer definition file Azimuth of stream Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the streamer azimuth in the streamer definition file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the streamer definition file 227 Surgical Mutes Usage The Surgical Mutes card data item is used to store surgical mute data Mute times are in units of seconds Surgical mutes may be defined interactively in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Step Parameter Dialog Surgical Mute Card File Surgical Mute Card File Enter the surgical mute card data file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data 101 Location 101 000000 Cell Math Sheet 1 of 1 Trace ID Pick Index 2534 722168 2787 500000 232 f2 2753 472168 2787 500000 232 B 228 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Surgical Mute Customize Su
396. that describes the accepted SEG Y standard as published by the Society of Exploration Geophysics If the file or trace header of the selected SEG Y file is known to differ from the SEG standard an alternate file may be selected that describes the header 555 Seismic File Usage The Seismic File step allows you to select or create a SPW format seismic file on disk It is the input SPW seismic format file and or the output SPW seismic format file for almost all the processing steps Input Links The Seismic File may receive input links from any processing step that requires an output seismic data file In this case execution of the flow will require that the user provides a file name for the Seismic File by left clicking on the icon to open the Seismic File dialog and creating the output file name with the Browse button Output Links Output links from the Seismic File may be directed to any processing step that requires as input a seismic data file In this case execution of the flow will require that the user provides a file name for the Seismic File by left clicking on the icon to open the Seismic File dialog and selecting the input file name with the Browse button Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo oe Seismic File 556 Step Parameter Dialog Seismic File Seismic File SPW seismic file name Number of records Traces per record 0 Sample interval sec 0 0000000 Samples per trace 0 Input
397. the data sample values are not usually exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to be evenly sampled at the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Mute Control Set the parameters for the stretch mute definition Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting removes the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute tape length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Scale input velocities by Enter the amount by which the input velocities are scaled up or down A value of 1 0 does not alter the velocity field 643 Do inverse NMO application If checked the inverse NMO correction will be applied instead of the usual forward NMO 644 Apply PP Non hyperbolic Moveout Usage Non hyperbolic P wave moveout may become significant when source receiver offsets are approximately equal to or greater than the depth of reflection The resulting deviations from the hyperbolic t
398. the length of the decon design window in milliseconds 688 Apply moveout to decon design window If checked a linear moveout will be applied to the deconvolution design window The window start time will shift by delta time offset velocity Linear moveout velocity Enter the linear moveout of the deconvolution design window Range limit trace in design window If checked the range of traces used to design the deconvolution operator may be limited by offset Minimum absolute offset Enter the minimum absolute receiver trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator Maximum absolute offset Enter the maximum absolute receiver trace to use in the design of the deconvolution operator 689 Receiver Deconvolution Usage The Receiver Deconvolution step is a Weiner Levinson based algorithm that allows you to decompose the receiver response to account for changes in wavelet shape due to near receiver conditions Both spiking and predictive deconvolution operators are available You choose the amount of pre whitening the inverse filter length the start time of you operator design window and the design window length You may also apply a linear moveout to your deconvolution design windows to allow a sliding window whose start time varies with offset For the predictive deconvolution method you must choose a predictive length for your wavelet You also have the option of range limiting by offset distance th
399. the range of dips Dip Specification Select whether the dips are specified in ms trace or distance units sec If distance units sec is selected the group interval is used as the trace spacing Thus valid trace headers must exist for the data 314 Ms trace Interpret the dips specified above as units of ms trace Velocity Interpret the dips specified above as distance units sec Trace Amplitude Definition Select the trace amplitude type to use Use relative amplitude traces Selects the use of relative amplitude scaled traces in the analysis Relative amplitude traces are scaled independently of one another Use true amplitude traces Selects the use of true amplitude scaled traces in the analysis True amplitude traces are scaled by one common factor per record 315 F K Spectrum Usage The F K Spectrum step allows you to create F K spectrum image plots of your seismic data for designing F K filters Alternatively the F K spectrum can be directly created in Seis Viewer from a selected seismic file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data containing F K spectrum mandatory Example Flowchart F Documentation flo o input seismic data spw e F K Spectrum 2 output FK spectrum image spw SELECT 189 31 316 Step Parameter Dialog F K Spectrum F K Spectrum Trace Amplitude Definition Output Use relative amplitude traces C Ampl
400. the sort type of the traces of these output records These two sort keys are mandatory The Tertiary Sort Key is optional and controls sorting of duplicate trace types such as two traces in a CMP bin at identical offsets For each sort key you control the bin interval and bin size A bin defines how the sorted data type is grouped A bin consists of one or more adjacent locations sorted into the same output location You must specify the size of the bin and the interval between bins A bin size can be as small as one and as large as the number of locations in your data set The bin interval is the number of locations to skip to reach the next location for output The range limits allow you to limit the location in the output to the specific range of location your require for further analysis and processing The General Trace Sort step appears on the flow chart as a seismic icon Therefore compilation and execution of the General Trace Sort is performed by either of two methods First if the flow segment to be compiled only contains the sort step and the corresponding seismic output the flow must be compiled and executed as a separate job This is because the lack of an intermediate processing step between the sort and the output will result in the compilation of all linked steps on the Flowchart canvas Second if the flow to be compiled contains an intermediate processing step i e Copy Seismic Data between the sort and the seismic output the flow
401. the stacked sections A warning appears in the console window if the maximum static offset criteria results in the removal of more than 95 of the stack trace fold 631 Median filter static values If checked a running median spatial filter is applied to each sample The filter is an effective way to remove spikes The operator size is specified along inline and crossline directions The crossline operator size is restricted to 1 for 2 D seismic data Every Nth iteration Apply the median filter at this iteration interval A value of 1 applies the filter every iteration Inline operator length Spatial size of median filter along the inline direction in samples Crossline operator length Spatial size of median filter along the crossline direction in samples Restricted to 1 for 2 D seismic data End iteration based on static value If checked stop the process when the maximum static shift for the iteration is less than the specified value Static value for exit Maximum static in ms Build intermediate files If checked intermediate analysis profiles are written to the directory specified by the Output SPW format seismic file name selection Suffices are appended automatically based on iteration number The naming convention appends _tmpliteration number to the output seismic file name where iteration number is an integer from 1 to the number of iterations Files are overwritten on subsequent iterations
402. time shift between pairs of corresponding data traces contained in a reference and secondary data volume The value of the average phase rotation and the average time shift between the two volumes is written to the execution console The option exists to output the value of each phase rotation time shift pair to a Phase Matching Statistics card data file Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Phase Matching Statistics card data optional Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo EJ Reference Seismic Data Set spw Reference Seismic Data Set spw Ex E Phase Matching Phase Matching Phase Matching Statistics Status Open 424 226 513 Step Parameter Dialog Phase Matching Phase Matching Start angle for analysis degrees 60 00 End angle for analysis degrees 60 00 Angle increment degrees 5 00 Second seismic file name Browse C Testing Cross Correlation step 2 spw Cancel Parameter Description Start angle for analysis degrees Enter the start angle used in the analysis The step will analyze all angles from the Start angle to the End angle at increments specified by the Angle increment End angle for analysis degrees Enter the end angle used in the analysis The step will analyze all angles from the Start angle to the End angle at increments specified by the Angle increment Angle increment de
403. times the number of output time samples times 4 in bytes Input Links 1 Seismic data in bin sorted order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards mandatory Output Links 1 None The migrated data is output to an auxiliary disc file Reference Example Flowchart 428 HE Documentation flo a input spw Velocity Function Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration SELECT 206 125 429 Step Parameter Dialog Pre Stack Kirchoff Time Migration Pre Stack Kirchhoff Time Migration Time window Dip limits Limit output time v Limit dip Dip limit at target degrees 20 0 Dip roll off band degrees 3 0 Target Anti alias filter Traveltime at target 2500 0 Apply anti alias filter Velocity at target 10000 0 Offsets Restart Number of offsets per gather 20 l Create restart file Maximum offset distance 2000 0 E te QC Spw fil Output Range Create pw file Limit Min Max Restart migration Line 7 Location 7 po oo V Verbose console mode Output SPW file name and working directory for temporary disk file Browse Cancel Parameter Description Time window The output time may be limited to decrease the run time and the amount of memory required for execution Limit output time If checked the output time of the migration will be limited by the following parameters Start time on trace Enter the start time for migration in milliseconds End time on trace Enter the end time fo
404. ting by offset distance the traces used in the design of the deconvolution operator Input Links 1 Seismic data in source shot sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in source shot sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo Mia input spw E Shot Deconvolution Me output spw Status Open 312 330 693 Step Parameter Dialog Deconvolution Source Deconvolution Type Of Operator Pre whitening 2 0 100 Spiking Inverse filter length ms 150 0 Predictive Number of operators per trace 1 Overlap of design window ms 500 0 Range limit trace in design window Design window start ms 0 0 oo Design window length ms 500 0 3000 0 M Apply moveout to decon design window Linear moveout velocity 7000 0 Cancel Parameter Description Type of Operator Select type of deconvolution to perform Spiking or Predictive Spiking Weiner Levinson spiking deconvolution Predictive Weiner Levinson predictive or gapped deconvolution Prediction length ms Enter the prediction length in milliseconds Pre whitening percent Enter the prewhitening multiplier The zero lag of the autocorrelation function is increased by this amount to induce stability in the matrix solution Inverse filter length ms Enter the length of the filter to be calculated and applied in milliseconds Design window start ms Enter the start tim
405. tion x n 0 5 0 5 cos 2 pi n N Hamming A Hamming taper is specified by the equation x n 0 54 0 46 cos 2 pi n N Blackman A Blackman taper is specified by the equation x n 0 42 0 5 cos 2 pi n N 0 08 cos 4 pi n N No taper No taper will be applied to the mute This may result in problems in later processing steps due to Gibbs effect Mute taper length Enter the mute taper length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Mute Interpolation If checked the surgical mutes will be interpolated between picked control points 479 Apply Tail Mute Usage The Apply Tail Mute step allows you to apply a set of picked mute cards to your data You may choose to interpolate mute functions for the records between the picked mute records or to just mute the records associated with the picked mutes You have a choice of applying a Hanning Hamming or Blackman type of mute taper You may also specify the length of the mute taper Tail mutes may be interactively defined in SeisViewer using the Pick Traces tool located in the Picking menu Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 1 Tail Mutes cards mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw baH Apply Tail Mute Tail Mutes os input spw AAA SELECT 174 73
406. tion file Y second key value Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the Y coordinate associated with a given coordinate pair in the output polygon definition file Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the polygon definition file 184 PP Nhmo Eta Function Usage The PP Nhmo Eta Function card data item is used to store time eta pairs for the case of P wave non hyperbolic moveout where Eta is a parameter that characterizes the anisotropy in transversely isotropic media Once the short spread P wave stacking velocity function has been picked corresponding Eta functions may be picked interactively in Seis Viewer on Eta Semblance gathers The PP Nhmo Eta Function card has the same structure as a Velocity Function card Step Parameter Dialog Eta Card File Eta Card File Enter the eta card data file name Customize Browse cancel Example Card Data RE Eta Semblance pics 22 916666 0 000000 872 916687 0 075000 1135 416626 0 104167 1754 166626 0 095833 2610 416748 0 104167 185 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Velocity Customize Velocity File Format Number of comment records preceding data 1 File header field Start column Length No of velocity locations sheets 1 Sheet header field Start column Length CMP line number CMP location number Number of rows Data heade
407. tment Processing steps currently available are Processing Categories Am plitude Equalization Apply Gain Automatic Gain Control Clip Random Noise Spherical Divergence Trace Header Amplitude Math Windowed Trace Balance 115 Amplitude Equalization Usage The Amplitude Equalization step allows you to balance the RMS values of your data traces to a constant specified RMS level You can also clip your data at a specified level You can specify the data window to use in calculating the RMS amplitudes the output RMS and clipping levels and the method of amplitude equalization which may be either trace constant or record constant Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in same sort order as input mandatory 116 Example Flowchart e Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 FlowChart Processing Seismic Display Seismic Analysis Attribute Map Survey Picking Help W Untitled El Amplitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing Filtering 2 Geometry D Le l e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Current project Teapot Dome BLE Br NS 117 Step Parameter Dialog Amplitude Equalization Equalization window start ms 0 0 Window length ms 1000 0 RMS level 20000 0
408. to cluster command send the job to a remote cluster system The job Scheduler command the Parameter Testing command and the Configure real time displays command are currently disabled and are in the process of being implemented z Seismic Processing Workshop 3 0 FlowChart Processing Seismic Analysis Seismic Display Attribute Map Survey Picking Help Wi Geometry B 15 Source Attribute W untitied eometry Definition J Processing record 112 of 839 Processing record 113 of 839 Processing record 114 of 839 Processing record 115 of 839 Processing record 116 of 839 Processing record 117 of 839 Processing record 118 of 839 Processing record 119 of 839 EX national Petro Reserve Teapot Dome 2 Filtering Multi component Am plitude Adjustment Auxiliary Data A P Auxiliary Data R Z Display Editing Geometry Migration Mutes Quality Analysis Seismic Data SpectralAttributes Spectral Decomposition Stacking Summing GD Statics Lo gt e Execute Abort Open flow Close flow New flow Help Execution of segment 1 in progress Current project Teapot Dome Current flow 1 Geometry X 429 Y 8 Executing a flow segment 50 The Preferences command displays the Processing Preferences dialog This dialog is used to control the threading for local execution and the number of cpus used for remote cluster execution Al
409. ts Usage The Apply Static Shifts step allows you to apply source receiver CMP and trace statics calculated by any of the various statics processing steps The static shift values can be applied in a coarse grain mode or fine grain mode The coarse grain mode applies static shifts by shifting to the nearest sample in the time domain The fine grained mode phase shifts your data in the frequency domain allowing an efficient method of shifting your data in increments less than the sample interval Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 CMP Statics cards optional 3 Receiver Statics cards optional 4 Source Statics cards optional 5 Trace Statics cards optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo 2 input spw H CMP Statics HH Apply Static Shift Receiver Statics 4 Source Statics output spw A Status Open 354 385 607 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Static Shifts Apply Static Shifts Static Application Mode Coarse grain C Fine grain l Apply negative of static shifts l Apply header static to data Bulk shift ms 0 000 Parameter Description Static Application Mode Select the mode of statics application Coarse grain Statics shifts are applied to the nearest discrete sample position Fine grain Statics shifts are applied as a precise phase shift operator in the Fourier do
410. ty Enter the NMO velocity This is the constant velocity that will be used if a set of velocity function cards is NOT linked to the NMO correction step Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of the data sample values are not usually exactly at the sample interval of the data the data is interpolated to be evenly sampled at the correct sample interval Linear Linear interpolation uses the equation of a line y mx b to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Quadratic Quadratic interpolation uses the equation of a quadratic y ax 2 bx c to interpolate data values between or beyond existing data Mute Control Set the parameters for the stretch mute definition Apply stretch mute If checked a stretch mute will be applied to the NMO corrected data Stretch muting removes the stretching of the data due to the NMO correction 653 Percentage Enter the percent stretch mute The smaller the percent the more severe the mute function Taper length Enter the mute tape length in samples Longer taper lengths result in a smoother transition from the mute zone to the data zone Correlation window samples Length of the correlation window in number of samples centered on the horizon time used in the computation of residual NMO t
411. um M Use average horizon time 200 00 Cancel Parameter Description Horizon number Enter the number of the horizon in the Horizon File card used to determine the static shifts Flattening Datum Statics can be computed that will flatten the chosen horizon to the average horizon time or to a specified constant time Use average horizon time If checked the CMP statics card will contain statics that flatten the chosen horizon to a time that is the average of all times defining the horizon Time to flatten msec If chosen the CMP statics card will contain statics which flatten the chosen horizon to the specified constant time 616 Floating Datum Statics Usage The Floating Datum Statics step inputs the trace headers from a Seismic Data file and outputs a set of Source and Receiver static files that adjust the data to a floating datum and CMP static file that asdjusts the data from the floating datum to a flat datum Alternatively the Source and Receiver statics can be computed that adjust the surface data directly to a flat datum In both cases the statics are applied using the Apply Statics step Surface Elevation Floating Datum Elevation Ss 0 Flat Datum Elevation V consolidated Surface Elevation Flat Datum Elevation Input Links 1 Seismic data file in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Source Statics cards mandatory 2 Receiver Stati
412. umbers to mode converted PS data as a function of the source receiver offset and a constant or time variable V V ratio gamma Input Links 1 Converted wave data volume in any sort order mandatory 2 PS Nhmo gamma function card optional Output Links 1 Converted wave data volume in any sort order mandatory Reference Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo CCP Binning CCP Binning PS Nhmo Gamma Function PZ gy CCP Binned Seismic Data spw CCP Binned Seismic Data spw Status Open 278 147 449 Step Parameter Dialog CCP Binning CCP Binning Easting x first corner 0 000000000 First CMP line number Northing y first corner 0 000000000 Line increment Easting x second corner 0 000000000 First CMP location Northing y second corner 1 000000000 CMP location Easting x third corner 1 000000000 Mala rthi third p Northing y third corner 0 000000000 Masdmumeftset 1100000 Bin size in line 1 to 2 1 000000000 Gamma 2 0 Bin size cross line 1 to 3 1 000000000 In line oversize 10 Input SPW format seismic file name Cross line oversize 10 C Testing Multi Component iSPW Data 2C Cancel Browse _Cancel_ Browse Parameter Description Easting x first corner Enter the easting coordinate of the first corner of your survey Northing y first corner Enter the northing coordinate of the first corner of your survey Easting x second corner En
413. ument Input Links 1 None The SEGD file is selected inside the step dialog mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart 2 Documentation flo Ey y Sercel SEG D Files di Output spw Mm lt gt Status Open 80 125 563 Step Parameter Dialog ES Sercel SEGD Input Sercel SEG D File Specify input directory O Specify starting input file Input Directory Dataset Parameters Override Number of records 0 O Sample interval ms 0 0000 O Samples pertrace 0 O Maximum traces per record 2048 O Input files as they are written to disk Strip auxiliary traces Parameter Description Specify input directory With the radio button set to Specify input directory the browse button toggles to Input Directory Use the Input Directory button to specify the folder where the SEGD files are located Specify starting input file With the radio button set to Specify starting input file the browse button toggles to First Input File Use the First Input File button to specify the first SEGD file located inside the Input Directory to be reformatted Number of records By default all records will be reformatted Check the override box to specify the number of records starting with the first input file Sample interval ms By default the sample interval will be extracted from the general header If that
414. user Record in the file in bytes Enter the length in bytes of one line of the trace kills file 241 Trace Statics The Trace Statics card data item is used to store trace static values in units of milliseconds as a function of trace ID Step Parameter Dialog Trace Statics Card File Trace Statics Card File Enter the trace statics card data file name Customize Browse Cancel Example Card Data RE Trace Statics Cell Math Trace Id 1 feanonoo 0 600000 0 700000 0 700000 0 700000 0 800000 0 400000 0 100000 0 200000 0 400000 1 242 Card Data Customization Parameter Dialog Customize Trace Statics Customize Trace Statics File Format No of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of rows Ss Data header field Start column Length Trace ID 1 Time 11 a a Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File Header field Number of rows Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the number of static values in the trace statics file Data header field Trace ID Enter the start column and the number of columns allocated to write the trace ID number in the
415. using a 2 D Delaunay triangulation weighting of evaluation points Velocity function CMP locations are triangulated then barycentric coordinates are used to compute weights between velocity functions The interpolation is done laterally No allowance is made for structure An option allows for the application of a non hyperbolic moveout correction Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 2 Velocity Function cards optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory References See Technical Note TN NonHyperbolicMoveout doc Example Flowchart RE Documentation flo PZA 2 input spw input spw E He Apply Normal Moveout Apply Normal Moveout Velocity Function oe output spw output spw j 439 182 642 Step Parameter Dialog Apply Normal Moveout Apply Normal Moveout Mute Control Correction velocity 7000 0 d Interpolation Type Selection Percentage 30 C Linear Quadratic Taper length samples 15 Scale input velocities by 1 000 l Do inverse NMO application Cancel Parameter Description Correction velocity Enter the NMO velocity This constant velocity that will be used if a set of velocity function cards is NOT linked to the NMO correction step Interpolation Type Selection Select the interpolation type linear or quadratic The moveout function causes trace data samples to be moved in time to new locations Since these new time locations of
416. ut spw Status Open 460 Step Parameter Dialog Dual Summation Dual Summation Method C Max absolute samples Time variant function Sliding window size 200 0 Vertical polarity 1 Parameter Description Method Select the analysis method to determine the dual sensor summation factors Max absolute samples If selected the geophone scale factor will be equal to the ratio of the maximum absolute value of the geophone trace to the maximum absolute value of the hydrophone trace Time variant function If selected the geophone scale factor will be a time variant function controlled by a sliding window Sliding window size size of the window in ms over which the dual sensor summation factors are calculated Vertical polarity Defines polarity of the vertical component 461 Horizontal Rotation Usage The Horizontal Rotation step rotates the two horizontal components of a multi component data volume through rotation angles determined by the 1 source receiver azimuth 2 the azimuth of the inline component and 3 the azimuth of the crossline component The step outputs a single data file consists of rotated radial Receiver Component 17 and transverse Receiver Component 16 component traces Input Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory The trace header must be updated with source receiver azimuth and source and receiver component types The common receiv
417. val 17 2byteint _ Samples per trace 21 2byteint y Sample format 25 2byteint C 18M Float y Trace header Header size in bytes 240 Header name Start byte Data type Field File Number Channel Number e Inline Crossline Offset Create SEG Y Format Dialog 28 The Seismic File is the internal SPW implementation of SEG Y files The standard SEGY format is used for the definition of the headers More detailed descriptions of the SEGY Import SEG Y Export and the SPW Seismic File processing steps may be found in the reference section of the documentation f E seismic Fite PE Seismic File File name File Browse SEGY Index Rebuild SEGY Index Customize Index Map View Trace Headers Trace Header Ranges General Dataset Properties Number of records Eo Samples per trace bo Traces per record Eo Sample interval I Number of traces Eo Sample format bo Data Dimension O 2D survey O 3D survey Input Sort and Selection Options Range Minimum Maximum limit value value Interval Group Primary sort key None E pee e UA a a Secondary sort key None a CHIC CJC Tertiary sort key None a fC JCJ CIC Quaternary sort key None a COJO C_JC_ Create record at Change in primary y Regather groups into supergathers _ Output Options Append to existing
418. ve data select Convert PP to PS If the input times were picked on PS wave data select Convert PS to PP Convert PP to PS Maps P wave event times to PS wave event times Convert PS to PP Maps PS wave event times to P wave event times Samples per trace Enter the number of samples per trace in the seismic data from which the event times were picked Samples interval ms Enter the sample interval of the seismic data from which the event times were picked 459 Dual Summation Usage The Dual Summation step scales the pressure sensor data hydrophone to the same range as the co located vertical component geophone data After scaling the two recordings are summed so that the spectral notch resulting from the receiver water surface ghost will be eliminated If the input data are 4C the Dual Summation step will output enhanced 3C data If the input data are 2C the Dual Summation step will output enhanced single component data Input Links 1 Seismic data in common receiver order mandatory The trace header must be updated with the source and receiver component types The common receiver gathers should be sorted by 1 receiver number 2 source receiver offset 3 receiver component Output Links 1 1C or 3C seismic data in common receiver gather sort order mandatory Reference Example Flowchart HE documentation flo Ocean bottom 2C or AC data spw E Dual Summation Mi Summed 1C or 3C outp
419. ve sequential trace Therefore number of pilot traces should equal the number of input traces 685 One pilot per record in the data file This option uses one trace from each record as the pilot trace for that record Sweep trace number Enter the trace number to use as the pilot First trace to kill If you demultiplexed the data set with the auxiliary traces to recover the pilot sweep you may wish to kill the these auxiliary traces Enter the first trace number to kill Last trace to kill If you demultiplexed the data set with the auxiliary traces to recover the pilot sweep you may wish to kill the these auxiliary traces Enter the last trace number to kill 686 Offset Deconvolution Usage The Offset Deconvolution step is a Wiener Levinson based algorithm that allows you to decompose the offset response to account for changes in wavelet shape due to offset variable conditions Both spiking and predictive deconvolution operators are available You choose the amount of pre whitening the inverse filter length the start time of you operator design window and the design window length You may also apply a linear moveout to your deconvolution design windows to allow a sliding window whose start time varies with offset For the predictive deconvolution method you must choose a predictive length for your wavelet You also have the option of range limiting by offset distance the traces used in the design of the deconvoluti
420. vidual band pass filter cut off values are linearly interpolated based on the low and high pass frequencies and the number of bands that you choose Each band is given a Butterworth third order slope with the midpoints of each slope being the half power points Within each band every trace is AGC ed with respect to the maximum amplitude in the window All AGC ed bands are then summed Optionally you may specify the Low Cut Low Pass High Pass High Cut LC LP HP HC filter points and associated weights for summing of up to ten filter bands For optimal balancing of the energy of your frequency bands your filters should be designed such that the slopes of your filters exactly overlap as is illustrated below Such a design optimally flattens the spectrum of your data without distorting the spectrum Input Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw eo Spectral Yrhitening oe output spw a Status Open 246 464 699 Step Parameter Dialog Spectral Whitening Spectral Whitening Number of bands 6 AGC length ms 500 00 Start frequency Hz 1 0 0 End frequency Hz 70 0 V Use filter bands defined below Lo cut Hz Lo pass Hz Hi pass Hz Hi cut Hz Weight 70 0 90 0 1 000 60 0 80 0 1 000 50 0 70 0 1 000 40 0 60 0 1 000 30 0 50 0 1 000 20 0 40 0 1 000 1 2 3 4 5 6
421. volution operators that will be applied to the input data 680 Deconvolution Usage The Deconvolution step is a Wiener Levinson algorithm for applying either spiking or predictive deconvolution to your data You choose the percent pre whitening filter length number of operators the overlap of the operator design windows start time of the first operator design window and the design window lengths For the predictive deconvolution method you must specify the predictive length of your wavelet You may also apply a linear moveout to your deconvolution design windows to allow a sliding window whose start time varies with offset An option exists to output the computed deconvolution operators for subsequent use with the Apply Deconvolution Operators step Input Links 3 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory 4 Horizon card data containing water bottom time picks optional Output Links 1 Seismic data in any sort order mandatory Example Flowchart HE Documentation flo input spw E Deconvolution output spw el gt Status Open 335 353 681 Step Parameter Dialog Deconvolution Deconvolution Type Of Operator Pre whitening 0 100 Spiking Inverse filter length ms 150 0 1 C Predictive Number of operators per trace Overlap of design window ms M Use horizon input for prediction Design window start ms Design window length ms v Apply moveout to decon design window
422. y amp year 01 01 2010 Recording time 11 25 44 e PA PA Bytes per scan 0 Base scan interval 2 00 ine Be ec 44 m Er qe EN a Record type 8 Record length 5000 4 X gt ry EA q Me 4 ES Channel sets 16 External headers 32 E E gt 4 q soo A AA SL Pe PS Source line number 15 00 Source point number 165 00 ES PE S a ii qa J DAN D SS Source point index 1 Source set number 1 Fa bs og a ged s p DR Extended header a A adh i ee Nea as ya 9 o Acquisition length 15000 Sample rate 2000 y i JX S 2 k A gt Y Ea e o i L SEA Q NE y Number of channel sets 16 y lt A Sa K S P E at 4 2 ee a Channelset 11 00 Fh AA PLAN y lt lt QUES Number of channels 3 Channel type 9 E SS y y gt e P oP y a Start time 0 End time 1024 SN 9 r Je S takes E Alias filter freq 200 Alias filter slope 370 S IS Fn g e N ia Low cut fiter freq 0 Low cut filter slope 0 GI r KD Vertical stack 4 Streamer cable 0 First trace 1 Horizontal scale 12 00 DEEE arc Last trace 123 Vertical scale 5 00 Gain dB 0 00 Close Help SEG D Analyzer 45 SPS Analysis The SPS Analyzer is allows you to analyze source receiver and relation sps files and to define the formats of these files FlowChart Processing Select Project Create Project Edit Current Project Set Startup Project Set Working Directory Close Currrent Tab Analyze SEGY File Analyze SEGD File Analyze SPS
423. y located in the same directory as the input data volume A checkpoint file is saved to disk at the same time the QC file is created Checkpoints occur at the same interval specified for the QC files In the event that a migration needs to be restarted check the console file for the input record number that corresponds with the last saved checkpoint file In the Flowchart processing flow for Kirchhoff Pre Stack Time Migration check the restart box and specify the starting record number Compile the processing flow and restart the migration 427 Directory setup Refer to the SPW INSTALL notes for a description of the initial directory configuration Distributed processing requires master and slave executables to reside in the SPWHOME and the SLAVEHOME directories respectively The input dataset can reside anywhere on the master platform The user is responsible for creating a QC directory and a checkpoint directory The QC directory should reside in the same directory as the input seismic volume and it should be named spwQC If the directory does not exist the user will receive a message during the migration start up and the migration will stop The checkpoint directory is not required but highly recommended This directory needs to reside in the same directory as the migration slave executable execslv and should be named spwdata There should be enough disk space to hold a checkpoint file that is the number of bins times the number of offsets
424. yze Position File gt Analyze Horizon File Copy SEGD Files Merge SEGY Files FTP Preferences Exit FlowChart Menu The Select Project and Create Project commands let you select an existing project or create a new project The Edit Current Project command allows you to edit the currently selected project The Set startup project defines the default project to be used when the application launches The Set Working Directory allows you to set the current directory Close Current Tab will close the active tab in the interface 39 SEGY Analyzer The SEGY Analyzer allows you to quickly and efficiently open and investigate a SEG Y format file a Sul SEGY Analyzer Endian order Get from data Big endian Little endian Binary header Header size in bytes Trace header Header size in bytes Header name Field File Number Channel Number CMP Inline Crossline Offset CMP Easting CMP Northing CMP Elevation CMP Datum Source Line Source Location Source Easting Source Northing Canea Miantian ls Samples per trace Sample interval Sample format Text header Header size in bytes Text format 0 EBCDIC Start byte Data type Override 2byteint v 2 byte int v 2byte int v Number of traces Startbyte Data type Minimum Text header Binary header Trace header Seismic view Lbyte Integers 2 byte Integers byte Integers ASCII 4 byte IBM Floa y Maximum Ep Trace scan ran
425. ze Source Statics Number of comment records preceeding data 1 File header field Start column Length Number of lines sheets 1 ES Sheet header field Start column Length Source line number 1 ES Number of rows 12 s Data header field Start column Length Location number fi E Time 12 io Enter the length of each record in the file in bytes 80 Cancel Parameter descriptions Number of comment records preceding data Indicates the number of lines in the output file reserved for writing comment cards These are the first lines in the file A minimum of one line is required File header field Indicates the number of sheets contained in the card data file In the case of the source statics file above there would be one sheet per source line Number of lines Allows you to describe the formatting of the value indicating the number of source lines in the output source statics file Start column Enter the column number to start writing the number of source lines in the output source statics file Length Enter the number of columns reserved for writing the number of source lines in the output source statics file 145 Sheet header field Indicates the sheet number and the number of entries per sheet In the case of the source statics file above the sheet header line contains the source line number and the number of source locations on the line Source line number Allows you to describe the form

SPW3 manual rev 5 - Parallel Geoscience Corporation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents